The Project Gutenberg eBook of Terrain Exercises

This ebook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this ebook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

Title: Terrain Exercises

Author: William H. Waldron

Release date: July 4, 2020 [eBook #62552]
Most recently updated: October 18, 2024

Language: English

Credits: Produced by Richard Tonsing, Tim Lindell and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This
file was produced from images generously made available
by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TERRAIN EXERCISES ***

Transcriber’s Note:

The cover image was created by the transcriber and is placed in the public domain.

Terrain Exercises

By

Lt. Col. William H. Waldron

Infantry, U. S. Army

Washington

United States Infantry Association

1923

Copyright, 1923 By

United States Infantry Association

HAYWORTH PUBLISHING HOUSE, WASHINGTON, D. C.

Table of Contents

| Page
Introduction | 5
Terrain Exercise No. 1
Attack of Strong Point—Rifle Company | 11
Terrain Exercise No. 2
Approach March and Deployment | 51
Terrain Exercise No. 3
Defensive Position | 107
Terrain Exercise No. 4
A Machine Gun Company in Attack | 141
Terrain Exercise No. 5
An Advance Guard | 169
Terrain Exercise No. 6
A Flank Guard | 221
Terrain Exercise No. 7
Posting an Outpost | 255
Terrain Exercise No. 8
A Visiting Patrol | 299
Terrain Exercise No. 9
A Reconnoitering Patrol | 337

Introduction

Terrain Exercises are those military exercises in which the students carry on the operations of imaginary bodies of troops over the actual terrain. As these exercises involve the study of the utilization of the ground itself and the application of tactical formations and methods to it, they are the best means, aside from practical field work with troops, of giving officers and non-commissioned officers practice in carrying out the duties that fall to them in war.

In the Terrain Exercise is found the logical step in tactical training, between the theory and practice of the classroom and the practical training with troops. This method of training is suited to all arms and services, and in view of its practical value is constantly employed by unit commanders in the training of their officers and non-commissioned officers.

Any class of military operations may be practiced, such as the operations of covering troops—advance guards, flank guards and outposts; the operations of the various kinds of patrols; combat—attack and defense; approach march and deployment, and the tactical cooperation of all special arms.

The Director

The smooth working and success of the Terrain Exercise depends almost entirely on the ability and tactical knowledge of the Director, the care he devotes to the selection of the ground, the preparation of the problem, and his own personal preparation for the conduct of the Terrain Exercise. To this end a study should be made of the tactical training it is desired to impart. A problem designed to bring out these points should be drawn up and fitted to the ground. The successive special situations must follow in logical sequence.

The Director must have in his mind a solution of the various situations of the problem and must familiarize himself with all of its phases to the extent that he will be able to make reasonable answer to any question that may be propounded.

He must receive all the ideas presented by the members of the class; take out the good and tactfully discard the poor and indifferent. He must take care that he does not unduly criticize the members of the class when they make mistakes and faulty dispositions. Above all, he must never hold up a solution to ridicule.

Preparation of the Problem

Having determined upon the tactical subject to be studied, the next essential is a problem, clearly and tersely stated, logically drawn and easily understood. The several tactical situations should follow one another in their natural sequence. Each should bring out the tactical points that it is desired to impress upon the members of the class. Long and complex situations, difficult for the average man to grasp, should be avoided. Situations should be interesting and instructive, natural and simple.

The next step is to fit the problem to a particular section of the terrain that may be available. In this connection it is well to draw up a tentative problem with its several situations. Then go out on the ground and fit the problem to it.

The Director should carefully work out on the ground beforehand the several situations that he desires to develop. He should work out the details of all possible solutions and prepare himself to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of measures that may be proposed by members of the class and to state the solution that he, himself, prefers, with the reasons therefor.

A sufficient number of copies of the initial problem, together with the special situations, should be prepared so that a copy may be available for each member of the class. This is a more satisfactory method than the Director explaining them verbally. Time is saved and misunderstandings avoided. The special situations are numbered serially and issued at the proper time, as the Exercise progresses. It is a good idea to have an envelope in which to carry the cards or slips of paper bearing each special situation.

General Conduct of a Terrain Exercise

The problem will ordinarily consist of a general situation and several situations.

Take the class to the point where the Exercise is to begin. Distribute copies of the problem and allow a few minutes for the members of the class to look over the problem and the terrain. The Director then reads the problem aloud and points out the topographical features and places that are referred to. The members of the class follow from the copies in their possession.

Questions are asked by the Director. One or more members of the class are required to make a brief statement of the problem, the idea being to make certain that every man is entirely familiar with the tactical situation under consideration. This insures a solid foundation on which the succeeding situations may be developed.

The first situation is then handed to members of the class. The Director cautions them that each man is to consider himself as being the commander of the unit whose operations are to be considered.

The solution of the situation is then proceeded with. This solution may be required to be reduced to writing; it may be given orally; or a combination of the two systems may be employed.

For example: The situation involves the preparation of a verbal field order. The Director proceeds step by step with the details of the matter to be included in each successive paragraph, arriving at a decision as to just what the wording should be.

1. Information of the enemy and our supporting troops.

2. Plan of the commander.

3. Distribution of troops and tactical order for each element.

4. Administration arrangements, where applicable.

5. Place of commander or where messages are to be sent.

Having determined upon the wording of each paragraph, the members of the class are required to write out the body of the order.

Where the members of the class have sufficiently progressed in their tactical training some of the preliminary discussion and solution may be omitted and the men be required to write out the body of the order based on the tactical situation. The written solutions are collected by the Director and redistributed to the class, taking care that no man receives his own solution back again. This is productive of good results, for if a man knows that his work is to be seen by another he will put forth his best effort and be more careful with his work. Again, the entire solution may be given orally and nothing reduced to writing. In this case the Director brings out the elements by questions and discussion, and in the end one or more members of the class are called upon to state the contents of the body of the order. This method is excellent for the training of officers in the giving of verbal tactical orders.

The solution having been completed, the subject is opened up for discussion. The members of the class are encouraged to ask questions and express their views on the various elements under consideration.

The class is then conducted to the place where the next special situation is to be taken up for solution, and here the same procedure as outlined above is taken. The Terrain Exercise concludes with a short conference, in which the Director makes a résumé of the problems, discusses the several lessons of the day, and shows the application of tactical principles to them.

General Rules

The following general rules should be observed as far as practicable:

a. Weather and climatic conditions should be accepted as they actually exist on the day of the Exercise.

b. Interest is best maintained by bringing up a succession of instructive situations, each designed to teach some tactical lesson, dealing with each one concisely but thoroughly, and promptly passing on to the next. Long discussion and personal arguments between members of the class are to be avoided. Unimportant phases are passed over quickly, thus allowing the requisite amount of time to be devoted to those that are really worth while.

c. Ordinarily four or five situations are about all that may be profitably included in one Terrain Exercise.

d. All members of the class should be equipped with blank paper of uniform size (to facilitate the handling of written solutions), message blanks, pencils, sketching equipment for making rough sketches on which tactical depositions may be shown.

e. Ordinarily large scale maps should not be used. One of the valuable features of the Terrain Exercise is that all tactical decisions and dispositions are based on a study of the ground itself. If the members of the class are allowed to have large scale maps, the exercise may resolve itself into the solution of a map problem whereby the advantage of the study of the ground itself is detracted from.

However, sheets of the United States Geological Survey maps should, if practicable, be obtained and issued, as it is desirable to accustom officers and non-commissioned officers to work with small scale maps and to familiarize them with this particular map.

f. The number of men in a class should be limited to the number that one director is able to handle.

Terrain Exercise No. 1.
Attack of Strong Point—Rifle Company

General Situation:

The (a) forms the boundary between hostile States. An invading Red force was counter attacked by Blue troops and after severe fighting the Reds have retired. The Blue advance has been stubbornly contested.

Special Situation—Blue:

The Blue advance was resumed this morning. The 1st Infantry advancing on the extreme right of the Blue line, has been held up.

After a short delay, the 2nd battalion resumed its forward movement, but attempts of the assault waves of companies A and B (on its right) to advance beyond (b) were stopped by fire from the front and especially by enfilading machine gun fire from (c).

Heavy firing—artillery and small arms—can be heard along the line to the left. Shells fall occasionally within and in front of the area occupied by the 1st battalion.

Lieutenant Colonel X, commanding the 1st battalion, has arrived at this point (d) accompanied by a part of his staff; Captain C, commanding the support company C; Captain D, commanding the machine gun company; and Lieutenant Z, commanding a platoon of the Howitzer company, which organization has been attached to the battalion.

After studying the situation in his front Lieutenant Colonel X summoned Captains A and B, commanding the assault companies, and issued verbal orders for continuing the attack.

Explanation of Letter Symbols

(a) In designating the boundary line some natural topographical feature should be selected, such as a river, creek, canal, crest of ridge, etc. In this problem it may be assumed that the Red invading force has advanced several miles into Blue territory before its advance was checked by the counter-attack.

(b) The general front occupied by the 1st battalion where it is held up by the fire from the front and that from the enemy strong point to the right front. In fitting this problem to the ground care will have to be taken to get all the features properly coordinated. The line of departure for Company C may be selected first and the general line of the 1st battalion prolonged to the left. Then select the location of the strong point with reference to the line of departure of Company C. Cover for the deployment of the company should be available.

(c) Location of the enemy strong point. This should be some topographical feature that might be logically occupied as a strong point by the enemy and from which the advance of the 1st battalion might be interfered with.

(d) This point should be near the center of the front covered by the 1st battalion and should command a view of the front. There should be reasonable cover for the battalion commander and his staff. In other words, it should not be so exposed to enemy fire that the battalion commander could not go there to make his personal reconnaissance.

Procedure

The class will be assembled at (d) where the Terrain Exercise is to begin.

The Director distributes the sheets containing the problem (General Situation and Special Situation—Blue). A few minutes are allowed the members of the class to read over the problem after which the Director will read it aloud and point out the places of importance. One or more members of the class will be called upon to state his understanding of the tactical situation.

Care will be taken to indicate the right of the line occupied by Company A and the location of the enemy strong point will be accurately pointed out.

Explanation

The Director: “Before going further into the problem it is necessary for every member of the class to have an accurate understanding of the formation in which the first battalion is advancing. It is necessary for you to visualize the situation just as it would appear if the operation were actually taking place.”

The battalion is advancing in attack formation with two companies as assault companies (Company A is on the right and Company B on the left) and one company (C) as battalion reserve. The front covered is about 750 yards. The right of Company A is at (indicate). Company C is marching about the center of the battalion sector and about 500 yards in rear of the front lines of the assault companies. The 1st battalion, being on the right of the Blue line has a combat patrol of one squad from the battalion reserve covering the right flank. This patrol is advancing about 150 yards to the right and rear of the assault echelon. A connecting group of two or three men also from the reserve company, maintains communication with the 2nd battalion on the left. As the reserve company may be called into action at any moment, these detachments are taken from the support platoon of the company, the 3rd. The battalion commander and his staff march between the assault echelon and the reserve company.

When the battalion was held up by the enemy, information of this fact was sent back to Lieutenant Colonel X by the commanders of the assault companies and it was also brought back by the battalion intelligence scouts who are with the assault companies. On receipt of the information Lieutenant Colonel X came forward to this point to ascertain the situation and by a personal reconnaissance, see it for himself. Accompanying him were his staff officers Bn-2; Bn-3, Captains C and D; and Lieutenant Z. This is the situation in which we find the battalion commander at the beginning of this Terrain Exercise. I hope every member of the class understands this formation and all the details of it. If there are any doubts about it now is the time to clear them up. If there are no questions we will proceed.

Procedure

The Director will now distribute the sheets bearing Situation No. 1.

The Problem

Situation No. 1:

You, Captain C, commanding Company C, the battalion reserve, took down the following notes from the battalion commander’s orders:

“The 1st battalion will resume its advance, attacking the enemy in front and enveloping his left, including the strong point.”

“Time of attack—signal from battalion commander.”

“Line of departure—present front line.”

“Companies A and B make frontal attack covering present front of 750 yards. Company A, Base Company.”

“Company C will attack the strong point, enveloping its left.”

“One platoon company D and the 1st platoon Howitzer Company will support the attack of Company C. Captain D and Lieutenant Z will confer with Captain C regarding the assistance to be rendered.”

“Captain C will notify the battalion commander when he is ready to attack.”

“The attack will be pushed hard.”

You, Captain C, have with you three platoon runners and two company runners.

Required:

Your action and orders during the next 20 minutes.

Procedure

A few minutes are allowed the members of the class to look over the situation. It is then read aloud and the necessary explanations made.

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what is the formation of Company C, at the time the battalion commander’s order is received by Captain C?”

Lieutenant Williams: “The formation would depend upon the cover available, the distance from the front line and the class of fire it is being subjected to. In this case I should say that the company will be in dispersed formation either in squad columns or platoon columns. I would prefer the platoon columns because they are more easily controlled. I think I would have each platoon in a platoon column. The first and second platoons would march abreast with an interval of at least 40 yards with the third platoon marching about 50 yards to the rear and opposite the interval between the first and second. Company headquarters would be in the lead.”

The Director: “That seems to be a very good formation under the circumstances.”

(Note.—The Director should prepare an answer to this question based on the lay of the ground.)

“How do you arrive at the interval of 40 yards between the two leading platoons?”

Lieutenant Williams: “That is about the minimum distance to avoid casualties in more than one column from the burst of one shell and it is about the maximum distance for control and visibility in the woods.”

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hastings, let us assume that you are Captain C. You have received the orders of the battalion commander. What is your mission?”

Captain Hastings: “To attack the enemy’s strong point enveloping its left.”

The Director: “In sizing up the situation what points would you consider?”

Captain Hastings: “I would consider the enemy’s position, and if possible, go to a point where I can make a personal reconnaissance of it. I would consider the route by which I can get my company up to the point where I can make the attack and select the line of departure for the company. I will then decide upon my plan of maneuver and the formation of the company for attack.”

The Director: “In other words, you will make an Estimate of the Situation and upon this you will base your decision and in turn your orders?”

Captain Hastings: “Yes, sir. That is the idea.”

The Director: “I want to emphasize the necessity for this process of sizing up the situation on the part of all officers charged with a tactical operation. If you come to a decision without doing so you may be right and you may be wrong. The chances are greatly in favor of the latter. If you stop and consider the elements of the problem as outlined by Captain Hastings the chances are that you will be right. In any event you have the odds on your side. Lieutenant Wallace, what troops have been designated to support your company?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “A part of the machine gun company and a howitzer platoon.”

The Director: “You will note that these two units have been ordered to support your attack. They are not attached to your company. What do you understand to be the difference between a supporting unit and an attached unit?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “An attached unit becomes an integral part of the force and is subject to its commander’s orders. A supporting unit receives its orders, not from the commander of the force being supported, but from another source, usually a common superior.”

The Director: “That is right. I hope you all note the distinction. It is the rule, however, that the supporting unit must work with the unit that it is supporting in every way possible so as to insure teamwork in the accomplishment of the common mission.”

“Lieutenant Ralston, how would you get your instructions to your platoon leaders, who are back with the company?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I have a runner with me from each of the three platoons. I would send these runners back to their respective platoons to tell the platoon commanders to report to me at ___________” (Lieutenant Ralston would indicate where the platoon commanders are to report.)

The Director: “Let us assume that you are Captain C. Just what would you say to the runners?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would call the platoon runners to me and say:

“‘Do you see that ___________?’ (Designating a tree or other well defined object.) ‘Each platoon runner will deliver this message to his platoon leader—Platoon leaders will join Captain C at once at ___________ (Place). Repeat the message.’”

The Director: “All right. Now let us assume that the platoon runners have started back to their platoons, what would you do now?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would go over to the right to make a personal reconnaissance of the enemy strong point, select my line of departure for the attack and get the ‘line-up’ of the supporting weapons.”

The Director: “That would seem to be the reasonable thing to do.”

The Class is now conducted over to the right, to a point about the center of the line of departure for the attack.

The Director: “Captain Harvey, let us assume that you have come to this point. You have with you the commanders of the machine gun company, Captain D, and the Howitzer platoon, Lieutenant Z. You decide that the line of departure for your attack shall be along here (indicating). What instructions would you give to Captain D and Lieutenant Z?”

Captain Harvey: “I would indicate to them where I want the machine guns, light mortars, and one-pounders to be located to support the attack.”

The Director: “You would tell exactly where to place the weapons, would you?”

Captain Harvey: “Yes, sir.”

The Director: “Captain Hodges, do you agree with that solution to the problem?”

Captain Hodges: “No, sir, I do not. It seems to me that it would be better for Captain C to indicate to Captain D and Lieutenant Z the dispositions that he proposes to make—where the line of departure is to be and the direction of the attack. Then to leave it up to those officers to select the firing positions for the weapons. I think Captain C would verify the positions selected, but he would at least give the men who are supposed to be the experts an opportunity to use their knowledge of the subject.”

The Director: “I think you are right. I believe in requiring every man to do his job. These officers have been ordered to support the attack. It is up to them to select the position where they can get the best fire effect with their weapons and to get them into position ready to do business.”

“What precautions would you take to indicate the place where the platoon leaders are to assemble, Captain James?”

Captain James: “I would send one of my company runners to the assembly point and order him to tell the platoon leaders to wait there for me.”

The Director: “I think that is a wise precaution. You do not want to take a chance on anything going wrong and failing to effect an assembly of the platoon leaders.”

“Now, let us consider how the attack is to be made. What would be your tactical dispositions, Captain James?”

Captain James: “I would attack with one Platoon (the first), advancing directly against the enemy strong point, and another (the second) working around the enemy’s left flank and enveloping it. I would hold the remaining platoon (the third) as company support.”

The Director: “Where is your line of departure?”

Captain James: “My line of departure would be along here. The right of the first platoon would be (indicate). The left of the second platoon will be (indicate). Each platoon will cover about 150 yards of front. The third platoon will follow in rear of the second platoon as company support.”

The Director: “That seems to be a logical disposition. Now having decided all of this you should give the information to Captain D and Lieutenant X so they can go about the task of selecting positions for their weapons. How would you do this, Lieutenant Baker?”

Lieutenant Baker: “Assuming that Lieutenant Z and Captain D have been with me all the while, I would say:

“‘My first platoon will attack with its right about (indicate). The second platoon with its left about (indicate). Each will cover a front of about 150 yards. Select your firing positions to cover the attack.’

“That is all that should be required. Before issuing final orders for the attack I would verify the positions selected.”

Explanation

The Director: I hope you have all followed the process that we have gone through during the 20 minutes, in order to arrive at a decision and the point where Captain C is ready to issue his orders for the attack. Let us review them briefly:

1. Send for the platoon commanders to come to the front.

2. Accompanied by Captain D and Lieutenant Z, and two runners, make a personal reconnaissance of the enemy’s position and the terrain and determine:

(a) The line of departure.

(b) The tactical formation.

(c) Direction of the attack.

(d) The position of the supporting weapons.

3. Arrange for a rendezvous where the attack order can be issued.

From all of this you will appreciate that there are many things that must be done before an attack of this kind can be launched. Battalion and other commanders should appreciate that it takes time to do all of these things and should have patience with the officers whom he has ordered to do it.

Attack of Strong Point Card No. 1

Director’s Key

1. Assemble class at initial point where the Terrain Exercise is to begin.

2. Distribute sheets containing the general situation and special situation Blue. Read and explain. Have members of class state understanding of situation.

3. Formation of battalion for attack—Assault companies, reserve company, covering patrol on right, connecting patrol on left.

4. Information system.

5. Distribute Situation No. 1. Read and discuss.

6. Formation of Company C.

7. Mission of Company C. Personal Reconnaissance. Estimate of the situation. Attached and supporting units.

8. Message to platoon commanders.

9. Proceed to right and make personal reconnaissance. Firing position for the auxiliary weapons.

10. Mark assembly point for platoon commanders.

11. Tactical dispositions. Line of departure. Instructions to Captain D and Lieutenant Z.

12. Resumé of what has taken place.

The Problem

Situation No. 2:

The platoon commanders have assembled at the appointed rendezvous. You, Captain C, have come to a decision to attack the enemy strong point with two platoons and hold the third as company support.

Required:

The orders that you would issue for the attack.

Procedure

The Director distributes the sheets bearing Situation No. 2, reads it aloud and makes such explanation as may be necessary.

Explanation

The Director: “Before going further with the problem I desire to again call your attention to the five paragraph field order that we use in our service. This form of field order was evolved before the war and used in our service schools. It is prescribed by our Field Service Regulations. When we entered the war and our troops went to France we found on both the British and French fronts a system of field orders that did not agree with our American ideas. The orders were most voluminous. They went into every detail of procedure and left little to the initiative of the commanders of tactical units. The consequence was that many of these commanders lost their initiative. When their orders ran out and nothing further had been prescribed for them to do, they just naturally did not know what to do and stopped until more orders were sent up to them. I am not so sure but what this system was responsible in the proposition of limited objectives that we found when we entered into the campaign. Many of our own officers fell for the voluminous order system but it did not last long after we got into action. It was then abandoned and we reverted to our own five paragraph order which filled the bill and met all our requirements. You remember that after an attack started and was seen to be under way, how quickly orders came up to disregard all objectives and push on. Our own simple field order system stood the test of war and I do not think it will ever be abandoned again for any other system.”

The paragraphs of the order include:

1st paragraph:—Information of the enemy and our own troops.

2nd paragraph:—The plans of the commander.

3rd paragraph:—Disposition of troops. Orders for each element of the command and the tactical instructions that pertain to all elements.

4th paragraph:—Administrative arrangements.

5th paragraph:—Where messages are to be sent or location of the command post.

In preparing the order for the attack under the requirement to our Situation No. 2, I wish you would use this form of order.

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hall, just what would you include in the first paragraph of the order?”

Captain Hall: “I would include the information about the enemy holding up our attack and the part that his strong point has played with the affair. I would include information of the fact that our second battalion is resuming the advance and how the rest of our battalion is to attack. That is all that would be necessary.”

The Director: “What would you include in the second paragraph?”

Captain Hall: “My plan—To attack the enemy strong point enveloping its left.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Barry, tell us what you would include in the third paragraph?”

Lieutenant Barry: “I would include orders for the machine guns, the light mortars and the 37 mm. guns; orders for the assault platoons, indicating the troops, line of departure, frontage and the objective; orders for the support platoon; orders for covering and connecting patrols; indicate the base platoon; orders for the action to be taken when the enemy strong point is captured.”

The Director: “There will be very little to be provided for in an administrative way. The location of the battalion aid station should be noted and if there are any instructions regarding extra ammunition, it should be included here. The C. P. of the company will be near the support platoon and this information should be placed in the last paragraph of the order.”

Procedure

The Director: “Now I want each member of the class to write out the order of Captain C for the attack.”

The necessary time is allowed for this and after the orders are completed they are collected and again distributed to the members of the class, making sure that no man gets his own order back again.

Members of the class are called upon to read the order in his possession and it is discussed.

At the conclusion of this the Director will submit the following order for discussion:

Order

“The enemy has held up the advance of our battalion by fire from that (ridge, edge of woods or other feature) and especially by machine gun fire from that enemy strong point (describe and indicate location of the enemy strong point). The second battalion on our left has resumed its advance. Our battalion will attack. Companies A and B will advance from their present positions on our left and attack the enemy in their front (indicate the present positions of Companies A and B).

“Our Company will attack and capture the enemy strong point, enveloping its left.

“The first platoon Company D, will support our advance by direct overhead machine gun fire from (indicate firing position of the machine guns).

“The 1st platoon howitzer company will support our advance with light mortar fire from (indicate firing position of light mortars) and 37 mm. gun fire from (indicate firing position of the 37 mm. gun).

“Lieutenant M. with the 1st platoon, will attack the front of the enemy strong point. Line of departure (indicate). Frontage about 150 yards from that (designate) to that (designate). Objective enemy strong point. Direction ______ degrees, magnetic.

“Lieutenant O, with the 2nd platoon, will attack and envelop the left of the enemy strong point. Line of departure (indicate). Frontage, about 150 yards, left of platoon at (indicate). Route of advance (designate). Objective enemy left.

“Lieutenant P, with the 3rd platoon (less detachments), will constitute the Company support and await orders (indicate where—should be in rear of the 2nd platoon). A combat patrol will be sent out to cover the right flank. A connecting group of two men will maintain connection with the right of Company A on our left.

“The 1st platoon, base platoon.

“After capture the enemy’s strong point will be immediately organized for defense.

“The battalion aid station is at a point 700 yards in rear of Company A.

“Messages to the support platoon.

“After issuing the order Captain C will say:

“It is now ____ o’clock, set your watches to agree.

“Join your platoons. Get them up to the line of departure.

“Notify me at this point when you are ready to attack. Begin the attack at my signal.”

Procedure

The Director will distribute mimeograph copies of this order to the members of the class. He will read the order. The members of the class follow from the copy in their possession. He will point out the features of the terrain referred to in the order as he reads it and make such comment and explanation as may be necessary.

The Director: “You now see what the order for an attack of an infantry company must contain. If you omit any of these things the order is not complete. Note how the order conforms to the requirements of our Field Service Regulations. Are there any questions?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I note that the 1st and 2nd platoons are to attack on a front of about 150 yards. How does a platoon cover such a front?”

The Director: “The normal interval between skirmishers is 5 paces. This should be adhered to rigidly in extended order drill. Men will, under the stress of danger and excitement, do as they have been trained. In spite of the injunction of the Infantry Drill Regulations, I would not change this interval in drill for it may lead to bunching and the consequent loss of lives in action.”

The platoon fights in two waves with a section in each wave. This gives a wave and consequently a platoon a front of 120 yards in action. Where a larger front than 120 yards is assigned to a platoon to cover, the platoon is placed at about the center of the front and held responsible for the interval on each flank to the boundary of the zone of action assigned. The support section forming the second wave, following at a convenient distance, is used by the platoon leader in any required part of the platoon zone of action as the situation develops.

“In rare instances a platoon may be deployed with both sections on one line, covering a front of 240 yards. Such a line is very difficult for the platoon leader to control and is to be avoided.”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I note the designation of a ‘base platoon’ in Captain C.’s orders. What is the significance of that in a converging attack, such as is contemplated?”

The Director: “A Base Platoon is designated only as an aid to the initial formation of the company. During an approach march, in deploying on the line of departure and in advancing to the first firing position, the base platoon forms the guide for the company and helps ensure a coordinated attack. But as soon as enemy opposition is met, each platoon makes its own fight within its own zone of action and all consideration of the ‘base platoon’ is dropped. In action, each platoon must observe the action of adjacent units and be prepared to assist them. But the best possible aid consists in the vast majority of cases, in pushing ahead, ‘where the pushing is good’ and then threatening in the flank or rear enemy resistances holding up adjacent units.

“In this case, the ‘first firing position’ may be very close to, or even coincide with the Line of Departure, so that the base platoon designation is of especial value in the initial deployment.”

Captain Hastings: “Will the Director please discuss the personnel of the headquarters of Company C in action—its positions and formations?”

The Director: “A rifle company headquarters in action consists of:

“1. The Captain.

“2. First Sergeant, Signal Sergeant, Agents from the supporting Machine Gun unit (platoon or company), and two company runners all following in two short columns behind the captain. When halted these men take cover within reach of the captain’s voice.

“3. Two buglers, one well to the left flank observing the connecting group keeping connection with Company A and the other observing combat patrol covering the right. These buglers will report to the Captain any item of information they note.

“4. Three platoon runners, arranged in a rough triangle each between his own platoon and the company headquarters. These runners keep within call or signaling distance of the Captain and each knows always the position of his own platoon. By these runners the Captain communicates with his three platoons.

“5. Two Company runners at the Battalion Command Post. These runners keep track of the position of their own company and are prepared to take messages to it from Battalion headquarters.

“The position of Company Headquarters is such that the Captain can maintain connection with his assault platoons, observe the progress of the fight personally and especially be ready to throw his support platoon into the action when and where most needed. During the approach the Captain precedes his assault echelon. When the fire opens, Company Headquarters drops back to a position between the assault echelon and the support platoon.”

Lieutenant Wallace: “Where is the second in command of the company? There is no mention of him in the orders.”

The Director: “Yes, I am glad you noted the omission. The senior Lieutenant, or ‘second-in-command’ remains back at the Company rear echelon during a fight. Here he is responsible that ammunition is forwarded as necessary, that meals are prepared and that all men drifting to the rear are held.

“Further, as the casualties among rifle company officers are higher than in any other unit in the entire army, keeping this officer out of the fight ensures a trained officer to replace the Captain, in case the latter becomes a casualty and to reorganize the company after each battle.

“Whenever the Captain becomes incapacitated for any reason a runner is sent at once from Company Headquarters back to the rear echelon and the second in command hastens forward to take command of the company. The first sergeant or others of the personnel at Company Headquarters acquaint him with the situation. It is considered most important to have this trained officer in reserve ready to take command on short notice.”

Lieutenant Ralston: “Where will the combat patrol on the right flank march?”

The Director: “It will march well out on the right flank and rear of the 2nd platoon, so that if an enemy machine gun or patrol fires on the platoon from that direction the patrol will be in position to attack it.”

Captain Harvey: “The Director mentioned something about extra ammunition. I did not understand what was said?”

The Director: “All riflemen of the units of an assault battalion should carry an extra bandolier of ammunition when they go into action. This applies to the battalion reserve company as well as the assault companies. You can see in this case how delay would be occasioned by stopping to issue extra ammunition to the men.”

Captain Hodges: “It is noted that you give orders for the consolidation and preparation of the enemy strong point for defense as soon as it is captured. Just what is the purpose of this?”

The Director: “At this time Captain C cannot tell just what will happen when he gets into the enemy strong point. That is the objective of the attack for the time being. He would want the platoon commanders to have orders that will carry them until he can get up there and decide what to do. The Company may not stop at the strong point. If the enemy is on the run they will follow him up probably. This will depend upon the action of the rest of the battalion. In any event we will want a position on which to reorganize the company and prepare for future eventualities and by preparing the position for defense we gain such a position and at the same time we are ready to meet a counter-attack if it comes.”

Attack of Strong Point Card No. 2

Director’s Key

1. Assemble class at point designated for the assembly of platoon commanders. Distribute Situation No. 2 and explain.

2. Explain five paragraph field order.

3. Consider order for attack in detail, paragraph by paragraph.

4. Have class write out order. Collect, read and comment on solutions.

5. Comments of problem. Frontage of platoon. Explanation of base platoon. Company headquarters in action. Second in command. Covering patrol. Extra ammunition preparations for defense.

Explanation

The Director: “Before going further with the problem I want to explain to you what happens between the time the Captain issues his orders for the attack and the time that it starts.

“Having received and understood their orders, the platoon commanders go back and join their platoons. In doing so they select the route over which they are going to conduct their commands up to the line of departure for the attack.

“Each platoon commander conducts his platoon over to the right and gets it into approach formation directly in rear of and with its front as nearly parallel to the line of departure as possible. The proposition of bringing a platoon or any other unit up to a point immediately in rear of the line of departure in a column of files and making the deployment from that formation is fraught with great danger and is almost sure to result in confusion, losses and great consumption of time. The platoons must be gotten into an approach formation from which they can readily deploy on nearing the line of departure. Captain James, suppose you were commanding the first platoon. What formation would you take up in bringing your platoon up to the line of departure?”

Captain James: “I would form it in two lines or waves each consisting of one section. Each section would be in line of squad columns. From this formation I can readily deploy the leading wave in to a line of skirmishes covering the front allotted to the platoon and hold the rear wave in a line of squad columns or deploy it as the circumstances may require. In any event I have my platoon under complete control all the time.”

The Director: “I think we can all agree that your formation is correct.”

“Now, each platoon commander must get the orders to the men who are to make the attack. When the platoon arrives at a point in rear of the line of departure the platoon commanders will assemble their non-commissioned officers and scouts at a covered location near the line of departure where they can command a view of the front. Here he will explain the situation and give his orders for the attack. These orders will be issued in the regular five paragraph order form which I have already explained to you. The non-commissioned officers join their units. The leading wave is brought up and deployed on the line of departure. The scouts move out to the front. The second section is held in proper formation (line of squad columns or line of skirmishers) from 50 to 100 yards in rear of the leading wave. The platoon commanders signal Captain C that they are ready to launch the attack.

“The special weapons, machine guns and light mortars and the 37 mm. gun, are gotten to their respective firing positions and the unit commanders signal Captain C that they are ready to cover the attacking troops with their fire.

“The company support platoon is conducted to its position in rear of the second platoon and the platoon commander signals that he is ready.

“Captain C then signals the battalion commander that he is all ready to launch the attack. When he gets the signal from the battalion commander, he signals the supporting weapon commanders and the platoon commanders to proceed.

“Now, you may say that all of this sounds well in theory, but, you ask, how is it done in actual practice? What is the enemy doing all this time? I ask you to visualize the situation from the enemy point of view. What would you be doing if you were in his place? You occupy a strong point on the left of your line. You have been placed there to protect the flank and to bring machine gun fire to bear on our attacking troops to your right. The attack is progressing off to your right. The firing seems to be getting further and further to your rear. You have fears that the line is not holding. You have visions of being left to your fate. You get no information of what is taking place over there. In your own immediate front there is little doing. You see nothing to indicate what we are doing over here. You have no well defined target to fire on. A few scouts are seen off to the right oblique (scouts of Companies A and B). There is nothing in your front that would afford you a target. The scouts that you send out from the strong point run into our covering patrol and either become casualties or are driven back. Your strength does not permit sending out a reconnoitering party of sufficient strength to break through and get any real information of what is taking place in your front. You simply have to sit and wait for something to develop. I am sure if you will place yourself in the enemy’s position at this time, you must realize his situation and the conflicting thoughts that come across his mind. He is just a human as you are. He is just as much afraid. He has just the same feeling about the danger of the situation as you have, only his situation is worse than yours. He must sit and wait for something to happen while your activities and preparations occupy your thoughts and attention. You have the initiative, you lead and he must follow.

“When you consider all of these things you will see how it is possible to go about the preparation process in a comparatively deliberate manner. If you have fairly good cover from the fire and view of the enemy it is not at all difficult.

“The greatest danger in all of this is from our own side. From the impatience of our own higher commanders who think the preparations are taking too much time. Brigade and regimental commanders who are to the rear and cannot see what is going on get impatient with the apparent delays and demand that the attack be delivered at once. Even the battalion commander, who is up at the front and ought to know better, cannot see how you can possibly consume so much time getting ready.

“That is one of the valuable features of these Terrain Exercises. They illustrate and demonstrate to officers of all ranks that a certain amount of time must be allowed a combat unit to get ready to launch an attack and that they may as well sit down and take it easy until everything is ready. The war is not to be fought in a day.

“Let us take our problem as an example. Our Company (C) could be brought up and rushed into action in its attack on the enemy strong point. The rifleman would have fought it out with his bare hands, so to speak. There would be no supporting fire from machine guns, light mortars and one-pounders. It would have been a direct frontal attack, with no enveloping movement. The chances are that it would be a complete failure and the whole affair would have to be reorganized and done over again. Even if it were successful it would be accompanied by ruinous losses that would render the company totally ineffective for further combat service in the near future.

“By going about the preparations systematically, as we have done, the chances for success are infinitely greater, the losses will be very much smaller and in the long run, a lot of time saved. I hope you will all consider these things when you give orders to a unit under your command, be it a battalion or a small patrol, to embark upon a tactical undertaking. Give the commander time to perfect his preparations. Do not rush him into action until he is ready.”

Procedure

The class is now conducted up to the line of departure of the platoon. The Director distributes the sheets containing Situation No. 3.

The Problem

Situation No. 3:

The 1st platoon is deployed on the line of departure—one section in the leading wave in a line of skirmishers, with intervals of 5 yards. The second section is about 100 yards to the rear in line of squad columns. The platoon scouts have worked their way forward to _______ (indicate).

The supporting troops are in position ready to open fire.

At this moment Captain C signals “Forward March”. The supporting weapons open fire on the enemy strong point and shots are heard off to the right indicating that the 2nd platoon has launched its attack.

You, Lieutenant M, commanding the 1st platoon, are at this point when the signal is received.

Required:

Describe how the attack is conducted.

Procedure

The Director reads over the situation and indicates the position of the troops on the ground. Any points that may be in doubt are cleared up at this time.

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, I wish you would explain to the class, just what you think takes place.”

Lieutenant Baker: “During the preparation process my platoon scouts would have worked their way forward to (indicate on the ground). I assume that they have kept under cover and have drawn little fire from the enemy. The instant I give my signal to advance they will start forward to get to (indicate) where they can open an effective fire on the enemy and thus establish the first firing position.

“When our supporting weapons open their first burst of fire on the enemy strong point it will come as a surprise and his men will naturally seek cover. I will take advantage of this fact to advance my line as far as possible to the front. If he opens effective fire I will have to take cover. If not I will keep on my rush with the platoon until he does and thus take advantage of the few moments when the enemy is surprised from the sudden burst of fire from our supporting weapons. When he recovers and opens fire I will take cover.

“I will then advance my men by filtration up to the line established by the scouts, each man opening fire as soon as he arrives on the line. The scouts will indicate the target to the men by the use of tracer bullets. By this process of fire and movement, I will build up my firing line and keep up a well directed fire on the enemy position.”

The Director: “What kind of fire will your automatic riflemen employ?”

Lieutenant Baker: “They will employ aimed fire, semi-automatic.”

The Director: “About what is the rate of this fire with well trained automatic riflemen?”

Lieutenant Baker: “I should say that it would be about 30 to 40 shots per minute.”

Procedure

The Class is now conducted to the point where the first fire position is located.

The Director: “Captain Hall, the first section is along this front firing on the enemy strong point. They are returning the fire, the volume of which is just about at a balance with your fire. You hear the firing of the 2nd platoon off to the right. You have had a few casualties. What would you do now?”

Captain Hall: “By a process of fire and movement I would work my section further to the front and build up a new firing line ________ (indicate the location of the new line).”

The Director: “What would your second section be doing?”

Captain Hall: “It would be following the advance ready to join the firing line when I call upon it to do so.”

The class is now conducted up to the new fire position.

The Director: “The line has worked forward to this position with a few more casualties. It is apparent that the enemy’s fire is increasing in volume and you find that it will be impossible for you to continue the advance. In other words you cannot attain fire superiority with your present force on the firing line. What would you do about that, Lieutenant Barry?”

Lieutenant Barry: “I would signal the section “Fire Faster” and under cover of this increased volume of fire I would bring my 2nd section up onto the line, and have the men join in the firing.”

(Note.—The solution of all the above will depend upon the lay of the ground where the Terrain Exercise is staged. The points to be brought out by the Director are that the first wave will continue its advance by its own efforts as far to the front as possible. When it cannot longer maintain the superiority of fire necessary to enable it to continue, the 2nd section must be brought up and continue the forward movement. When the 2nd section has joined the 1st on the line the subsequent progress of the action will depend upon how well the superiority of fire can be maintained. If the volume is such that the enemy can be kept down and prevented from firing effectively the advance can be continued, by the utilization of fire and movement. Ordinarily the enemy will realize the hopelessness of the situation and evacuate his position before it is necessary to carry it by assault.)

Attack of Strong Point Card No. 3

Director’s Key

1. Explain what happens between the time the attack order is issued and the time the attack is ready to start: Platoon commanders join platoons, and conduct them to the front. Approach march formation. Column of files to be avoided. Orders of platoon commanders. Deployment for attack. Action of special weapons. Signals indicating readiness for attack.

2. Discuss necessity for thorough preparation for the attack. Describe the situation from the enemy’s point of view. Advantage of the initiative.

3. Explain necessity for time being allowed subordinate commanders to prepare to launch attack.

4. Conduct class to line of departure for 1st platoon.

5. Distribute sheets bearing Situation No. 3; read and explain.

6. Description of attack. Initial advance. Scouts. Advance of platoon. Building up first fire position. Superiority of fire. Continue advance by fire and movement. Employment of automatic rifles.

7. Conduct class to next fire position. Failure to hold superiority of fire. Bring up second section. Subsequent progress. Assault.

Procedure

The Class is now conducted to a point where the operation of both the 1st and 2nd platoons may be observed by the company commander.

The Problem

Situation No. 4:

You, Captain C, have come forward to this point. You see your assault platoons covered by their own fire and that of the supporting weapons advancing rapidly on the enemy strong point. They are now (indicate the general line that each platoon occupies.) The volume of fire of the enemy has materially decreased. You note that the supporting weapons have lifted their fire and are now firing well beyond the strong point. A few moments later you note that both platoons rush towards the strong point with bayonets fixed.

The 3rd platoon has now arrived at the line of departure of the 2nd platoon. Companies A and B seem to be carrying out their attack on your left; there is no machine gun fire to interfere with them now.

Required.

What do you, Captain C, do?

Procedure

The Director distributes the sheets bearing Situation No. 4 to the class, reads it aloud to them, points out the location of the troops and makes any verbal explanations that may be necessary.

Explanation

The Director: “I want each member of the class to visualize the situation as it now stands. In the beginning Captain C assigned definite missions to each of his platoons. He left the essential details to the platoon commanders. He is driving a team of two units with a third held in reserve. His team has been driven into the enemy’s position. They have accomplished the main part of their mission and something more is necessary on the part of the Captain. Lieutenant Barry, knowing the situation as it is, what would you do?”

Solution

Lieutenant Barry: “I would go forward and join my two platoons at the enemy strong point.”

The Director: “Would you take any other action before doing that?”

Lieutenant Barry: “I think not, sir. I would want to know the situation up there as soon as possible.”

The Director: “What would you do, Lieutenant Hunt?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would send a messenger back to the 3rd platoon to get started on its way to the captured position.”

The Director: “Just how would you do that?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would turn to the runner of the 3rd platoon, who is with me and tell him:

“‘Take this message to the leader of the 3rd platoon: ‘The 3rd platoon will report to Captain C at the enemy strong point at once, moving by the shortest route.’

“I would have the runner repeat the message and make sure that he, himself, understands what is wanted.”

Explanation

The Director: “You are right. There is no doubt but that the presence of the 3rd platoon will be required at the enemy position just as soon as it can be gotten up there. The assault platoons will be more or less disorganized by their attack. They will be out of hand. Squads, sections and platoons will be mixed up. There will be some hand to hand fighting with some of the enemy who have failed to make their get-away or with some determined men who will hold on to their local position until they are driven out with cold steel.

“It is to provide for just such a situation as this, that we hold out a reserve—a formed body of troops that has not been in the assault. A body that is absolutely in hand and under control. It can be conducted up to the enemy position, take it over and be ready for any eventuality that may occur.

“As a matter of fact the assault troops should not be allowed to go into the captured position unless it is absolutely necessary to do so to drive out or capture those remaining. The reasons for this are obvious. When the enemy abandons the position, he assumes that it is occupied by his opponent and will turn as great a volume of fire on it as possible with a view to inflicting losses on our disorganized troops. With a formed body of troops, under control, we can make such tactical distribution of the units as may be required, posting them where the greatest amount of shelter exists and thereby reduce casualties to a minimum.”

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, let us assume that you have sent back the message to the commander of the 3rd platoon. What would you do now?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I would go forward and join my assault platoons.”

The Director: “Would you do anything about getting some of the special weapons up to the captured position?”

Lieutenant Williams: “No sir, not yet. It is my understanding that the machine gun and howitzer platoons were only detailed with Company C to support the attack on the enemy strong point. At the conclusion of the affair that they are to report back to the battalion commander.”

The Director: “You are right. If, however, Captain C decides that he needs them he can send a runner to the battalion commander and request that they be detailed for further duty with the company.”

Attack of Strong Point Card No. 4

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to point where operations of both 1st and 2nd platoons can be observed.

2. Distribute the sheets bearing Situation No. 4. Read and explain.

3. Visualize situation. Teamwork. Action taken by Captain C.

4. Send for 3rd platoon to come forward to enemy position. Message in detail.

5. Explain necessity for Reserve Platoon. Assault platoons disorganized by attack and out hand. Value of formed body under control.

6. Danger of entering captured positions.

7. Action with respect to supporting troops.

Procedure

The Class is now conducted forward to the captured enemy strongpoint.

The Problem

Situation No. 5:

On arriving at the captured strong point, Captain C finds the 1st and 2nd platoons somewhat mixed up and disorganized. Some of the men are on the far side firing on the retreating enemy. Some are seen to be hunting souvenirs. There are a considerable number of enemy dead and wounded lying about. About a dozen enemy prisoners are standing off to one side with their hands up.

The 3rd platoon is seen advancing in the distance. Lieutenant P, with the platoon headquarters is coming forward at a run.

Companies A and B to the left are advancing and the whole enemy line is apparently retreating.

Required.

What action do you, Captain C, take?

Procedure

The Director distributes the sheets bearing the situation to the class, reads it over and makes the necessary explanations, points out the places mentioned, etc.

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hastings, what would you do under the circumstances?”

Captain Hastings: “In the first place I would want to see the platoon commanders and give them instructions as to the action to be taken. I would call the runners of the 1st and 2nd platoons and order them:

“‘Find your platoon commanders. Tell them to report to me here, at once.’

“While waiting for the platoon commanders to come I would size up the situation and be prepared to issue my orders soon after their arrival.”

The Director: “I think we can all agree that that is the logical procedure. In sizing up the situation, what points would you consider, Lieutenant Wallace?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would consider what my mission is now. The company is the battalion reserve. It was thrown into the attack for the definite purpose of capturing the enemy strong point that was holding up the advance of the battalion. We have completed that mission, the battalion is continuing the advance. Up to the moment no other mission has been assigned. I would not know whether it is the desire of the battalion commander that we continue the advance as an assault unit of the battalion or revert to the former status of battalion reserve. Until I receive definite orders on the subject I would stay right here and cover the right flank of the battalion. I estimate that I will get such orders in a very short time.

“The enemy has several courses of action open to him. He may continue to fall back and not molest us. He may make a counter-attack, though this is not probable. He may concentrate a large volume of fire on this particular point with a view to causing serious casualties in our disorganized ranks.

“Our own battalion is continuing its advance and does not seem to need our support for the time being. The 1st and 2nd platoons must be withdrawn and reorganized. The 3rd platoon can take over the duty of security. The enemy prisoners must be taken care of and others that may be in the position must be rounded up. Souvenir hunters and stragglers must be rounded up and sent to their proper units.

“The sanitary troops are now taking care of our wounded.

“The battalion commander will want to know what has happened on our front and I would send him a message telling him about it.

“My decision would be to withdraw and reorganize the 1st and 2nd platoons. Have the 3rd platoon take over the duty of security, mop up the position and take charge of the prisoners. Send a message to the battalion commander.

“All of this would constitute my hurried estimate of the situation. When the platoon commanders assemble I will give the necessary orders to put my decision into effect.”

The Director: “That is very good. Now, Lieutenant Ralston, let us assume that the platoon commanders are assembled and you are ready to give them their orders. What is the first thing you would do?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would want to get my report off to the battalion commander as soon as possible.”

The Director: “Just how would you do this?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would write it out and send it by a runner.”

The Director: “Do you think you would take the time to do that? You have your first sergeant with you. He should be able to write out the message and I think you would have him do it. That leaves you free to go ahead with your orders to the platoon commanders. You would indicate roughly what you want to go into the message to the battalion commander and leave the rest to the first sergeant. Now, tell us what you would include in the orders to the platoon commanders, Captain Harvey?”

Captain Harvey: “I would give the orders about as follows:

“The other companies of our battalion are advancing on our left.

“This company will reorganize and prepare for further service.

“The 3rd platoon will relieve the firing line with one section and take over the security of the position. Have the men of the 1st and 2nd platoons fall back and assemble by squads on this side (indicate) of the position. The remaining section will take charge of the prisoners, mop up the position, collect other prisoners and stragglers. The covering patrol of one squad will remain out on the right.

“The 1st platoon will assemble at (indicate place).

“The 2nd platoon will assemble at (indicate place).

“The 1st and 2nd platoons will reorganize, check casualties and report results. Secure ammunition from dead and wounded.

“Messages to me here.”

The Director: “I think that order will meet the immediate requirements of the situation. Now, Captain Hodges, what would you include in the message to the battalion commander?”

Captain Hodges: “I would make it very brief. Something to this effect:

“‘Enemy strong point captured at ____ (Time). My casualties about ____, killed; ____ wounded. Prisoners ____ (number). Am reorganizing. (Such additional information about enemy that would be of value to the Battalion commander). Await your further instructions.’”

The Director: “I think that message will give the battalion commander all the information that he requires immediately. It informs him of the fact that you have accomplished your mission. It tells him how many casualties you have had which will enable him to determine the further effective strength of the company and what it is capable of doing in the future. It tells him what you are now doing and indicates that further instructions are desired. His reaction should be to send you instructions what to do, either to continue to the front as an assault unit of the battalion or to revert to the role of battalion reserve. Now, I want each member of the class to write out the orders of Captain C and the message that he would send to the battalion commander. Follow out the five paragraph order system.”

Procedure

When the orders and the message are complete they will be collected and redistributed. One or more members of the class will be called upon to read the order and message in his possession and to criticize it.

Explanation

The Director: “This situation concludes the Terrain Exercise. I hope that it has been valuable to all of you and has brought out some points that will stand you well in hand if you ever be called upon to undertake an operation of this kind in actual service.

“I hope you all now appreciate what training is necessary on the part of officers and non-commissioned officers to carry on such an operation.

“I thank you for your attention.”

Attack of Strong Point Card No. 5

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to captured enemy strong point.

2. Hand out Situation No. 5. Read and discuss. Point out places mentioned.

3. Order platoon commanders to report to Captain C.

4. Estimate of the Situation. Mission, action of enemy, action of own troops, withdrawal of the 1st and 2nd platoons to reorganize. Relief by 3rd platoon. Decision.

5. Report to battalion commander. First sergeant to prepare message.

6. Orders: Information of enemy and own troops. Plan of commander. 3rd platoon take over duty of security. Relieve 1st and 2nd platoons. Prisoners and stragglers. Mop up position. 1st and 2nd platoons assemble and reorganize, check casualties, replenish ammunition.

7. Message to battalion commander: Accomplished mission. Casualties. Prisoners. Reorganization. Await further instructions. Reaction of battalion commander to message.

Note.—Acknowledgment is made to Major Reginald H. Kelly, Infantry, for the background on which this Terrain Exercise is based.—The Author.

Terrain Exercise No. 2.
Approach March and Deployment

The Problem

Special Situation—Blue:

The Red forces have been retreating (a) before the attack of the Blues for the past two days, contesting every yard of the advance.

The 10th Blue division is operating in the Sector:

Right boundary: (b)

Left boundary: (c)

The Division is disposed:

19th Brigade as attacking brigade.

20th Brigade as division reserve.

The attacking brigade is disposed regiments side by side, the —— Infantry in the right half of the sector: the —— Infantry in the left half of the sector. Regiments are echeloned by battalion; one as assault; one as support and one as reserve.

The —— Infantry has the 2nd battalion as assault; the 1st battalion as support and the 3rd battalion as reserve.

After an all day fight the assault battalion (2nd) has halted along (d) where it has been ordered to stabilize for the night in order to permit arrangements to be made for the continuation of the attack tomorrow morning.

The support battalion (1st) has reached (e) where it is halted.

Explanation of Letter Symbols

(a) The compass direction of the retreat of the Red forces: North, south, east, west.

(b) State the right boundary of the sector over which the division is operating.

(c) State the left boundary of the sector over which the division is operating.

If practicable the problem should be staged so that there may be a well defined topographical feature that will mark one of these boundaries of the Division sector.

(d) The general location of the front lines of the assault battalion. This line should in general, be perpendicular to the lines of advance of the division and if practicable should lay along some well defined topographical feature of the terrain so that it may be readily indicated to the class.

(e) The location of the halting place of the 1st Battalion. This should be at least 1500 to 1800 yards in rear of the line (d) above.

Procedure

The class is conducted to (e) where the Terrain Exercise is to begin. The Director will distribute the sheets containing Special Situation Blue and a few minutes are allowed the members of the class to read it over.

The Director will then read the Situation aloud, point out the places mentioned where practicable and make such explanations as may be necessary.

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, the situation states that the 10th division is operating on a certain sector. What do you understand by that?”

Lieutenant Williams: “It is the area lying between the two designated boundaries which has been allotted to the division and to which, in general, the division confines its operations. As I understand it there is a division on our right and another on our left. If each were not given a definite area to operate over I can readily see how there might be great confusion over the question as to just who is responsible for a certain area. By assigning definite boundaries this question is eliminated. The division assigned to the particular sector is responsible for everything in the sector.”

The Director: “Captain Hastings, what do you understand by the term attacking brigade?”

Captain Hastings: “It is the term used to designate the Brigade that is leading—the brigade that is making the attack against the enemy—as distinguished from the brigade that is held in reserve.”

Explanation

The Director: “There are several ways of disposing the infantry of a division for combat. I will outline them briefly in order that you may see what the formations are and the relation that our battalion has to them.

“The division may be deployed with the two brigades side by side, each brigade being echeloned in a column of regiments. The leading regiment of each brigade is in turn echeloned in a column of battalions, one as assault, one as support and one as local reserve. The second regiment (less 1 battalion) of each brigade forms the brigade reserve. The remaining battalion from each of these regiments is held out by the division commander as a division reserve. In this case the division commander is driving a two unit team with the units abreast. Under exceptional circumstances the division may be deployed with the brigades side by side with all four regiments in line each echeloned in a column of battalions. This formation uses up a division very rapidly and is only employed where an exceptionally wide front has been assigned.

“The third method of deployment is that indicated in the problem we have under consideration. There is an attacking brigade with the regiments side by side, each regiment echeloned in a column of battalions, one as attacking, one as support and one as reserve. This is a very good formation and has many advantages. It is one that was employed by many of the successful divisions in France. The Reserve brigade is held far back in order to reduce fatigue and casualties to a minimum, so that when it is called upon to relieve the attacking brigade it is in the best of condition and comparatively fresh and rested. In this formation the division commander drives his team of units in tandem. Now, I want every member of the class to visualize this formation and get it firmly fixed in your minds. Let us review it again:

“Our brigade, the 19th is the attacking Brigade. We have our two regiments abreast. Our regiment occupies the —— half of the sector which extends right up through here (indicates); the other regiment occupies the —— half of the sector which extends right along parallel to us along there (indicating). Our 2nd battalion has been the assault battalion and has carried the advance forward today. We have been following as support battalion, and at the end of the day’s work have arrived here. Our 3rd battalion has been following us at a distance of about 1,000 yards as the reserve.

“The 1st battalion has gotten as far forward as it possibly can today and has halted along the ________ (indicate the general line of the battalion) where it has been ordered to stabilize for the night in order to permit arrangements to be made for continuing the advance tomorrow morning. The problem of this Terrain Exercise has to do with those arrangements, in so far as the Infantry is concerned. We are the support battalion, it is up to us to relieve the assault battalion tonight and carry on the fight tomorrow. How are we going to do it?”

The Problem

Situation No. 1:

It is now (f) p. m.

You, Major A, commanding the 1st battalion, which is now support battalion of the regiment, receive an order from the regimental commander, the body of which reads as follows:

1. The enemy has continued to retreat during the day. Our Army is pushing him to the limit. Our 2nd battalion has reached the ________ (state general line that has been reached) where it is in close contact with the enemy. The general attack will be continued all along the line tomorrow morning.

2. A redistribution of troops in the regimental sector will be effected tonight.

3. (a) The 1st battalion will relieve the 2nd battalion on the front line and be prepared to continue the attack tomorrow morning. Details of Artillery preparation, tank assistance and zero hour will be communicated later.

(b) The 3rd battalion will relieve the 1st battalion as support and take position at ________ (location of the 1st battalion). This relief will be completed by (g) o’clock p. m.

(c) When relieved the 2nd battalion will fall back to (h), reorganize and replenish ammunition, equipment and supplies. It will be the reserve battalion.

(d) Detachments of the Howitzer Company now with the 2nd battalion will remain in position and be reported to the commanding officer 2nd battalion, when the relief is effected.

(e) Details of reliefs will be arranged by battalion commanders concerned.

4. Completion of reliefs and moves will be reported to Regimental C. P. by telephone and runner.

5. Messages to Regimental C. P. at ________ (i).

Required:

Your order for the approach march and arrangements for carrying out the orders of the regimental commander.

Explanation of Letter Symbols

(f) The time at which the order of the regimental commander is received by the battalion commander. This should be before dark.

(g) The time by which the 3rd battalion should relieve the 1st battalion. This should be an hour or more after the time indicated by (f).

(h) The location to which the 2nd battalion is to march and assemble when it is relieved by the 1st battalion.

(i) The location of the regimental C. P. It should be some where in the regimental sector between the support and reserve battalions.

Procedure

The Director will distribute the sheets containing Situation No. 1 to the members of the class. He will read the situation aloud, point out the places and locations referred to and make such explanations as may be necessary.

One or more members of the class will be called upon to state his understanding of the situation and this will be continued until it is apparent that all members of the class understand it and are ready to proceed with a solution on the same basis of understanding.

Explanation

The Director: “Before going ahead with the problem I want to say a few words about the importance of this subject of approach march and deployment.

“Prior to the war we did not appreciate the necessity for extensive drill and instruction in the subject of approach march, deployment and the relief of units on the firing line. There was little literature on the subjects and what there was dealt only in glittering generalities. Once in a while a training program included the subject ‘Deployment,’ but no one took it seriously and such as we carried out, were executed in a purely perfunctory manner.

“In the training of troops for modern warfare the subject must be given the place and attention that it deserves. Troops must be trained to take up the approach march formation, and make a deployment therefrom, both day and night, over all kinds of ground. They must be trained in the methods and technique of making a relief of a force on the firing line at night and overcome the obstacles that are habitually encountered. The great danger at night is in losing direction. This results in a command getting lost and failure to get to the line of departure ready to ‘Jump off’ at H Hour.

“The failure of a single battalion in this respect may imperil a whole military operation and cost the lives of thousands of men. Unless the troops told off to make the attack are in place ready to ‘jump off’ and follow the barrage at H Hour there is not the slightest chance for success. The barrage goes on. The enemy is given time to man his positions and machine guns and the attack on that particular front is held up, usually with enormous losses. The whole attack has to be reorganized and started anew. Those of you who have had experience with an attack which was a failure know how much time is lost and how many casualties may result from such affairs.”

Procedure

The Director: “Now, let us take up the problem as it concerns our battalion. The battalion command post we will say is right here where we are standing. Just how do you visualize the distribution of the battalion, Lieutenant Wallace?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “The battalion headquarters company would be in this vicinity. Company A would be the leading company on the right; Company B would be the leading company on the left; Company C would be following Company A at a distance of say 100 yards and Company D would be following Company B at about the same distance. Each company would be in two echelons, an assault echelon of two platoons and a support echelon of one platoon, the latter following at about 50 yards. The men have taken advantage of such natural cover that exists and where there is none they have dug individual fox holes to get into. These afford a lot of cover from shrapnel fire.”

The Director: “You have given a very good picture of the formation. Are there any questions? If you do not understand all that is being said, now is the time to speak out. We must all approach the solution of the problem on the same basis to get the greatest benefit from it.”

The Director will point out to the members of the class the location of the various elements of the battalion on the ground and go into the details of the formation if it is deemed necessary.

Solution

The Director: “The requirement of the problem involves Major A’s order for the approach march. Lieutenant Ralston, what must the Major do before he is ready to issue his orders?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “He must size up the situation, arrive at a decision as to what he is going to do and then put this decision in the form of an order.”

The Director: “What is the first part of his Estimate of this Situation?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “He will determine upon his mission. I would say that the immediate mission is to relieve the 2nd battalion and that the next phase of it is to prepare to continue the attack tomorrow morning.”

The Director: “Very good. What is the next point he will consider, Captain Harvey?”

Captain Harvey: “He must consider the enemy. The enemy has been retreating before our attack for the past two days. This shows that he is inferior in strength and morale. His defense arrangements must be very much impaired and the confusion that exists behind his lines may readily be imagined. The fact that he is doggedly contesting our advance and that his retreat has nowhere broken down to the extent that we have been able to break through his lines with a deep penetration shows that he still has a lot of fight in him. As soon as it is sufficiently dark to preclude the possibility of aerial observation the enemy will begin shifting his defense elements with a view to preparations to resist our advance again tomorrow. He will be effecting a relief of his worn-out troops, shifting his machine guns to more advantageous positions, changing his artillery so as to more effectively cover the ground which we will have to pass over tomorrow if our attack is a success. All of this will consume several hours. During the period of readjustment and redistribution of troops the hostile activity and fire will naturally be very much diminished. During this same period from dusk until several hours later these same things will be happening in our lines, as you can see. Our artillery will have to be brought up to new positions for the destructive bombardment and the barrage. Our machine guns have to be placed in position to better support the riflemen. Our tanks have to be gotten up ready for the ‘jump off’ tomorrow morning and our worn-out troops on the front lines have to be relieved. It will be a period of lessened activity on both sides. During this period we will take advantage of the opportunity to effect the relief of the 2nd battalion on the line.”

(Note.—The terrain over which the approach march and the relief should now be discussed.)

The Director: “That is a very good discussion of the consideration of the enemy and our troops. Captain Hodges, what other factors enter into the estimate of the situation?”

Captain Hodges: “Our plans, I should say, the Major would want to determine on the formation that he will adopt for the approach march. He wants to arrive on the front line with his assault elements in the best possible formation to go into action. It will be more and more difficult to make changes in the formation as he approaches the location of the front lines. He will therefore start his approach march in as nearly the formation that he wants to be in when he arrives on the line.”

The Director: “You are right. In making a relief of this kind you cannot march a battalion up within the zone of rifle and machine gun fire in a column of files and then expect to get into combat formation and effect a relief properly. It simply cannot be done. You must get into your formation sufficiently far back to make sure of it and then take advantage of the various invulnerable formations to cross dangerous ground to the best advantage and with a minimum of losses. Now, Captain James, what would be your decision?”

Captain James: “To march to the front and effect the relief of the 2nd battalion as soon as possible after dusk.”

The Director: “Very good. Now all of what we have said is termed the ‘Estimate of the Situation.’ I hope you all appreciate the necessity for the battalion commander going through this process of thought before arriving at his decision and framing up his order based on it.

“We are now ready to proceed with a discussion of the Major’s order. Lieutenant Baker, what would you include in the first paragraph?”

Lieutenant Baker: “The information of the enemy and our own troops. This would include information about the enemy’s retreat all along the line during the day; of the point reached by the front lines of our 2nd battalion; of the proposed attack tomorrow morning; of the fact that the 3rd battalion will relieve our battalion tonight; of the action to be taken by the 2nd battalion after we relieve it. This is all that it would be necessary for the troops to know at this time.”

The Director: “I think you have covered the essential points. Captain Hall, what would you include in the second paragraph of the order?”

Captain Hall: “I would state my plan, to the effect that we are to relieve the 2nd battalion tonight.”

The Director: “What is the next part of the order, Lieutenant Barry?”

Lieutenant Barry: “The disposition of the troops and the orders for each element of the battalion: I would want the intelligence section of my headquarters’ company to get to the front at the earliest possible moment, secure the intelligence ‘dope’ and be prepared to take over the intelligence functions as soon as the relief is effected. I would order the section to proceed up to the C. P. of the 2nd battalion right away and instruct them to get on the job. I would also want my communications platoon to get up to the front and make arrangements to take over the communication net and the message center of the 2nd battalion. If these outfits get an early start they will be able to accomplish much before it gets dark. They should lose no time in getting to the front.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, what would you include in the orders for the companies of the Battalion?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “The Major has decided upon the formation already. There only remains the task of putting the decision into an order. I would preserve the present dispositions of the units and direct: Company A to march at —— (time), in approach march formation; designate the sector of the company; announce the guide (right or left) towards the base company; give the compass bearing of the direction of the march and to make sure that contact will not be lost with the base company will caution to that effect. I would also include in this part of the order the fact that Company A is to relieve the Assault Company of the 2nd battalion which is immediately in its front. The orders for Company B, which is to be the other Assault Company, would contain the same instructions as Company A with the addition of a sentence giving the Company a directing line in addition to the compass bearing of the line of march.

“I would include in the orders for Company C the same line of instructions as for Company A except that I would tell them the distance they are to follow Company A and the fact that they are to relieve the local support company of the 2nd battalion.

“Company D’s orders will include the same instructions contained in these for Company C except directions for them to relieve the machine gun elements of the 2nd Battalion.

“I think these instructions would be all that are necessary for the four companies of the battalion to get them started on the march.”

The Director: “You have covered the points very well. But, there are some instructions that pertain to all of the units of the battalion. These would be included in the final sub-paragraph of paragraph 3 of the order. This paragraph is denominated (x) in the order. What are they, Lieutenant Hunt?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I should think they would include: The designation of the base Company; instructions for sending a reconnaissance officer and party of guides forward at once; designating the place where the leading elements of the battalion are to halt for the purpose of receiving final orders for the relief of the units of the 2nd battalion; designation of the place where unit commanders are to assemble to receive orders for the relief.”

The Director: “Paragraph 4 of a field order includes administrative arrangements. Can you think of anything that would be necessary to be included in that paragraph of Major A’s orders?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I can think of nothing. That would depend upon circumstances. These administrative arrangements include: instructions for the trains—which have already been attended to; collecting station for wounded—which will be announced in a later order. It may be assumed that as soon as the advance halted that the rolling kitchen was brought up and the men given a hot meal before relieving the 2nd battalion. If such is the case the kitchen will have to be disposed of in paragraph 4.”

The Director: “What will paragraph 5 contain?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “It will contain information of the time when the present command post of the battalion will close and when and where it will next be opened.”

The Director: “We have now covered the elements of the Major’s order. Let us review them briefly:

“Paragraph 1: Information of the enemy and our own troops.

“Paragraph 2: The Major’s plan of action in general terms.

“Paragraph 3: Distribution of troops—orders for the various elements of the battalion.

“Paragraph 4: Administrative arrangements.

“Paragraph 5: Time of closing the present C. P. and when and where it will next open.

“Now, I want each member of the class to write out the battalion commander’s order on his pad. Base your order on the dispositions that we have discussed in the solution of the problem; use the 5 paragraph order system; endeavor to include all the instructions that we have included in our solution.”

Procedure

The necessary time is allowed for the preparation of the order by the members of the class. As soon as the orders are completed the Director will distribute to the class the mimeograph sheets containing the order that he has prepared as a solution to the situation.

He will read it aloud to the class and have each man compare it with the order that he, himself, has prepared.

This solution order will be as follows:

1. The enemy continued his retreat during the day. Our 2nd battalion has halted along (d)[1] where it is in close contact with the enemy. Details of location of units will be given later. The attack will be continued tomorrow morning. The 3rd battalion relieves our battalion before (g)[1] tonight. When relieved the 2nd battalion goes to the regimental reserve.

2. This battalion will relieve the 2nd battalion tonight.

3. (a) The Intelligence Section, Headquarters’ Company will proceed at once to the C. P. 2nd battalion and be prepared to take over the intelligence functions.

(b) The Communications platoon, Headquarters’ Company will proceed at once to the C. P. 2nd battalion and be prepared to take over the communications net and message center.

(c) Captain A, with Company A, will march at ____ (hour) p. m., in approach march formation in the ____[2] half of the regimental sector, preparatory to relieving the ____[2] Assault Company of the 2nd battalion. The guide will be ____[3] Compass bearing ____ degrees, magnetic. Contact with the ____[3] of Company B will be maintained.

(d) Captain B, with Company B, will march at ____ (hour) p. m., in approach march formation in the ____[3] half of the regimental sector, preparatory to relieving the ____[3] assault company of the 2nd battalion. Directing line ____ (state directing line). Compass bearing ____ degrees, magnetic.

(e) Captain C, with Company C, will follow Company A in approach march formation at a distance of 300 yards, preparatory to relieving local support company of the 2nd Battalion. Compass bearing ____ degrees, magnetic.

(f) Captain D, with Company D, will follow Company B, in approach march formation at a distance of 300 yards, preparatory to relieving the Machine Gun elements of the 2nd battalion. Directing line ____ (state). Compass bearing ____ degrees, magnetic.

(x) Company B, base company.

A reconnaissance officer from each company, accompanied by scouts and guides will be sent forward at once.

When the leading elements of the battalion have arrived at ____ (state place), the entire battalion will halt, take cover and await orders.

Company Commanders will assemble at ____ (state point) to receive orders covering the details of the relief.

4. Rolling Kitchens will join the combat train of the reserve battalion.

5. The battalion C. P. will close here at ____ (time) and open at the C. P. 2nd battalion at the same hour.

Explanation

The Director: “After issuing this order and making sure that it is understood the battalion commander accompanied by his battalion staff, runners, etc., and the remainder of the battalion Headquarters’ Company will proceed to the front. One officer will be left at the old C. P. until the troops have moved out. He will then go to the front. The Major will get in personal communication with the Commanding Officer of the 2nd Battalion, secure all the information he has of the situation and the location of the troops to be relieved. He will make such reconnaissance as is practicable and necessary to a complete understanding of the situation and then prepare his orders for the relief of the 2nd battalion.”

Procedure

The Director: “Are there any questions?”

The Director endeavors to answer any questions that may be asked.

Approach March and Deployment Card No. 1

Director’s Key

1. Conduct the class to (e) where the Terrain exercise is to begin.

2. Distribute the sheets containing Special Situation, Blue, read and explain.

3. Meaning of Sector; attacking brigade; attack formations—brigades side by side; regiments side by side; attacking brigade and reserve brigade—tandem; formation of 19th brigade.

4. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 1, read and explain.

5. Approach march and deployment; importance of; necessity for training; training programs; failure of battalion to jump off.

6. Visualize formation of 1st Battalion. Point out relative location of units.

7. Estimate of situation; mission; enemy; own troops; terrain plans of operation; decision.

8. Order: Information of Enemy and own troops (Refer to copy of order to be submitted as solution in bringing out points of order. Make discussion along lines of solution). Plan of commander. Orders for each unit. Put in paragraph (x). Administrative arrangements. Location of C. P. Review the paragraphs of the order.

9. Have class write out order on pads.

10. Distribute sheets containing the solution (copy of Order). Read and explain. Have members of class compare their order with the solution.

11. Explain subsequent actions of Major A.

Procedure

The class is now conducted to the area supposed to be occupied by Company B. The Director will distribute the sheets containing Situation No. 2 to the members of the class.

The Problem

Situation No. 2:

You, Captain B, are commanding Company B. You have the order of the battalion commander relating to your company as follows:

(d) Captain B, with Company B, will march at —— (hour) p. m., in approach march formation in the right (left) half of the regimental sector, preparatory to relieving the right (left) assault company of the 2nd battalion. Directing line —— (state directing line). Compass bearing —— degrees, magnetic.

(x) Company B, base company.

A reconnaissance officer from each company, accompanied by scouts and guides will be sent forward at once.

4. Rolling kitchens will join the combat train of the reserve battalion.

You have returned to your Company.

Required:

What action do you take?

Procedure

The Director will read the situation aloud, make such explanations as may be necessary and point out the area occupied by Company B. One or more members of the class may be called upon to state his understanding of the situation.

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what do you understand to be the formation of Company B at this moment?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I would say that the company would be in approach march formation. There would be two platoons, let us say the 1st and 2nd, in the assault echelon and one, the 3rd, in the support echelon. All three of the platoons would at this time be deployed in two waves, a section of three squads in each wave. I think each section would be deployed in a line of skirmishers while at a halt. The company headquarters would be here, about midway between the assault echelon and the support echelon.”

(Note.—Lieutenant Williams will point out the location of the various elements of the Company on the ground.)

The Director: “Why do you think the Company would be deployed in a line of skirmishers at this time?”

Lieutenant Williams: “When the company halts the men will want to take advantage of existing cover. If there is little cover available, as in this case, each man will dig himself in—he will dig a ‘fox hole’ big enough to give him some cover. Shell holes will be improved along their forward lips to give cover and if large ones are available as much as a half squad may occupy one of them. Another reason for the support battalion deploying into a line of skirmishers when it halts for any length is this: If the enemy should make a counter-attack and break through our assault battalion, and the companies of our support battalion are ‘dug in’ in a line of skirmishers they are in position to meet him without any change in the formation. Everything is all set and ready to receive the counter-attack.”

The Director: “I think you have sized up the formation pretty well. I think if any member of this class is ever in command of an assault company of a support battalion in action he will remember this phase of this Terrain Exercise and when he halts for any length of time he will get the company into a line of skirmishers and have them dig in. You may say ‘why dig in for such a short halt.’ I answer that you will have no trouble getting the men to dig fox holes after they have been in action a few times. They soon learn the value of them and automatically do it.”

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hastings, let us assume that you are Captain B. How do you size up the situation?”

Captain Hastings: “My immediate mission is to get my company ready to march at the appointed hour.

“I have little information of the detailed dispositions of the enemy that is opposing our 1st battalion but my reconnaissance officer whom I will send forward right away will secure it and have it available for me before the orders for the actual relief are to be issued.

“We are to relieve the right (left) assault company of the 1st battalion which is now in close contact with the enemy along the front lines. Due to casualties and the progress of the day’s action it is probable that each of his assault platoons have both waves in the firing line and it is highly probable that some or all of the support platoon has also been absorbed in the firing line. It is necessary for Company B in making the relief to get the assault troops in the proper formation to make the attack tomorrow morning.

“The present formation of the company is suitable for the purpose and will need no change. We can march straight to the front in our present general formation. We will change from a line of skirmishers into a line of squad columns for each of the waves of the 1st and 2nd platoons and the 3rd platoon will march in a column of section columns with the second section staggered to the right of the first.”

(Note.—Discuss features of the terrain as they actually exist.)

The Director: “Your decision will be to march to the front in the general formation you are now in.”

Captain Hastings: “Yes, sir.”

The Director: “Now let us go into details a little. Lieutenant Wallace, what do you understand to be the purpose of the ‘Directing line’ assigned to the company by the Major?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “The directing line was assigned in addition to the compass bearing to make doubly sure that the company would keep the right direction and that there would be little chance for getting lost. It is a well defined topographical feature and will serve the purpose very well.”

The Director: “You note that the company has been designated as ‘base company.’ What do you understand by that?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “It is the company on which all the units of the battalion will guide during the approach march.”

Explanation

The Director: “This places an additional responsibility on the company. If Company B loses its direction the whole battalion will do the same and it is probable that the troops will not be in position ready to ‘jump off’ tomorrow morning. You have no idea of the confusion that can take place in an outfit that loses its direction and gets lost in an operation of this kind. Every possible precaution must be taken to prevent it. In this case the Captain must charge the platoon that is to march nearest to the directing line to guide on that line throughout the march and for the other platoons to guide on it. In this case the right (left) assault platoon will be designated ‘base platoon’ and will take every precaution to keep the right (left) element of the platoon absolutely on the directing line. You can see that this places the responsibility for the march direction of the whole battalion on the squad that is nearest the directing line. I want you to keep this in mind throughout the problem.”

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, what preliminary arrangements would Captain B make for issuing his orders to the company?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “The company command post is supposed to be located here.

(Note.—In framing up the problem the Director should locate the Company C. P. where there is cover. If it is impracticable to do so, it may be assumed that there is a shell hole available.)

“The Captain will assemble the platoon commanders and platoon sergeants and issue the orders for the initial operation of the Company.”

The Director: “What will be included in the first paragraph of the order?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “The information of the enemy and our own troops. This will be a repetition of paragraph 1 of the Major’s order with the addition of information as to what the other companies of the battalion are going to do. Captain B will go into details, for it must be remembered, that none of the platoon commanders were present when Major A issued his orders and they know nothing of the situation except what they have been able to observe for themselves.”

The Director: “I am glad to hear you bring out that point. It takes only a few minutes to explain the situation in detail and is most valuable to subordinate officers who are charged with the task of actually carrying out the operations. They must know the details of the situation. Now, Captain Harvey, what would you include in the second paragraph of the order?”

Captain Harvey: “My plans. To march at the designated hour, preparatory to relieving the right (left) assault company of the 1st battalion. In order to save questions regarding the relief I would state to the effect that detailed instructions would be issued later.”

The Director: “Very good. Now comes the distribution of troops. That is paragraph 3 of the field order. What points would you include in it?”

Captain Harvey: “I would give the orders for each platoon separately. Those for the right assault platoon would come first. I would designate the platoon by number and the name of the platoon commander; state the formation; the sector that the platoon is to march in; announce the guide; and the compass bearing of the march. In the case of the base platoon I would indicate the directing line of the march in addition.

“I will then follow with instructions for the reconnaissance party and guides to go to the front right away.

“Then will come that part of the order that is of interest to all the elements of the Company. The announcement of the base platoon; where the halt is to be made to receive detailed orders for the relief. Then will follow the final paragraph of the order designating the place where the Company Headquarters is to march.”

The Director: “I think you have covered the elements of the company order very well. I hope all of you see the necessity for such an order. You may say: why all of this long-winded order for the operation of a single rifle company? Why not have Captain B simply give the signal for the advance when the time comes and have the company go ahead? Suppose you were one of the platoon commanders in the company, would you rather have the detailed order for your operation or would you be more satisfied with a mere extended order drill formation? I am sure you will all favor the order procedure and that is the answer to the question. If every man has information of what is going on and he knows the part that his unit is to take in the operation he can go about his work in a much more intelligent manner. I am pleased to note that many of you are taking notes on the technique of the Captain’s order. They will now stand you in good stead. Are there any questions?”

Captain Hodges: “I note that Captain Harvey made a statement about sending forward the reconnaissance party. Who would head that party and just what would it be composed of?”

The Director: “Captain Harvey, what are your ideas about this?”

Captain Harvey: “I would have the second in command lead the party. It would be composed of two runners from each of the platoons and two from company headquarters.”

The Director: “You cannot have the second in command lead the party. He is not up with the company at this time. He is back with the rear echelon of the company. The idea is that he will remain there so as to be available to take charge in case the company commander becomes a casualty.”

Captain Harvey: “That is right. I had overlooked that fact. I would have the commander of the 3rd platoon conduct the reconnaissance party. His platoon is to be in support and is the most available officer. The platoon sergeant can conduct the platoon on the approach march.”

The Director: “I think you are right. Does that answer your question, Captain Hodges?”

Captain Hodges: “Yes, sir.”

Procedure

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the class to write out Captain B’s order on his pad. Place yourself in the Captain’s shoes; visualize the situation just as it is before you; refer to the notes you have made during the solution and explanations; and write out the order. This is the very best training you can possibly get. It puts the proposition right up to you for solution. In writing the order leave a margin of 1½ inches on the left.”

When the class has finished with the order the Director will direct each member to pass his order to the member at his left. Each officer will then correct the order in his possession and make comments on the margin.

When this has been completed the Director will distribute the mimeograph sheets containing the order of Captain B and the members of the class will be allowed a few minutes to compare the order he has written with the one distributed by the Director.

The Director: “Now I want each member of the class to write his name at the top of the order he has prepared and to place the name of the officer who commented on it at the top of the left-hand margin.”

When this is done the orders will be collected. The Director will examine them at his leisure for the purpose of determining the quality of the work that the class is doing.

Captain B’s order distributed by the Director will be as follows:

1. The enemy continued his retreat during the day. Our 2nd battalion has halted along (d)[4] where it is in close contact with the enemy. Details of location of units will be given later. The attack will be continued tomorrow morning. The 3rd battalion relieves our battalion before ——[4] tonight. When relieved the 2nd battalion goes to the regimental reserve. Our battalion relieves the 2nd battalion tonight. Company A marches on our left (right); Company C follows Company A at a distance of 300 yards; Company D follows us at a distance of 300 yards.

2. This company, as base company of the battalion, will march at ______ (hour), preparatory to relieving the right (left) assault company of the 2nd battalion. Detailed instructions for the relief later.

3. (a) Lieutenant X, with the 1st platoon, will march the right (left) half of our company sector. Guide will be left (right). Contact with the 2nd platoon will be maintained. Compass bearing of march —— degrees, magnetic.

(b) Lieutenant Y, with the 2nd platoon, will march in the left (right) half of our company sector. Guiding line (indicate in detail) compass bearing of march —— degrees, magnetic.

(c) Sergeant M with the 3rd platoon will march in the center of our company sector following the 1st and 2nd platoons at a distance of 200 yards.

(d) Lieutenant Z with 8 runners (2 from Company Headquarters and 2 from each platoon) will proceed at once to the front, reconnoiter the sector occupied by the left (right) assault company, 2nd battalion, and instruct the runners in order that they may act as guides for the elements of the company in effecting the relief.

(x) The 2nd platoon Base platoon. When the leading elements of the 1st and 2nd platoons reach the —— (state line) a halt will be made until further orders.

4. The rolling kitchen will join the combat train of the reserve battalion at ——.

5. I will march ahead of the 3rd platoon.

Explanation

The Director: “The platoon commanders will return to their platoons, assemble their non-commissioned officers and issue their instructions. Through this chain of command the instructions for the operation will be gotten right down to the last member of the battalion.”

Approach March and Deployment Card No. 2

Director’s Key

1. Conduct the class to the area supposed to be occupied by Company B.

2. Distribute Situation No. 2; read and explain. Call upon one or more members of class to state understanding of the situation.

3. Formation of Company B; cover; formation for advance.

4. Make estimate of situation; mission; enemy; own troops; plan; decision.

5. Purpose of directing line; meaning of base company. Loss of direction.

6. Preliminary arrangements for issuing order.

7. Contents of order: information of enemy and own troops; plan of commander; dispositions—detailed instructions for elements of company.

8. Necessity for issuing orders.

9. Reconnaissance party. Second in command.

10. Write out Captain B’s order. Pass to officer at left. Criticise. Distribute solution. Compare. Collect for future examination.

11. Procedure for platoon commanders. Get order down to last man of battalion.

Procedure

The class is now conducted to the area over which the 2nd platoon is to advance.

On arriving at a selected point the class will be halted.

The Director: “Captain James, we are now in the area over which the 2nd platoon is advancing to the front. Lieutenant Y, the platoon commander, is at this point. What do you estimate to be the approach march formation of the platoon?”

Captain James: “I will first locate the platoon commander and then designate the location of the elements of the platoon with reference to him. I think that the platoon commander would be marching at this time about midway between the assault and the support waves. The 1st Section would be marching in a line of squad columns with the right (left) squad near the directing line which is right there (indicating). It is the base section and the squad nearest the directing line is the base squad. The head of the squad columns is about 25 yards in advance of the platoon commander.

“The 2nd platoon is following the platoon commander at a distance of about 25 yards in a line of squad columns.”

Lieutenant Baker: “It seems to me that the platoon commander would be out in front of his platoon at this time.”

The Director: “The platoon commander is free to go wherever he pleases. But you must remember he has two section leaders—one for each section of the platoon. These men are supposed to be competent to do their job. The platoon commander should march where he can best direct the operations of his platoon through his section leaders. In this case I think Captain James has located the platoon leader in the proper place.

“Now having definitely fixed in our minds the location of the elements of the platoon let us proceed with the next situation.”

The Problem

Situation No. 3:

You., Lieutenant Y., commanding the 2nd platoon have arrived at this point (indicate).

The 1st section is in a line of squad columns 25 yards to the front; the 2nd section is in a line of squad columns 25 yards in rear of you. For some minutes enemy shells have been falling in the area which is occupied by one of our batteries at the rate of about 4 per minute. At this moment the fire increased materially. The men have left the guns temporarily.

Required:

What do you do?

Procedure

The Director distributes the sheets containing Situation No. 3 and points out to the class the extent of the shelled area. It should be in the direct line of march of the 2nd platoon.

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hall, how do you size up the immediate situation?”

Captain Hall: “Our original mission has not changed. We must continue the march to the front regardless of what the enemy does. The 2nd battalion must be relieved tonight and our battalion must make the relief. We cannot stand here and wait for the enemy’s fire to let up. It is obvious that we cannot go through the shelled area without ruinous losses. The only thing left for us to do is to go around it.”

The Director: “Those are the points I wanted to bring out. The question before us is: How are we going to get around the shelled area? What have you to suggest, Lieutenant Barry?”

Lieutenant Barry: “In the first place I will have to decide the question as to which side of the shelled area we are to use in getting around it. If the whole platoon goes around one side and the enemy fire shifts in that direction we may get caught in it and lose a lot of men. I think we would reduce our chances of loss by using both sides and having one platoon go around to the right and one to the left.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, what do you think of that proposition?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I think it is all right. The question that arises in my mind is that of loss of control by the platoon commander and the difficulties of getting into the proper formation on the other side of the shelled area again.”

The Director: “When you consider that the platoon commander has a team of two sections each under the charge of a competent leader the difficulties are really not so great as they would at first appear. Let us decide that we are to go around the shelled area on both sides of it, a section on each side. On which side will you have the leading section go, Lieutenant Williams?”

Lieutenant Williams: “The 1st Section is the base section of the platoon—as such it is the base element of the company and the whole battalion. It is the unit on which the whole battalion is guiding its march. It should therefore go around on the —— side so that the 1st platoon can keep in touch with it and guide on it. When it gets to the other side of the shelled area it can deploy and get its —— element on the directing line again. By employing this method there will be no chance for the 1st platoon losing connection with it. The 2nd section will go around to the ——.”

The Director: “I think your reasoning is logical and if there are no objections we will accept that method. Now the battery commander of the battery being shelled will want to know what is going on. Captain Hastings, how will you provide for this?”

Captain Hastings: “I will send a runner to him with a message giving him the necessary information.”

The Director: “Let us assume that we have arrived at the decision indicated in our discussion. How would you get the orders to the troops?”

Captain Hastings: “When we get up as far as it is safe to go I will signal the platoon to halt. And then call for the section leaders to report to me. When they get here I will give them the orders necessary for the execution of the maneuver.”

Procedure

The Class is now conducted forward to the point where it is as far as it is safe to go and still avoid casualties from the enemy shell fire.

The Director: “It is considered that this is as far forward as it is reasonably safe to go. Lieutenant Y has halted the platoon and the section leaders have reported to him for orders. Now I want each member of the class to consider himself being Lieutenant Y and to write out on your pads the exact words that Lieutenant Y will say to the section leaders. Then follow this with the contents of the verbal message that you will send by runner to the battery commander.”

The necessary time is allowed for this. When the solutions are completed the Director will have one or more members of the class read aloud what they have written. The solutions are discussed and commented upon.

The Director will then distribute to the class the mimeograph slips containing the orders of Lieutenant Y and a few minutes are allowed for the members of the class to compare them with their work.

The order of Lieutenant Y will be as follows:

“The enemy is shelling the battery in our immediate front. There is no further information of our own troops.

“This platoon will go around the shelled area.

“The 1st section will go around to the —— (right) (left) side towards the rest of the battalion.

“The 2nd section will go around to the —— (left) (right) side towards the directing line.

“On arriving at the other side of the shelled area the platoon will again take up the same formation that it is in now.

“I will go in rear of the 1st platoon.”

The following message will be sent to the battery commander:

“Second Platoon Company B —— Infantry is going around your battery position to the right and left. Will deploy again on the other side of the shelled area.”

Approach March and Deployment Card No. 3

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to area over which the 2nd platoon is marching.

2. Formation of 2nd platoon. Column of sections in line of squad columns. Locate each element on the ground. Location of platoon commander.

3. Distribute Situation No. 3. Read and explain.

4. Estimate of Situation; mission; action of enemy; decision to go around shelled area, on both sides. Base section to keep in contact with rest of battalion. Message to the battery commander.

5. Conduct class to safe edge of shelled area. Write out orders and message of platoon commander.

6. Distribute solution. Discuss same. Allow time to compare with work of class.

Procedure

The Class will now be conducted up to the place where the company commanders have been ordered to meet the battalion commander to receive orders for the relief of the 2nd battalion.

The Director: “This is the place where Major A directed the Company Commanders to rendezvous to receive the final orders for the relief of the 1st battalion. We assume that the troops have been halted along the line —— (indicate) where they have taken advantage of such cover as is available and are preparing individual cover where none is available.”

The Director will now distribute the sheets containing Situation No. 4.

The Problem

Situation No. 4:

You, Major A, have arrived at this point. You have had a conference with the commander of the 2nd battalion, made a reconnaissance of the position and determined the location of the units to be relieved.

The latter are as follows:

Company E occupies the right half of the sector with all three platoons on the firing line.

Company F occupies the left half of the sector with two platoons and a part of the third in the firing line and the remainder of the third as local support.

Company C is located in fox holes at —— (indicate the location) as battalion reserve. A part of the company has participated in the day’s action but the men are all now at the location indicated.

Company D has one platoon divided among the assault companies, and the company (less this platoon) is with the battalion reserve with guns located to cover approaches and to execute overhead harassing fire on enemy back areas.

Detachments of the Howitzer Company are in position in the platoon sectors and are to remain with the 1st battalion for tomorrow’s attack.

The battalion headquarters company has taken over the intelligence duties, the communications net and the message center.

It is now —— o’clock p. m.

The enemy occupies the —— (give general location of front lines).

There is considerable shelling throughout the area and occasional bursts of machine gun and rifle fire along the entire battle front.

Your company commanders are assembled here in accordance with the instructions contained in your last order.

Required:

Your orders and instructions.

Procedure

The Director will read the situation aloud, make such explanations as may be necessary and point out the places mentioned. One or more members of the class will be called upon to state their understanding of the tactical situation at this time.

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, we have now to consider the orders and instructions that Major A would issue to his assembled Company commanders. What is the first thing you would put into the Major’s order?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “The Major has been out to the front and made a personal reconnaissance as far as practicable. He has interviewed the Commander of the 2nd battalion and the officers of his staff who have detailed information as to the situation. He ought to have pretty definite information of just how the different elements of the 2nd battalion are disposed. He should give his Company Commanders all of this information in the first paragraph of the order. We note that this information is all contained in Situation No. 3.”

The Director: “What would you include in the next paragraph of the order, Lieutenant Ralston?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “My plan, to the effect that our battalion is to relieve the 2nd battalion.”

Captain Harvey: “But we are going to do more than that. We are going to make the attack tomorrow morning. It seems to me that the Major would include in the order all the instructions he wants to give the Company Commanders not only for the relief, but for the attack also. What do you think about that, sir?”

The Director: “The Major would certainly not let his Company Commanders get away without giving them all the instructions possible regarding the part they are to play in the attack tomorrow morning. But there are several things that he must get from higher up before he can complete his plans for the attack and give them to his Company Commanders. He must know the time the attack is to begin. He must know about the artillery preparation and the rate of advance of the rolling barrage. He must have information regarding the cooperation of the tanks. While he is waiting for this information, which he momentarily expects, he will go ahead and issue his orders for the relief. Then if the other essential information is not at hand by the time the Company Commanders must join their companies, he will issue as much of the attack order as possible and leave the rest to go out later. He certainly will not let his Captains get away until they have all the instructions it is possible to give them up to the time it is necessary for them to leave—the arrangements to continue the attack tomorrow morning.”

Captain Harvey: “Those are the points I wanted to know about.”

The Director: “Now, Captain Hodges, what is the next part of the order?”

Captain Hodges: “The tactical dispositions. Orders for each element of the battalion. Designate the relieving unit and the unit to be relieved. For example: ‘Company A will relieve Company E.’ This same form will pertain with all the elements of the battalion.”

The Director: “Just how much detail would you include? To what extent would you go in prescribing the formation of the company when the relief is completed? For instance: Company E has all three platoons in the assault echelon at this time. Would you want Company A to do the same and hold out no company supports?”

Captain Hodges: “Now, that is quite a point. I had not thought of it. I might assume that Captain A would take up the proper formation without my specifying it, but to make sure I believe I would add another sentence or two and specify the formation. I should say he ought to have two platoons in the assault echelon and one held out as local support. I think it would be better to specify that. There would be less chance for a misunderstanding. I would also give these same instructions to the Captain of Company B.”

The Director: “I think you are right. It will certainly do no harm. In any event you have no doubt as to what you want done. Now, what about the machine gun company, Captain James? You will note that there is only one platoon up on the lines now. The rest of the company is back with the reserve with their guns covering the approaches and set up for overhead fire on back areas. Do you want to leave them that way?”

Captain James: “No, sir. I think I would need the supporting fire of all the machine guns in the ‘jump off’ tomorrow morning. I would assign one platoon to support Company A and the company (less 1 platoon) to support Company B. I think that would be better. If the attack goes over with a good gain in ground tomorrow morning the machine guns will not be able to keep up with it, and the Major will have an opportunity to make an adjustment of their position in the battalion. I certainly would want the advantage of their fire in the ‘jump off.’”

The Director: “I think you are right. Let us decide on that disposition.”

Explanation

The Director: “Now, there is another point I want to bring out at this time. You have pictured in your own mind this formation and advance of one battalion of Infantry and the relief and retirement of another. Along side of you to the right are two other battalions going through the same process. The same is happening to your left and all along the line. Behind you there are other battalions effecting reliefs. There are batteries of artillery and transport vehicles, innumerable. In other words the back area of a force in action is crowded with troops. There is much activity effecting reliefs, getting up supplies and ammunition and evacuating the wounded.

“The enemy is doing these same things. His back areas are just as crowded as our own. He is no better off than we are in this respect.

“It is our job to interfere with him as much as possible—to prevent or curtail movement, and inflict losses on him. The wounding or killing of one man by harassing fire will have no effect on the outcome of the war, but if we can kill and wound a thousand every night it will in time have its effect.

“The enemy can get away from artillery fire by avoiding shelled areas but he cannot get away from rifle and machine gun harassing fire for he never knows when and where it is going to come.

“If there is sufficient small arms ammunition available and it can be gotten up to the riflemen and machine gunners on the front lines the back areas of the enemy can be made a perfect ‘hell-hole’ by means of systematic harassing fire.

“Many of the men whom our men will relieve tonight will have ammunition in bandoliers with them. By having our men take over this ammunition and expending it tonight we can get a big increase in fire over the enemy back areas. Our ammunition supply for tomorrow will not be impaired. The men being relieved will be re-supplied when they get back to the regimental reserve. I think arrangements should be made for this procedure by the Major.”

Procedure

The Director: “The Major has made arrangements with the Commanding Officer 2nd battalion as to when the command of the sector is to pass to the 1st battalion. He will now have to tell his company commanders when their full responsibility is to devolve upon them for their respective sectors within the battalion. What would you do about that, Lieutenant Baker?”

Lieutenant Baker: “When a relief is made in larger commands the orders state the hour when the command is to pass to the relieving troops. But in a case like this I judge that it passes when the relief is completed. In order to make sure that the point is understood I would specify:

“‘Command of company sectors will pass when reliefs have been completed.’”

The Director: “I think that would be a good idea.”

Lieutenant Baker: “There is another point that should be included in the order. Let us say I am Captain B. My company is relieving Company F on the lines. The Captain of Company F either has not received definite orders as to what he is to do on being relieved or has overlooked the instructions in the confusion. It seems to me that it might be well for the Major to tell us just what Major B’s instructions are as to that point. It might save a lot of confusion in getting the 2nd battalion troops disengaged and out of the battalion sector. It might save a lot of casualties from men wandering around in the darkness for my section and squad leaders to be able to tell the men they are relieving just where to go.”

The Director: “I do not know that such instructions have a place in the regular order form. But I see no objection to putting it in. It can do no harm I am sure.

“Now, the Major will want to know when the reliefs have been completed and he will give instructions to that effect. He will then announce the location of the battalion command post and this will complete the details of the order.

“Now, I want each member of the class to write out Major A’s orders for the relief of the 2nd battalion.”

The necessary time is allowed for this. When completed the Director will call upon one or more of the members of the class to read his orders aloud and comments are invited from other members of the class.

The Director will then distribute the mimeograph sheets containing the Major’s order and an opportunity will be given the members of the class to compare the work with the solution presented.

The Major’s order will be as follows:

Solution

“The enemy occupies (describe the enemy’s front line in the necessary detail in the light of information gained by the Major’s reconnaissance).

“Our 2nd battalion is in close contact all along the line. Troops are disposed as follows in the battalion sector:

“Company E, right half of sector, with all three platoons on the line. Right of company at —— (describe location).

“Company F, left half of sector, with two platoons and part of the third on the line and the remainder as local support. Left of company at —— (describe location).

“Company G is located at —— (indicate location of company).

“Company H has one platoon divided among the assault companies and the company (less 1 platoon) is in the battalion reserve with guns now located to cover approaches and execute overhead harassing fire in the enemy back areas.

“This battalion will relieve the 2nd battalion.

“The Headquarters’ Company will relieve the Headquarters’ Company, 2nd battalion, and take over the duties pertaining thereto.

“Company A will relieve Company E in the right sector with two platoons in the assault echelon and one as local support.

“Company B will relieve Company F in the left sector with two platoons in the assault echelon and one as local support.

“Company C will relieve Company G as battalion reserve.

“Company D will relieve Company H, one platoon will support Company A and the company (less 1 platoon) will support Company B.

“Detachments of the Howitzer Company are to remain with the battalion. Company commanders will confer with the commanders of detachments in their respective sectors and arrange for the support of their special weapons. Men of Companies A and B will take over from the men of Companies E and F whom they relieve, all ammunition in bandoliers, which will be expended to keep up harassing fire during the remainder of the night, with a view to curtailing movement within the enemy lines. Company D will take over surplus ammunition from Company H and expend it for the same purpose. The regular ammunition supply will be reserved for the action tomorrow.

“Command of company sectors will pass when reliefs have been completed.

“When relieved, troops of the 2nd Battalion are to fall back to the line —— (describe).

“Report when reliefs are effected.

“Battalion C. P. at ——.”

Approach March and Deployment Card No. 4

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to the point where the company commanders have been ordered to assemble to meet the Major.

2. Distribute Situation No. 4, read aloud, and make necessary explanations.

3. Contents of Order: Information of enemy obtained by reconnaissance and reports; plan of commander; question of including orders for attack also; zero hour; artillery preparation; progress of barrage; tactical dispositions; orders for each element of command; orders for machine gun units; when command passes; action to be taken by troops when relieved.

4. Have members of class write out the Major’s order. When completed distribute the mimeograph sheets containing the solution. Read orders and compare.

The Problem

Situation No. 5:

Just as the order for the relief is completed, you, Major A, receive the following message from the regimental commander:

“No further information of the enemy.

“The general attack will be resumed tomorrow morning at 5.00 o’clock. Your battalion will attack in regimental sector.

“Mission: To pierce enemy position and assist division in penetrating the position.

“Zone of action: No change.

“Line of departure: (Describe in detail).

“The attack will be preceded by 30 minutes’ artillery preparation. The advance of the infantry will be preceded by a rolling barrage. Rate of advance of barrage 100 yards in 4 minutes.

“Station for slightly wounded at ——.

“Regimental C. P. no change.”

Required:

What orders do you give?

Procedure

The Director will distribute the sheets containing Situation No. 5, read the situation aloud and explain the message from the regimental commander. One or more members of the class will be called upon to state his understanding of the situation.

Explanation

The Director: “Let us visualize the situation. The Major has been expecting to receive just such a message from the regimental commander. As a matter of fact he anticipated it when he made the estimate of the situation before issuing his first order for the approach march before dark. He ordered his formation for the approach march so that when the order for the attack came there would be few changes necessary. By his foresight and knowledge of infantry tactics he now has his battalion in the proper formation to make the relief of the 2nd battalion and when this is accomplished he will have his units properly disposed to make the attack tomorrow morning. In other words, the Major started his attack when he made his initial dispositions. And this must be so in every case. When you get into the infantry area of a battle you must get your troops into a formation from which they can make an attack or repel an enemy counter-attack and you must keep them in that formation. That is why the subject of approach march and deployment is so important and that is why troops must be so thoroughly trained in it. During the war the subject was given little attention in our divisions. The British and French instructors brought nothing of it over from the other side. They had communication trenches as lanes of approach and gave little heed to the open warfare end of the game. The American divisions soon realized the necessity for thorough training and the most successful ones were those that spent many of their nights with units from battalions to brigades chasing through the woods, up hill and down dale, practicing the approach march formation. I am sure that when you consider the proposition seriously and visualize what can happen in a situation such as we have had to do with today you will realize the necessity for thorough training in the subject.”

Solution

The Director: “Now let us consider what must be included in the Major’s order for the attack. Captain Hall, what have you to suggest for the first paragraph?”

Captain Hall: “The Major has already given the company commanders everything he knows about the enemy. He has a little additional information to the effect that the general attack all along the line will be resumed tomorrow. This will be included in the first paragraph of the order.”

The Director: “That is all that is necessary. Our second paragraph is a much more complicated affair. What have you to suggest to go into it?”

Captain Hall: “The first thing would be the time of the attack. The orders from regimental headquarters say 5.00 o’clock. That will be included in the order. We have a definite mission for the battalion. To pierce the enemy position and assist our division to penetrate the position—that is, to make a break through, if possible. In order to do this we have got to drive hard. There is no change in the zone of action of the battalion; it remains the same as it was for today. The line of departure should be given. The information about the artillery preparation and the rolling barrage should be included. I think that is about all that must go into paragraph two of the order.”

The Director: “Yes. But you have skimped over two very important points without the explanation they deserve. These are the line of departure and the information about the artillery preparation and the rolling barrage. Let us go into these things a little more in detail.

“The division staff has made arrangements for the artillery preparation to come down along a certain line, and stand there for a period of thirty minutes. Then the barrage will begin to advance at exactly 5.00 o’clock. Unless we have a definite line of departure some parts of our front line may work their way to the front and be caught under our own barrage and you can see what would happen. In case any men do work forward during the night on reconnaissance they must get back a little before 4.30 so as not to get caught under the barrage.”

Lieutenant Barry: “I appreciate all the Director has said. But we have to keep up a reconnaissance during the night to keep in contact with the enemy. He might pull his lines back during the night and if he had decided to make a general retreat we would lose touch and with it a lot of time in conducting the pursuit. I think some of our patrols would have to take a chance on getting back so as not to lose contact. Then, too, if the enemy had pretty definite information that our artillery preparation is coming down on a certain line and we have no men out in front he may move his machine gun squads a little to the front and avoid the barrage altogether and be ready to receive our attack when our first wave goes over the top. If I were commanding one of those assault companies I would keep my front thoroughly patrolled during the night and keep my scouts right up in the enemy’s lines until a minute or two before the barrage comes down. I would have them beat it back a hundred yards and take a chance on escaping from the barrage. As soon as they are out of the way I would then have my special weapons and riflemen keep up a fire on any enemy troops that showed themselves trying to get to a position in front of where the barrage is coming down.”

Explanation

The Director: “That is all very interesting. Those are important points that we must not lose sight of in our operations against an active and crafty enemy. He will pull all kinds of stunts on you and you have to be just a lap ahead of him to best him. All of this shows the great necessity for combat training. We must have patrol leaders and scouts that know the importance of all these things and know how to go about them. We hear so much about the technical branches and the high order of training that is required. If there is any training more difficult than that of the ‘doughboy’ I have yet to see it. Take the training of patrol leaders and scouts for the single phase of infantry combat that we have just been discussing. I leave it to you if there is anything more technical and difficult in the training of soldiers. If these men fail the whole military operation falls down and may be an utter failure. A half dozen machine guns on a battalion front that have moved forward a few yards and escaped the barrage will be able to hold up a whole battalion. So let us not neglect the training of our scouts.

“If the enemy should fall back during the night our scouts will follow him up and keep in touch with him, word will go back to the battalion and on back to the division so that arrangements can be made to alter the plans. In that case the battalion commander will order a general advance to keep in contact.”

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, what would you include in paragraph 3 of the Major’s order?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “The detail orders for each element of the battalion, giving the designation of the organization and the particular part that it is to play in the operation. There will be orders for Company A, the right assault company; Company B, the left assault company; Company C, the battalion reserve, and Company D, the machine gun company. Then the orders for the elements of the Howitzer Company hold off to support the attack. I believe that would complete paragraph 3 of the order.”

The Director: “What would you include in paragraph 4, Lieutenant Williams?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I would include the location of the station for slightly wounded. I do not know of anything else.”

The Director: “And paragraph 5 would contain what?”

Lieutenant Williams: “The location of the regimental and battalion command posts.”

Explanation

The Director: “I think we have discussed everything that must be included in the battalion order. If you will compare all of this with some of the battalion orders you, as Company Commanders, received in France, you will see how sadly lacking some of them were. What we want to do is to prevent a repetition of those conditions and that is why we are devoting our time and attention to these things now. We want to be prepared to solve these problems if the time ever comes when we have to do so again.”

Procedure

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the class to write out the Major’s order on his pad. See how much of the details that we have discussed you can get into the order.”

Sufficient time is allowed for the purpose.

After the orders have been completed the Director will distribute the mimeograph sheets containing the order and one or more of the members of the class will be called upon to read his order and follow with the corresponding paragraph of the solution.

The order will be as follows:

“There is no further information of the enemy. The general attack all along the line will be resumed tomorrow.

“Our battalion will attack at 5.00 o’clock a. m.

“Mission: To drive hard, pierce the enemy position and assist our division in making a penetration of the position.

“Zone of action: No change.

“Line of departure: (Describe line in detail.)

“The attack will be preceded by 30 minutes artillery preparation. The advance of the infantry will be preceded by a rolling barrage. Rate of advance of barrage 100 yards in 4 minutes.

“Company A will attack in the right (left) half of the battalion sector.

“Company B will attack in the left (right) half of the battalion sector.

“Company C will be battalion reserve and follow at a distance of about 300 yards. One squad will be sent to the (east) and one to the (west) boundary of the battalion sector to maintain connection with adjoining units.

“Company D will support the attack of Companies A and B in accordance with previous instructions.

“Elements of the howitzer company in each company sector will support the attack.

“Station for slightly wounded at ____ (indicate).

“Plan of signal communication: No change.

“Command posts:

“Regiment: At ____ (indicate).

“Regiment: At ____ (indicate.)”

Approach March and Deployment Card No. 5

Director’s Key

1. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 5. Read and explain. Have one or more members of class state his understanding of the situation.

2. Explain situation. Prepared to receive order for attack. Formation from the time of taking up the approach march. Training of troops in approach march formation.

3. Discuss Major’s order. Information of enemy; information of our own troops; time of attack; mission of battalion; line of departure; artillery preparation.

4. Details of solution. Necessity for designating line of departure. Artillery barrage. Scouting and patrolling. Keeping contact with the enemy.

5. Necessity for infantry combat training.

6. Paragraph 3 of the order: Orders for each element. Assault companies; battalion reserve; machine gun company; howitzer elements.

7. Paragraph 4 station for slightly wounded.

8. Paragraph 5 of order. Signal communications and location of C. P.’s.

9. Have class write out order. Distribute solution. Have one or more members of class read their order and compare it with the solution.

Explanation

The Director: “When the battalion commander has finished giving his orders the Company Commanders will go back to their respective companies and the Major will go to his command post. By this time the company reconnaissance parties should be back at their companies and ready to guide the various elements up to the lines where they are to make the reliefs.

“The Company Commander will assemble his officers and non-commissioned officers and go over the whole situation with them and issue the orders for the company. This order will conform to the five paragraph system; will contain the essential elements of the Major’s order and detailed instructions for each element of the company.

“The Company Commander will then conduct his company to the front in such formation as to take advantage of the natural cover afforded and so as to be as invulnerable as possible to the enemy’s fire.

“The details of the actual relief will depend upon the cover available and what the enemy is doing to interfere with it.”

Terrain Exercise No. 3.
Defensive Position

The Problem

Special Situation—Blue:

The Blue forces, after severe fighting, have reached the line (a). The reds have vigorously defended every foot of the ground, and it is apparent that the resistance is growing stronger.

On account of the exhausted condition of the troops and the lack of fresh reserves, the Blues are unable to continue the advance and it has been decided to assume the defensive, temporarily.

The 2nd battalion, which has been the assault battalion, has been stopped and is now holding the line (b-c). It has suffered heavy casualties.

The 1st battalion, which has been in regimental support, has had comparatively few casualties.

The 3rd battalion is the regimental reserve.

It is now 4.30 p. m.

It has been decided to have the 1st battalion, with one platoon of the howitzer company attached, organize and hold a defensive position covering the front of the regimental sector just in rear of the line now occupied by the 2nd battalion.

Major A, the battalion commander, accompanied by his company commanders and Lieutenant Z, commanding the howitzer platoon, has made a personal reconnaissance of the position and issued the following verbal orders to the assembled officers:

“The enemy has stopped our advance temporarily. It is necessary for us to assume the defensive until our troops can be reorganized and arrangements made to resume the advance.

“Our 2nd battalion is now holding the line (b-c). It will withdraw after dark. Our 3rd battalion relieves us as support battalion.

“The —— infantry on our right will hold the front from (d to e); the —— infantry on our left will hold the front from (f to g).

“This battalion, with one howitzer platoon attached, will organize and hold the line from (h to i).

“Company H will be disposed as follows:

“One section at (j), covering (k).

“One section at (l), covering (m).

“One section at (n), covering (o).

“One section at (p), covering (q).

“The platoon from the howitzer company will be disposed as follows:

“The 37 mm. gun at (r) and the light mortar at (s), covering the front of the battalion.

“The firing line and support line are (t) and (t′) respectively. They will be organized into two strong points.

“Company A will occupy the area (u).

“Company B will occupy the area (v).

“Company C will occupy the battalion reserve line along (w).

“Companies will proceed with their tasks with the least practicable delay.

“Administrative arrangements, later.

“Battalion C. P. at (x).”

Explanation of Letter Symbols

(a). A brief description of the location of the general line reached by the Blue forces. This should be identified by some easily recognized topographical feature of the terrain.

(b-c). The specific location of the line occupied by the troops of the 2nd battalion.

(d to e), (f to g). The boundaries of the front that are to be organized and held by the troops on the right and left.

(h to i). The front to be organized and held by the 1st battalion. This will be the boundary lines of the sector not occupied by the 2nd battalion.

(j), (l), (n), (p). The location of the several sections of the machine gun company.

(k), (m), (o), (q). The front covered by the several sections of the machine gun company. Go into detail regarding the bands of fire they are to put down.

(r), (s). The location of the 37 mm. gun and light mortar of the howitzer platoon.

(t), (t′). The location of the firing line and support, respectively.

(u). The area to be occupied by Company A.

(v). The area to be occupied by Company B.

(w). The location of the battalion reserve line.

(x). The location of the battalion C. P.

(Note.—The preparation of this problem will require considerable work on the part of the Director in order to get all of the features of the position worked out in detail so as to be able to include them in the order to the company commanders. If it is practicable to do so the boundaries of the battalion sector, together with the location of the machine guns and howitzer units and the battalion C. P., should be marked with flags. This will save many questions during the Terrain Exercise and save a lot of time. It will give the members of the class a much better idea of the set-up and they will be able to proceed with the solution of their part of the problem more readily.)

Procedure

The members of the class are assembled in the vicinity of (x).

The Director distributes the sheets containing the special situation Blue and reads it aloud. The members of the class follow from the copy in their possession. The places, localities and areas referred to are pointed out in detail.

The Director will call upon one or more members of the class to state his understanding of the tactical situation and this process is continued until he is satisfied that all members know the details and are ready to proceed with the solution.

Explanation

The Director: “Before going further with the problem I want to make some remarks on the general subject of the defensive and some with reference to the part that the battalion and its component parts plays in it. The problem under consideration is that of a passive defense. Our troops have made such rapid progress that the rear echelons have not been able to keep up. The enemy has been falling back on his reserves and naturally his defense is stiffening all along the line. The time has arrived when it is necessary for us to stop for a period; reorganize our forces, which have been more or less disorganized by our successes; bring up our rear echelons; and prepare to continue the advance. During this period we must so organize our position that the enemy will have little chance for success should he decide to attack with a view to interfering with our arrangements.

“Our attacking troops have now arrived on a general line where a defensive position may be taken up and the high command has ordered such action. We do not want to give up any ground that has been gained that is suitable for our purpose. Having this principle in mind Major A has decided to organize and hold the ground that is now occupied by the support echelon of the 2nd Battalion.”

Procedure

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what factors exercise the greatest influence in the selection of a defensive position?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I should say the facilities for communication and those for observation. The greater ease with which we can move troops within the position the better we can defend it, and unless we have facilities for observation we had better move to another place for the enemy will be able to surprise us on any and all occasions.”

The Director: “In a defensive position we deploy in great depth. What is the object of this, Captain Hastings?”

Captain Hastings: “Where a great mass of enemy artillery is to be encountered we must disperse our troops over a large area to force him to scatter his fire, and waste a lot of it. In addition to this we must have room to maneuver our counter-attack units and get them into action with as little flank marching as possible. In a case like we are considering here I do not believe such great depth is necessary. This is open warfare and it will take the enemy quite a while to get his artillery in shape to employ it effectively on our position. We will therefore be able to concentrate our troops in a more shallow zone than is usual in regular position warfare.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, what are the defensive areas called in a defensive position?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “They are combat groups; strong points; centers of resistance; subsectors and sectors.”

The Director: “What do you understand a combat group to be?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “It is an area prepared for defense and held by a small unit such as a platoon or section.”

The Director: “What is a strong point, Lieutenant Ralston?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “A strong point is an aggregate of combat groups distributed in width and depth under the command of one officer. It is usually defended by a rifle company and usually has machine guns attached. Where practicable, it is arranged for all ’round defense.”

The Director: “What is a center of resistance?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “An aggregate of strong points distributed in width and depth and commanded by one officer. It is usually occupied by a battalion.”

The Director: “I hope you all see how this proposition works out. A combat group is the smallest element. Two or more of these groups form a strong point. Two or more strong points linked up together form a center of resistance. You will note the Major’s disposition for our battalion here. It forms a center of resistance consisting of the two strong points held by Companies A and B respectively with Company C as a reserve with Company D distributed at key points within the area.”

The class is now conducted to area (u), which has been assigned to Company A.

The Problem

Situation No. 1:

You, Captain A, are commanding Company A, the unit assigned to occupy the area (u) in the right (left) of the battalion sector. You have Major A’s order to proceed with your task with the least practicable delay.

Required:

What do you do?

Procedure

The Director will distribute the sheets containing Situation No. 1. He will read it to the class and make such explanation as may be necessary.

The Director: “Captain Harvey, what steps do you take to get your company up to the front?”

Captain Harvey: “I have with me one runner from each of my platoons and two runners from Company Headquarters. I will send the platoon runners back with a verbal message to their respective platoon commanders to bring the platoons up. I will have one of my company runners to go to the (indicate place) with a message to platoon commanders to halt their platoons there and report to me here. I think that is all that would be necessary to get the platoons up and assemble the platoon commanders here to receive orders.”

Solution

The Director: “All right. We will assume that you have sent the platoon runners back for the platoons and that one of your company runners has gone back to the rendezvous point. What are you going to do between now and the time the platoon commanders report to you for orders?”

Captain Harvey: “I am going to make a personal reconnaissance of the area assigned to my company, size up the situation, arrive at a decision as to how I am going to occupy the area and dope out my orders for the platoon commanders.”

The Director: “That is the proper procedure. Captain Hodges, in what ways may the company be distributed in an area of this kind?”

Captain Hodges: “In the first place there are three lines included in the area. The first is the local security or line of observation—the outpost line; next is the firing line which is the line of defense of the area—where the fight will take place if the enemy attacks; next is the support line. The company must cover all three of these lines. There are several methods of deployment available. The company may be deployed with two platoons each covering the outpost line and firing line and one platoon on the support line. In this case each platoon furnishes the outguards covering its own front. The company may be deployed with two platoons on the firing line only and one platoon on the support line; in this case the outguards would be furnished by the support platoon. The company may be deployed with one platoon on the outpost line; one on the firing line and one on the support line. Again it may be deployed with the platoons side by side each platoon covering all three of the lines. In this case each platoon furnished the outguards covering its own front.”

(Note.—The Director will draw these four formations out on the ground and explain them to the class.)

The Director: “Considering the four methods of deployment which one would you employ in the organization of this area, Captain James?”

Captain James: “I would favor the first method where we have two platoons covering the outpost line and firing line and one platoon on the support line. Each platoon to furnish the outguards covering its own front.”

The Director: “What factors lead you to favor this deployment?”

Captain James: “By deploying in this manner we have two complete combat groups each responsible for its own outguards and its firing line. We have a third combat group on the support line located in the interval between the two forward groups so that it is readily available for counter-attack in case the enemy should penetrate the line on our front. Unity of command is preserved and there will be little intermingling of men of different units. Each platoon commander has a definite problem to solve. I think it is by far the best method.”

The Director: “Do you see any objections to the second method of deployment, Lieutenant Baker?”

Lieutenant Baker: “I should say that it is about the same as the first method. The thing that I do not like about it is the proposition of taking the outguards from the support platoon. I like the idea of having each combat group being responsible for its whole front. In addition to dividing responsibility for the defense of the area occupied it weakens the support platoon and makes it just that much less effective for counter-attack work.”

The Director: “What objections have you to the third method—the platoons in echelon one behind the other?”

Lieutenant Baker: “When the outguards fall back on the firing line you have the proposition of an intermingling of men of the two platoons. That will cause endless confusion and destroy the unity of command.”

The Director: “Any objections to the fourth method?”

Lieutenant Baker: “I can conceive of circumstances where this method might be employed to advantage. For example: In woods or in rough, difficult terrain. I do not think it would be employed in an area such as we now have under consideration.”

The Director: “We seem to be pretty well agreed that the first method should be employed. Now what considerations will affect your decision as to the area to be included in each of the two combat groups, Captain Hall?”

Captain Hall: “The battalion commander has assigned the elements of the machine gun company to certain positions to cover the front. I would build my combat groups around this distribution and take advantage of the fire that they are able to produce.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Barry, where would you locate the Company C. P.?”

Lieutenant Barry: “The C. P. should be in such a position that it can be easily reached and found by the runners. It should be so arranged that the enemy will not be able to observe the runners entering and leaving. I would say that it should be located in the area lying between the combat groups and the support platoon.”

Explanation

The Director: “The Major indicated the firing line and support line of the battalion center of resistance and designated the area for Company A to organize and hold. We have decided to organize it with two platoons on the firing line, each furnishing its own outguards and each forming a combat group; and one platoon on the support line. The 1st battalion advanced posts are holding the enemy back and there is every reason to expect that they will be able to continue to do so for sometime yet.

“The location of the machine guns, the 37 mm. guns and the light mortars in the area are known.

“It will be necessary for Captain E to assign the platoons, two to the firing line and one to the support line, and give necessary instructions regarding the work to be undertaken. These instructions will not go into any more detail than is absolutely necessary. In any event they must not be such as will take the initiative away from the platoon commanders. The platoons are given their missions. It is then up to the platoon commander to execute them. This initial order is intended merely to get the work started. It must give the platoon commanders sufficient detail for them to go about their reconnaissance and plan for the organization of their combat groups and the defensive preparation of the ground they are to occupy. The defensive position as it appears finally is not the result of any one order. It is a gradual growth planned and executed from day to day. The first elements may be only a line of individual ‘fox holes’ dug by the men. These are connected up and finally form a short section of trench here and there. As the position is studied more in detail it will become apparent where other defensive utilities should be constructed in order to add to the strength of the position. All that Captain A should include in his order at this time is sufficient detail to get the work started.”

Procedure

The Director: “We have sized up the situation and arrived at a decision. It is now necessary to put that decision into an order. We assume that the platoons have arrived at the rendezvous and the platoon commanders have reported to you here for orders.

“Now I want each member of the class to write out the order that he would give at this time. You may omit the first paragraph;—information of the enemy and our own troops. It would be much the same as that contained in the Major’s order. We will assume that you have already given that to the platoon commanders. Start your order with paragraph 2.”

When all the members of the class have completed their work the sheets will be collected and again distributed, making sure that no officer gets his own paper back again.

The Director will call upon one or more members of the class to read the order he has in his possession and it will then be discussed.

When all of this discussion is finished the Director will distribute the mimeographed sheets containing a copy of the Captain’s order. Each member of the class will receive his solution back again and compare it with the solution submitted by the Director.

The Order

2. This company will organize and hold the front from —— to ——.

3. (a) Lieutenant M, with the 1st platoon, will organize and hold the right half of the company area from —— to ——.

(b) Lieutenant O, with the 2nd platoon, will organize and hold the left half of the company area from —— to ——.

(c) Lieutenant P, with the 3rd platoon will constitute the local support and will be posted on the support line in the vicinity of ——.

(x) Combat groups will furnish the out guards for their respective fronts.

4. Battalion Aid station at ——. Other administrative arrangements later.

5. Company C. P. at ——.

Defensive Position Card No. 1

Director’s Key

1. Assemble class at (x). Distribute sheets containing problem, read and explain. Call on one or more members of class to state their understanding of tactical situation.

2. Passive defense. Explain progress of action and necessity for a halt. Prepare to ward off enemy attacks.

3. Factors in selection of position, communication and observation. Reasons for distribution in depth. Defensive areas: combat groups; strong points; centers of resistance; subsectors and sectors. Definition of each.

4. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 1. Read and explain. Get company up. Message to platoon commanders. Rendezvous for company.

5. Reconnaissance. Size up situation. Methods of distribution of company. First, second, third, fourth, advantages and disadvantages of each.

6. Decision to use first method. Explain what must be included in order. Avoid details. Give platoon commanders their job and let them go to it.

7. Each member of class write out order. Collect and distribute. Hand out mimeograph sheets containing order. Compare work with solution.

Procedure

The class is now conducted to the area to be occupied by the 1st platoon and which is to be organized into a combat group.

The Problem

Situation No. 2:

You, Lieutenant M, are commanding the 1st platoon which has been designated to form the combat group in the right half of the company area.

The area assigned to your platoon is bounded by —— (describe area boundaries). Your front extends from —— to —— (indicate front). The firing line extends along (indicate).

You have arrived at this point. You have with you two of your platoon runners. The platoon is back at the company rendezvous.

Required:

How do you carry out your mission?

Procedure

The Director will distribute the sheets containing Situation No. 2. He will read it aloud and make such explanations as may be necessary. He will point out to the members of the class the boundaries of the area assigned to the platoon; the front which the platoon is ordered to cover; and the location of the firing line. He will also indicate the position of each element of Company D in the platoon area and the location of the 37 mm. gun and light mortar.

(Note.—If practicable, the location of machine guns, the 37 mm. gun and light mortar should be indicated by flags of a distinctive color.)

By questioning members of the class the Director will make sure that every member understands the situation. They will then be able to proceed with the solution of the problem on a uniform basis.

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, what would you do?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would send one of my runners back with a message to the platoon sergeant to bring the platoon up.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, do you agree with what Lieutenant Hunt has just said?”

Lieutenant Williams: “No, sir. I would not want the platoon to come up here until I have sized up the situation; decided upon my dispositions; and made arrangements for them to get to work on the position we are to occupy. That will take me some little ‘time.’”

The Director: “I think you are right. There is no need of exposing any more men to the enemy’s fire than is absolutely necessary. As soon as the enemy realizes that our attack has stopped and we are taking up a defensive position he will do everything in his power to interfere with our plans. If he observes a lot of men all along the line digging in he will open up with everything he has available.”

Lieutenant Williams: “That is the point I had in mind. It seems to me that, as a matter of fact, we will not be able to accomplish very much on the preparation of the position until it begins to get dusk.”

The Director: “You are right. If we can get the layout of the position completed during the remaining full daylight hours; decide how we are to organize the combat group and get the trenches and other utilities staked out I think we will have accomplished all that could be reasonably expected. Do you see the point, Lieutenant Hunt?”

(Note.—It is assumed that it will be dusk at 6 o’clock.)

Lieutenant Hunt: “Yes, sir.”

The Director: “Now, taking into consideration what we have said, what would you do?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would send a runner back to the platoon sergeant to have the men take cover and make themselves comfortable. I would want them to have as much rest as possible for they are going to have a night of hard work. I would have the runner tell the platoon sergeant to turn the platoon over to Sergeant R (platoon guide) and for himself, the two section leaders and the other platoon guides to report to me here.”

The Director: “I think that is all right. What are you going to do while you are waiting for the men to report to you?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I will make a personal reconnaissance of the area, size up the situation and decide upon how I am going to dispose my troops.”

(Note.—The disposition of troops will, of course, depend upon the lay of the ground and the location of the machine guns in the sector. The following procedure is based upon certain dispositions and is designed to bring out the points that come up for consideration in the organization of a combat group of this kind. The Director will have previously worked out his solution to the problem and during the course of the discussion will bring out the tactical points that are necessary for the training and instruction of the members of the class.)

The Director: “Captain Hastings, what are the component parts of a combat group?”

Captain Hastings: “First there is the local security line—the outpost. Behind this is the firing line—the fighting line of the group. Outguards are thrown out to back up their sentinels.”

The Director: “How may the deployment of the platoon be made?”

Captain Hastings: “It may be made with the sections abreast, each section furnishing the outpost covering its own front. It may be made with one section behind the other, the leading section occupying the firing line.”

The Director: “Which form of deployment do you favor?”

Captain Hastings: “I favor the first. The sections deployed abreast and each section providing for its own local security. The advantages of this is that the section leader is responsible for the whole front assigned to him and there is unity of command. If the outpost line falls back to the firing line it falls back on the men of its own section. In the second method, if the outpost section falls back it does so on the men of the other section of the platoon and there is bound to be more or less intermingling of units.”

The Director: “I think you are right. Let us decide that we are to make the deployment with the sections side by side, each section to furnish its own local security—that is, its own outguards. This means that the front assigned to the platoon may now be divided into two parts and a section assigned to each. Lieutenant Wallace, what is the governing factor in the ground assigned to each of the sections?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “Each section must be able to cover the ground to its front and must be so arranged as to mutually support each other. That is, its fire must be able to sweep the front of the adjoining groups.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, how much front can a platoon cover in this formation?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “In country such as this the platoon can cover about 400 to 500 yards of front with its fire. This does not mean that the platoon occupies such a continuous line. It will actually occupy only a small portion of it. The intervening portion will be covered by its fire. By deploying with the sections abreast of each other we can occupy the sector allotted to the platoon without any difficulty.”

The Director: “What is the extent of the area that a section may organize for close defense, Captain Harvey?”

Captain Harvey: “Ordinarily it should not be more than 75 yards by 75 yards. This 75-yard front actually occupied by the section makes 150 yards for the platoon. The intervening ground of say 150 to 200 yards will be covered by fire.”

Captain Hodges: “I do not see how you arrive at the short distance of 150 to 200 yards interval between sections.”

Captain Harvey: “(Indicating by a diagram on the ground.) Say the right section is 75 yards from the right boundary of the area; then the section covers 75 yards of trenches; the interval to the section on the left is say 150 yards; the left section occupies 75 yards of front and is 75 yards from the left boundary. All of this, as you will see makes a front of about 450 yards covered by the platoon. The interval between sections might well be expanded to 200 yards which would make the platoon cover a front of 500 yards without serious difficulty. This would make 1,000 yards for the company and 2,000 yards for the battalion with two companies on the firing line. I would say this is the maximum front. It would be better to reduce the interval a little and bring the total down to about 800 yards.”

Captain Hodges: “I see the proposition now. I do not think we would have any trouble covering the front allotted to our platoon.”

Procedure

The Director: “The next question is the allotment of sections in the platoon area. In this connection you will have to consider the lay of the ground, and select the location for the section groups, so that the ground to the front may best be defended and so that the groups are able to mutually support each other.

“I want the members of the class to go over the ground allotted to the platoon and each of you select the location of each section group. Keep in mind the factors I have just spoken of—defense of the foreground, field of fire, and mutual support of adjacent groups; also consider the location of the machine guns that have already been made by the battalion commander. We will all assemble here in 20 minutes.”

The members of the class will now go over the ground allotted to the platoon and each man will work out his disposition independently.

At the end of the time the class will assemble at the designated point and the discussion resumed.

Solution

The Director: “You have now been over the area allotted to the platoon. Captain James, how would you dispose of the two sections of the platoon?”

Captain James: “I find that the front naturally divides itself into two parts. A section in the right portion of the area will be able to cover the foreground with its fire. The right element will be able to cover the front of the combat group to the right and the left element will be able to sweep the front of the section on the left. The same applies to the left section. We can locate our trenches in each area so that we not only do not interfere with the fire of the machine guns but will be able to cover areas that form dead space for them. I do not think there will be any difficulty in preparing the position for defense.”

The Director: “Has any member of the class any other plan to offer?”

(Note.—The members of the class should be urged to present their views on the subject. The more discussion that can be created the better it is for all concerned.)

The Director: “I agree with Captain James. We can organize the area allotted to the platoon in fine shape. And this is ordinarily the case with all these tactical problems. If we go about their solution in a systematic manner we can usually arrive at a reasonable and suitable solution to them.

“There is another point that must be decided at this time. That is the location of the platoon command post. Where would you locate it, Lieutenant Baker?”

Lieutenant Baker: “I would locate it at —— (indicate place).”

The Director: “What factors did you take into consideration in selecting that location?”

Lieutenant Baker: “The facilities for observation and communication with all parts of the combat group.”

The Director: “Has any member of the class selected another location for the command post?”

(Note.—If a member suggests another location it should be discussed and put to the test of facility for observation and communication. The place that provides these two elements the best should be selected.)

The Director: “Now, there are some other arrangements that will have to be made before the men can actually go to work on the position. In the first place, they must have the proper tools to work with. Of course, some work may be accomplished with the individual intrenching tools that the squads carry, but they will need a number of regular digging tools in this case. Wire will have to be supplied for the construction of the obstacles in front of the position. It is presumed that the battalion staff will attend to all of these things, but what the platoon commander is interested in is when and where will they be supplied. I think I would send my platoon sergeant to the company commander to let him know just what is required and to secure definite information as to when and where tools and wire will be available. It is of little use to get a lot of men up to the platoon area unless they have something to work with. Besides the area is more or less crowded at this time with men of the support elements of the 2nd battalion. These are some of the things that the platoon commander must think about at this time.

“Let us now assume that the platoon sergeant and the other men that you sent for have joined you here. Let us see what orders and instructions you would give them. Captain Hall, what would you include in the first paragraph of the order?”

Captain Hall: “All the information of the enemy and our own troops. I would explain why it is necessary for our troops to go on the defensive for a time; the situation with respect to the 2nd battalion, which is holding on a short distance to the front; the location of the troops on our right and left and the role of the 3rd platoon of our company as support; the location of the elements of Company D in our area, and the location of the machine guns in the adjoining area; the location of the elements of our company. I would indicate the location of the firing line where it crosses our area. I think that is all that is necessary to be included under information of the enemy and our supporting troops.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Barry, what would you include in the second paragraph of your order?”

Lieutenant Barry: “My plan. This platoon will organize and hold the front from —— to ——.”

The Director: “And what would you include in paragraph 3 of the order?”

Lieutenant Barry: “The disposition of my troops:

“The 1st section will organize and hold the front from —— (indicate) to —— (indicate), connect up and cooperate with the —— Infantry on the right.

“The 2nd section will organize and hold the front from —— (indicate) to —— (indicate), connect up and cooperate with the 2nd platoon on the left.

“Each section will furnish its own outguards along the general line —— (indicate).

“I think that is all that is necessary at this time. I have not gone into details as to just how each section leader is to solve his problem. I will be along the line while they are working it out. If they start anything that I do not approve of, I will have an opportunity to tell them so at the time. The company commander has not hampered me with orders and I will not do so with respect to my section leaders.”

The Director: “You are right about that. Give every man a chance to work out his own salvation. Do not destroy his initiative. Is there anything to be included in paragraph 4, Lieutenant Hunt?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “Yes, sir. I would give the information about the intrenching tools and wire being supplied later. This is done to show my non-commissioned officers that we have not overlooked the subject.

“Information concerning issue of intrenching tools and wire will be given later.

“The battalion aid station is at ——.”

The Director: “And what would be included in the last paragraph, Captain Hastings?”

Captain Hastings: “The location of the company and platoon command posts.

“Company C. P. at ——.

“Platoon C. P. at ——.”

Explanation

The Director: “I think that would cover all that is necessary at this time. Let us visualize what is now going to happen. The section leaders with their section guides would go out to the area that has been assigned to them. They would locate the machine gun positions that were designated by the battalion commander and then dope out the disposition that they are to make of the three squads of their respective sections.

“The platoon commander is first concerned with the procurement of the intrenching tools for digging in his groups and the wire for constructing an obstacle along the front. As soon as he gets the platoon sergeant off with a message to the company commander about these things he will go to the front and join the section leaders. He will find out from them what dispositions they are planning on and give them such detailed instructions as may be necessary to carry out his own ideas of how the position should be organized. He will have everything in readiness to bring the men forward as soon as it is advisable to do so.”

Defense Position Card No. 2

Director’s Key

1. Distribute sheets containing situation No. 2. Read and explain. Point out boundaries of area assigned to the platoon and indicate positions assigned to machine gun and special weapons. Mark with flags if practicable.

2. Question as to whether platoon should be brought up now; nothing for men to do yet; no necessity for exposing them. Have platoon sergeant, section leaders, and platoon and section guides report at once. Leave platoon in charge of one section guide.

3. Size up situation. Determine upon dispositions, component parts of combat group, methods of deploying a platoon. Decide to deploy sections side by side. Outguards.

4. Factors that govern selection of position; field of fire to front; mutual support with adjoining units. Front that platoon may cover. Depth of section area.

5. Have class go over ground and decide on dispositions. Allotment of sections to platoon area. Location of C. P. observation and communication.

6. Question of intrenching tools and wire for obstacles. Platoon sergeant to company commander about tools and wire.

7. The order. Information of enemy and own troops. Plan: Platoon to organize and hold front from —— to ——. Orders for each section. Supply outguards. Make orders short. Little detail. Let every man work out his own salvation.

8. Explanation: Visualize what is happening. Section leaders and guides go to section area; dope out situation and decide on disposition. Platoon commander sends platoon sergeant to see about tools and wire, then joins section leaders on the line.

Procedure

The class will be conducted to the area assigned to the 2nd section of the platoon.

The Problem

Situation No. 3:

You, Sergeant K, commanding the 2nd section, have been ordered to organize and hold the front from —— (indicate) to —— (indicate).

The section is to connect up and cooperate with the 2nd platoon on the left.

Your section is to furnish its own outguards along the general line —— (indicate).

You have arrived at this point.

You have with you your section guides.

Required:

How do you carry out your mission?

Explanation

The Director: “While it is not expected that any member of the class will ever be called upon to command a section of Infantry, it is nevertheless important for you to know what happens when you issue an order which requires the action of a section leader.

“Let us visualize this situation. Let us consider ourselves as being Sergeant K. He is the fellow that all the orders finally get down to and the one that has to do the real job out here on the line. You hear the claims of certain staff corps, from time to time, about the necessity for having high-class men for the key positions in their enlisted personnel. Can you show me in any branch of the Army where a high-class man is required any more than he is right here? Here is a doughboy sergeant face to face with a problem, the proper solution of which means more to the success of the operations than any so-called “highly technical” position in the back areas. Upon what he does and how he does it may depend the success or failure of this whole military operation. The lives of the men under him are absolutely in his hands. If he blunders he may lose all of them.

“With these few remarks let us proceed with the problem.”

Procedure

The Director will read the situation aloud, and make such explanations as may be necessary. He will call on one or more members of the class to state his understanding of the situation.

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, how would you go about your task?”

Lieutenant Williams: “In the first place, I would look over the front and see what it affords in the way of a field of fire. I would next locate the section groups on the right and left and see where their fire could help to protect my front and how fire from my position could help to protect their fronts. I would see how the bands of fire from the machine guns in the area lay with relation to my front.”

(Note.—The Director will point out the location of the adjacent section groups on the right and left and the position of the machine guns. He will also indicate the direction of the bands of fire of the machine guns. All of this should be indicated by flags of distinctive color if it is possible to do so.)

The Director: “You have done all of the things you mention and the whole layout is clear to you. What is your next step?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I would search out the vacant spaces—the uncovered ground of the machine guns and so arrange my dispositions to cover them. I would first determine where my automatic rifles may be employed to the best advantage. I will want them for flanking fire to cover the adjacent combat groups and will expect the support of their automatic rifles to help cover my own front. I will want them to cover exposed places to the front that the enemy will have to pass over in making his attack. I will want them to cover certain lines along my wire entanglements. All of these things will have to be taken into consideration in locating them. I will next consider my other special weapons, the rifle grenade and the hand grenade. They are both valuable adjuncts to the defense, especially the rifle grenade. They will both serve well to cover dead spaces that are difficult to reach with machine gun and rifle fire. Such features as ravines, sunken roads and places where enemy troops may seek cover can be made untenable by the rifle grenade up to about 200 yards.”

The Director: “All right, let us assume that all of these things have been taken into consideration. How may the troops be disposed to best meet them, Lieutenant Wallace?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “We have three squads in the section. We are required to furnish our own outguards in addition to furnishing the garrison for the firing line. I should say that one squad employed on the outpost line would be sufficient. That would leave two squads for the firing line.”

The Director: “Now, there are two plans by which the outguards may be furnished. One is to have each squad cover its own front with an outguard and the other is to have a complete squad detailed as outguard for the section. Which of these plans do you prefer to use in this instance, Lieutenant Ralston?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I think it would be better to employ one squad as the outguards for the section rather than have each squad do it.”

The Director: “What factors lead you to such a decision?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “If we have each squad furnish an outguard for its own front it would take half of the squad for that purpose. The least that could be sent out would be a cossack post of four men—a leader and three reliefs for a single sentinel post. I would not want to send our automatic riflemen on that duty and interfere with our arrangements for flanking fire. We would not desire to send our rifle grenadier under ordinary circumstances. This would leave only two rifles in the squad and one of these is the squad leader. If we send one squad out to furnish the outguards it can furnish two cossack posts, which are sufficient to cover our front, and it will leave the other two squads intact to occupy the firing line with all their weapons. If the enemy attacks and the outguards are driven in they will fall back on the flanks so as not to mask the fire of the squads on the firing line. This will enable them to drift toward an assembly point or trench in rear of the firing line proper where they will be available to the section commander as a small local support to be thrown in any of the squad firing positions where casualties have been relatively heavy or to put them in where they are most needed to repel the attack.”

The Director: “Of course it is always problematical as to how many men of the outguards will be able to get back; your points are well taken and convincing. I agree with you that the outguards may best be furnished by a complete squad, and this leaves the other units intact for the firing line proper. This now brings us down to the location of two small groups of a squad each. Captain Hodges, what factors will you consider in locating these two groups?”

Captain Hodges: “I would want one near each flank of the area where they can help cover the front of the adjacent groups, and I would want also to cover the front of the position. In order to do this I would break each squad into two groups of four men each. In the right group I would have the automatic rifleman and three riflemen of the 1st squad. The automatic rifleman would have a fire position from which he can cover the front of the adjacent section on the right, and if the one position does not serve the purpose I will have another fire position for him from which he can fire to the front. In the next group of four men I would have the rifle grenadier and three riflemen. They will be charged with covering the front. The group that the squad leader will remain with will depend upon circumstances. He would not be definitely assigned, but would go where his presence is most required. I would have a group of four men of the 2nd squad next to the left with the rifle grenade in it, and near the left of my line I would have another group similar to the one on the right with the automatic rifleman in it. The 3rd squad will furnish the outpost—two cossack posts.”

The Director: “I think you have made a very good distribution of troops. I do not think you can say off hand that you would have the rifle grenadier always in the interior groups. His position must depend upon the prospective targets that he may have. Now, the distribution brings us down to the proposition of the preparation of four short sections of trench sufficient to shelter four men each. This makes it a comparatively simple proposition. You see, when you divide all of this work up in the way we have how it gradually clears up and becomes perfectly simple.

“Let us now locate on the ground the four short sections of trench that will have to be prepared.”

Procedure

The class will now be conducted to the right of the section area and then along the front, and the exact location of the four short trenches will be determined upon. Each will then be traced on the ground so that the members of the class may see just the sector front that it may cover. If additional pits are required for the automatic riflemen they will also be indicated on the ground. One or more members of the class may be required to lie down on the ground and verify the field of fire from each trench.

The Director: “Captain James, we have made a mark on the ground for each of these short trench lengths; we call that a trace; what do you mean by that?”

Captain James: “That the line we have made is the upper edge of the interior slope of the parapet of the trench. It is the firing line of the trench.”

The Director: “Now we have located these trenches; you have noted the distance apart they are. Would we try to connect them up with a continuous trench under the circumstances, Lieutenant Baker?”

Lieutenant Baker: “No, sir. I think not. If any continuous trench is to be constructed it seems to me that it should be dug a few feet to the rear and parallel to our line of short trenches. Our short trenches can then be connected up with it by communication trenches running obliquely, to give cover from fire. I think this parallel trench should be traced now so that work can be commenced on it tonight after the fire trenches are completed. It should be a zigzag trench. The 3rd squad can get some work done on it before they have to go on outpost.”

The Director: “I think we have covered everything that is necessary preliminary to issuing the order of the section commander except the location of the command post. Where would you locate it, Captain Hall?”

Captain Hall: “I would locate it here (indicates). The questions of observation and communication are the determining factors in its selection.”

The Director: “Now I want each member of the class to write out this order that Sergeant K would issue to his section guides. Make it simple and to the point.”

The members of class will write out the order on their pads and when all have completed it the sheets are passed to the officer on the left for criticism.

The Director will read aloud the order he has prepared and the members of the class compare their work with it.

The Order

“There is no further information of the enemy. You know the location of the machine guns in this area; the location of the 37 mm. gun and light mortar of the Howitzer company and the location of adjoining groups.

“Our section will organize and hold this area.

“The 1st squad will prepare the two fire trenches we have traced in the right of the area. Sergeant F, you will superintend the task.

“The 2nd squad will prepare the two fire trenches we have traced in the left of the area. Sergeant G, you will superintend the task.

“The 3rd squad will furnish the outguards along the line ——. I will give Corporal B detailed instructions later.

“When the fire trenches have been completed work will be started on the parallel that we have traced.

“Work will begin as soon as we get the section up and pushed to completion as rapidly as possible tonight.

“Section C. P. at ——.”

Explanation

The Director: “The section leader will return to the company and get the section ready to come to the front. He will go himself rather than send one of the guides. There may be some new orders or instructions from the company or platoon commander, and he will want to get them first hand. He will want to be sure that the section is supplied with the intrenching tools that are necessary for the rapid prosecution of the mark.

“The section guides will each mark the cutting lines for the section of trench that he is responsible for and those of the communication parallel. They will have everything in readiness to start work as soon as the men get up to the position.

“We have gone into considerable detail in the solution of the problem, but I am sure every member of the class now realizes the necessity for it and how simple the final solution is. When we started out with the problem I am sure you all felt like we were entering upon a hopeless task but when you finally get down to the last analysis of it and find that the pressing problem is the digging of four short sections of trench capable of sheltering four men each and getting started on the communication parallel you realize that it is not such a big proposition after all.

“All of this shows the necessity for the systematic training of officers and men in these things. I am sure you can see what would happen to an untrained outfit blundering into a proposition of this kind. You can readily imagine a company rushing madly to the front with no one to tell the men where to go or what to do. These tactical situations that confront troops in time of war require time and forethought for their solution. Unless the proposition is gone about in a systematic and orderly manner the task is hopeless. I feel sure that if any of you were confronted with the task of organizing a defensive position in the face of the enemy you are better equipped for the solution of the task for having had this Terrain Exercise.”

Defensive Position Card No. 3

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to area assigned to the 2nd Section.

2. Explain purpose of giving this small problem to class. Distribute Situation No. 3, read and explain.

3. Point out location of all defensive elements that have a bearing on the area allotted to the 2nd Section. Disposition of troops—factors affecting outpost line, firing line.

4. Location of groups, automatic rifle, rifle grenadier.

5. Locate trenches on the ground and trace them. Locate parallel communication trench.

6. Issue order. Collect and redistribute. Present order for discussion.

7. Explain necessity for training in tactics.

Terrain Exercise No. 4.
A Machine Gun Company in Attack[5]

The Problem

General Situation:

The (a) forms the boundary between hostile states. The Blue Corps has crossed the boundary. Its advance has been stopped by a Red force of two divisions at (b).

Special Situation, Blue:

In a general attack by the Blue Corps, the —— Division is attacking with (c) regiments abreast in the sector bounded on the right (d) by (e) and on the left (d) by (e). The order of the regiments from right to left is (f). Each regiment has one battalion in the assault, one in regimental reserve, and one in brigade or division reserve (g). The —— Battalion —— Infantry, is the assaulting battalion of the —— Infantry (h). The right (d) boundary of the battalion is (e). Its left (d) boundary is (e).

The battalion is deployed with Company (i) on the right and Company (k) on the left, as assault companies, and Company (l) as the reserve company. The machine gun company (m) and one platoon of the howitzer company are operating with the battalion.

Special Situation No. 1:

The division began a general advance at (n) today. At (o), when the scouts reached (p) they were stopped by fire from the vicinity of (q).

At (r), Major X at (s), received a message from the right (left) assault company that it was held up by fire from (t). The message stated that the company would assault at (u) by building up a firing line at (v) and having a platoon attack in the direction of (w), and requested the assistance of the machine guns and auxiliary weapons. At the same time Major X received a message from the left (right) assault company that it had encountered slight resistance from (x), but was continuing to advance.

At the time Major X received the messages the machine gun company was located as follows: The 1st and 2nd Platoons were in rear of the right and left assault companies, respectively, at (y), with guns mounted on carts. The captain with his headquarters’ detail was with Major X.

Explanation of Symbols

(a) In designating the boundary line, some natural topographical or geographical feature should be selected, such as a river, creek, road, state boundary, etc. In this problem the boundary may be some miles from the point where the problem starts and in the opposite direction from the direction of attack.

(b) A general defensive position in rear of the ground selected for the problem.

(c) Two, three or four regiments would be placed in the first line depending on the frontage assigned to the division and other conditions.

(d) Compass direction—north, south, east, or west.

(e) Describe boundaries by roads, creeks, towns, points, etc. Distance between boundaries should be such as to give appropriate frontage to the division—about 500 yards for each battalion employed as an assaulting battalion.

(f) Give order by enumerating regiments as—1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Infantry.

(g) The number of battalions in assault and in reserve may vary in different regiments, depending upon the frontage assigned to the regiment and the nature of its task.

(h) If the regiment has more than one battalion in the first line, the text should read: “Is the right (left) assault battalion of —— Infantry.”

(i), (k), (l), (m) Use letters appropriate to the companies of the designated battalion.

(n), (o) Indicate the hour.

(p) Select position suitable for firing line with position in rear suitable for direct overhead fire of machine guns.

(q) Select suitable position for small force on the defensive.

(r) Indicate the hour a few minutes later than (o).

(s) Select a position between the assault and reserve companies with good visibility.

(t) Defensive position for small force of Reds.

(u) Indicate an hour that will give the rifle and machine gun companies time to get into position for the attack.

(v) Usually on or in advance of the line of scouts.

(w) A direction that will flank or envelop the local resistance.

(x) One of the positions from which scouts originally received fire.

(y) Platoons should be in rear of positions you plan to have them occupy and on natural lines of advance.

Required:

The action taken by Major X and the orders actually issued by him.

(Note.—The Machine Gun Company is organized and equipped in accordance with Table of Organization 29-W. See Appendix I.)

Procedure

The members of the class are assembled at s, the point where Major X receives the messages from his assault companies.

The Director: “Before taking up the problem for solution, I wish to make a few remarks upon the employment of a machine gun company with an assault battalion.”

Explanation

The Director: “The following, in general terms, are the principal tasks of the machine guns on the offensive:

“(1) To cover the deployment of the infantry and its advance to the first firing position.

“(2) To support the attack of the infantry.

“(3) To support the infantry in continuing the attack or taking up the pursuit after the enemy’s main position has been captured.

“(4) To assist in the consolidation of the position whenever the limit of the advance is reached or the infantry is brought to a standstill.

“During the combat the function of the machine guns is to assist constantly the advance of the infantry by fire power. The use of machine guns only at decisive points in the fight is not sufficient. They must be so used as to exert a continuous influence from the beginning to the end of the fight. They can act by fire alone and cannot be used as assault troops.

“Every assaulting infantry battalion habitually retains and employs its machine gun company. The machine gun company almost invariably acts under the direct orders of the battalion commander. Only in very exceptional cases will the company act under the orders of the regimental machine gun officer after H hour, although he frequently will prescribe tasks for it during the barrage prior to H hour.

“The following are suitable tasks for a machine gun company of an assault battalion:

“(1) To support the assault companies.

“(2) To protect the flank of the attack.

“(3) To occupy an interval in the line.

“(4) To assist in consolidating the captured ground.

“(5) To assist in resuming the attack.

“Orders.—The orders of Major X for the use of the machine guns should be clear and concise and should assign definite tasks to them. The orders, prior to attack, should assign the machine guns a definite place in the formation and should give them the mission of supporting the infantry by fire. The control of the machine guns should be exercised, as far as possible, through the commanding officer of the machine gun company. Platoons should be assigned to support rifle companies, but should not be placed under the command of rifle company commanders without there are exceptional reasons for so ordering.

“Formation.—Generally the formation of a machine gun company supporting an infantry battalion will be with one platoon on either flank supporting the two assaulting companies. As to whether or not the platoons should be placed in rear of the assault companies or in rear of the reserve company depends upon conditions. If the conditions indicate the probable early use of machine guns and the ground is favorable for their use, they should be placed in rear of the assault companies. On the other hand, if their use appears improbable, or the ground is unfavorable for overhead fire, they should be placed in rear of the reserve company, where they can use their carts as long as possible. The formation within the platoon conforms to the infantry with which it is advancing. The usual formations will be: when dismounted, line of squad columns or line of skirmishers; when mounted, column of squads. The purpose of the formation taken should be to make it difficult for the enemy to distinguish the machine guns from the infantry.

“Communication.—Where conditions permit, the commanding officer of the machine gun company will be with the battalion commander. However, the captain must not let this consideration interfere with the efficient command of his company. Where the captain does not remain with the major he will maintain contact with him by means of two runners from the machine gun company.

“Are there any questions?”

Procedure

The Director will endeavor to answer any questions that may be asked by members of the class.

After all questions have been cleared up the Director will hand a copy of the problem to each member of the class. A few minutes will be allowed to read over the problem.

The Director: “Please give me your attention while we go over the problem.”

The Director reads the problem aloud, pointing out the features of the landscape that are referred to in the problem.

The Director then calls upon one or more members of the class to explain the problem. He clears up any point that does not appear plain to all and satisfies himself that all members of the class understand the situation and what is required of them.

Solution

The Director: “Captain Smith, we shall assume that you are commanding the battalion and that Captain M, the commanding officer of the machine gun company, is with you. What would you do when you received the messages from your assault companies?”

Captain Smith: “I would send for all of the captains to report to me at once, so that I could issue my orders.”

The Director: “The captains of the two assault companies are engaged with the enemy, and it is most essential that they remain in immediate command of their companies. The captain of the reserve company is at some distance from Major X. While it is extremely desirable to issue one complete verbal order to the battalion so that any misunderstanding can be cleared up, it is not practicable to issue such an order in this case. Captain Scott, what would you do?”

Captain Scott: “I would take a look at the positions of the right assault company, the machine gun company, and the terrain, to determine whether it would be possible to support the assaulting company by overhead machine gun fire. I see that there is an excellent position for the machine guns and howitzer platoon. The commanding officers of these organizations are with me, so I at once give them the following verbal orders:

“Company —— has encountered heavy fire from (t). It will attack at (u) by building up a firing line at (v), and having a platoon attack in the direction of (w). A red rocket from this platoon will indicate the beginning of the attack.

“The Stokes mortar will lay down a barrage in front of the platoon, advancing in the direction of (w). The one-pounder will be in readiness to engage any hostile machine guns that open fire.

“The machine guns will open fire from this hill at (u), covering the enemy’s position at (t).

“Battalion ammunition point 500 yards east of this point in edge of woods.

“I shall remain here.”

The Director: “That is an excellent order. It shows that you understand that Major X should first attempt to give assistance by the use of his machine guns and auxiliary weapons and not by the use of his reserve. The reserve company should not be employed as long as the assaulting companies can overcome the resistance with the assistance of the machine guns and auxiliary weapons. Fire power should be made to take the place of man-power to the greatest extent that is practicable. You have also given an excellent example of the proper coordination of the machine guns and Stokes mortar. The ground in the direction of (w) is such that the machine guns could not effectively support the platoon advancing in that direction. The Stokes mortar, however, can search this ground and provide covering fire for the platoon. Your ordering a red rocket to be fired by the platoon advancing in the direction of (w) shows that you understand the necessity for synchronizing the launching of the attack and the opening of fire by the machine guns and auxiliary weapons. However, the steps that you have taken are not adequate to secure this. You have failed to notify the commanding officer of the right assault company of the time that the machine guns will open fire and have not directed him to have his platoon fire a red rocket at the beginning of its attack.

“Captain Howe, tell us how you would notify the commanding officer of the assault companies of your plans.”

Captain Howe: “I would send a written message by a runner as follows:

“Begin your attack at (u). The machine guns will open fire from (s) at (u). The Stokes mortar will open fire in the direction of (w) at (u) and will lift their fire 100 yards in two minutes for six minutes. The one-pounders will fire on hostile machine guns.

“Your platoon, advancing in the direction of (w), will fire a red rocket as a signal that it is leaving its cover and beginning the attack.

“Battalion ammunition point in edge of woods 500 yards east of (s).

“I shall remain here.”

Machine Gun Co. Card No. 1

Director’s Key

1. Make copies of the problems and the situation, one for each member of the class.

2. Conduct the class to the point where the battalion commander receives the messages from his assault companies.

3. Make a short talk on the employment of machine guns on the offensive: (a) tasks of machine guns in general on the offensive. (b) Tasks of a machine gun company of an assault battalion. (c) Orders of the battalion commander to the machine gun company. (d) Formation of the machine gun company. (e) Communications.

4. Distribute the sheets bearing problem and situation No. 1.

5. Read problem and question members of the class on the tactical situation.

6. Take up the solution of the problem: Action of Major X; Orders actually issued by Major X.

7. Explanation by the director of the importance of using fire power, and of the necessity for coordination between the rifle companies and the machine guns.

8. May have members of the class write out orders of the battalion commander.

Explanation

The Director: “In the situation just completed we have considered the employment of machine guns from the point of view of the commander who has the responsibility for the coordination of the rifle companies and the machine gun company and for the application of fire power to save man-power wherever it is practicable. In the next situation we shall take up the methods of applying this fire power to support the rifle companies. These are technical questions entirely within the province of the machine gun officer. In the formation the battalion commander designates the position of the machine gun company with reference to the rifle companies; the machine gun company commander determines the formation within his company. Ordinarily the company commander will determine whether the guns will go forward on carts and when it will be necessary to abandon the carts. The firing position may be designated by the battalion commander, or it may be left to the selection of the machine gun company commander. The manner of occupation of the position is decided upon by the machine gun officer. The class of fire to be delivered is a question for the decision of machine gun officers or non-commissioned officers. The situation may be such as to require the sections or platoons to employ different classes of fire. The concentration of the fire of his platoons is a function of the machine gun company commander. In the absence of orders from the battalion commander, the company commander will determine whether the fire of the company will be distributed over the front of the whole battalion or whether it will be concentrated upon a portion of the front. The method of advance from one firing position to another will be determined by the company or platoon commander. Where the company is employed as a whole the advance may be by platoon. As a rule, however, the platoons will advance by alternate sections so that a rifle company will never be without support. The duty of maintaining the ammunition supply from the battalion ammunition point forward to the guns devolves upon the machine gun captain. The machine gun company is responsible for communication forward to the assault companies and to the battalion commander.”

Machine gun company in attack—one formation—others may be used

Procedure

The Director passes out the papers containing Special Situation No. 2, reads the situation aloud and calls upon one or more members of the class to explain it.

The Problem

Situation No. 2:

This consists of copies of the orders of Major X to the commanding officers of the machine gun company and howitzer platoon as given by Captain Scott, and of the message to the commanding officer of the right assault company as given by Captain Howe.

Required:

The orders actually issued by the commanding officer of the machine gun company.

Solution

The Director: “Captain Jones, what is the first decision that Captain M must make when he receives the order of Major X?”

Captain Jones: “He must decide whether he will employ the whole company to support the right assault company or only the platoon which had been directed to support this company at the beginning of the fight. Major X has not indicated whether the whole company will be employed, so Captain M must make this decision. The left assault company may encounter more stubborn resistance, so I should employ only the right platoon.”

The Director: “Captain Brown, what do you think about that?”

Captain Brown: “I think he should employ the whole company. Concentration of the fire of the platoons on points that are holding up the battalion is one of the duties of the captain. The left assault company is continuing to move forward and does not need the support of the left platoon so it should be used to help advance the right assault company. There is an excellent firing position directly in its line of advance and it can be switched to the support of the left assault company at any time that it becomes necessary. If the only firing position available were such that the platoon could not support the advance of the left assault company, if support were needed, and the position were so situated as to cause the left platoon to deviate greatly from its line of advance, the case would be different. In that situation I think the left platoon should continue its advance in rear of the left assault company with the purpose of bringing flanking fire on the enemy a little later.”

The Director: “Captain Burt, we shall assume that Captain M decides to employ both platoons to support the right assault company. What does he do next?”

Captain Burt: “He would send the buglers to have the platoon leaders report to him in advance of their platoons and would direct the reconnaissance officer to select the firing positions for the two platoons and obtain the ranges.”

The Director: “The captain has a company headquarters to assist him in commanding the company and the use that the captain makes of this headquarters is a sure indication of the efficiency of the company. It is impossible for the captain to command the company by himself and attend to all details. Part of this headquarters detail is mounted. The buglers and reconnaissance officer have horses. By having the platoon leaders precede their platoons they can receive their orders before the platoons arrive and be ready to move into position without delay. When the buglers reach the platoons they would turn over their horses to the platoon leaders and would remain with the platoons to guide them to their firing positions. The reconnaissance sergeant would assist the reconnaissance officer by taking the ranges as soon as the positions had been selected.

“Captain Smith, where would you select the positions and what frontage would you assign to a platoon?”

Captain Smith: “I would assign positions at the crest so that the guns could use direct overhead fire. The position should be such that the muzzles of the guns would be just over the crest. In that way the gunners will have the maximum amount of protection consistent with direct fire. The distance between guns should be not less than 20 yards, and preferably more. I would assign the right half of the position to the right platoon and the left half to the left platoon. This will allow a little distance between platoons so that the guns will not make such a conspicuous target.”

The Director: “I wish to emphasize the fact that you must select a position where the guns can employ direct fire. Indirect fire is thoroughly practicable in the beginning of a prepared attack or on the resumption of an attack that has been stopped for several hours. Often it is the only kind of fire that can be employed. However, considerable time is necessary to prepare for indirect fire, and this situation does not permit of the delay necessary to prepare for indirect fire. Direct fire is also more effective and should be employed whenever possible. It seldom will be advisable for a machine gun company of an assault battalion to use indirect fire. There is a distinct advantage in having an elevated firing position as the guns are able to give support to the rifle companies until they approach more closely to the target.

“Captain Jones, what assignment of targets would you make?”

Captain Jones: “I would assign a portion of the target to each platoon. The whole target could be assigned to each platoon which would permit an entire platoon to advance to a new firing position, while the other covered the entire target. However, any advance before the resistance is overcome would probably be by section and not by platoon; so there is no advantage in giving each platoon the whole target. A gunner can fire more effectively on a narrow target where it is not necessary to traverse so much.”

The Director: “Captain Howe, would you make any provision for lifting your fire as the infantry approaches the target?”

Captain Howe: “I would leave that to the platoon commanders. The rate of advance may be different at different parts of the line so that some guns may continue firing safely after others are forced to stop. I would want every gun to fire as long as the safety of the infantry would permit.”

The Director: “Captain Burt, what provision would you make for opening fire?”

Captain Burt: “I would have the platoon leaders signal me when they were ready and open fire on my signal. The positions of the platoons are plainly visible from my position. Since it has been ordered that fire will open at a definite time I think it better to depend on one watch than to take a chance of the platoons opening a few seconds apart.”

The Director: “All of the doubtful points have been cleared up. Assuming that you would do what it has been decided that Captain M should do, I want each of you to write out the complete fire order of Captain M. It is understood, of course, that Captain M would give his order verbally, but it is desired to have you write out this order, so that the form of the order can be examined more carefully.”

Procedure

After the solutions have been written, the Director has one or more members of the class comment on the solution of other members. The Director then distributes the sheets containing Situation No. 3, which is the fire order of Captain M.

Machine Gun Co. Card No. 2

Director’s Key

1. Explain the duties of the commanding officer of a machine gun company of an assault battalion.

2. Pass out Situation No. 2. Have members of the class explain their understanding of it.

3. Have members of class discuss: Number of platoons to be employed. Use of headquarters detail. Selection of firing position. Use of direct fire. Assignment of targets. Opening fire.

4. Have members of class write out fire order of Captain M.

The Problem

Situation No. 3:

Captain M gave the following verbal orders to the platoon leaders at (s):

“Company —— has encountered heavy fire from (t). It will attack at (u) by building up a firing line at (v), and having a platoon attack in the direction of (w). A red rocket fired by this platoon will indicate the beginning of the attack.

“The Stokes mortar will lay down a barrage in front of the platoon advancing in the direction of (w). The one-pounder will engage any hostile machine guns.

“This company supports the attack.

“Firing positions:

“First platoon, the crest of this hill from 50 yards to the right of this point to 150 yards to the right of this point.

“Second platoon, the crest of this hill from 50 yards to the left of this point to 150 yards to the left of this point.

“Targets:

“First platoon, right half of enemy’s position at (t).

“Second platoon, left half of enemy’s position at (t).

“Platoon commanders will be responsible for lifting the fire so as not to endanger the infantry.

“Signal me when ready to open fire and open fire on my signal.

“Battalion ammunition point 500 yards east of here in edge of woods. Carts at disposal of platoon leaders.

“I shall be on the left of the 1st platoon.”

Required:

Actions of and orders actually issued by Lieutenant Y, commanding the 1st platoon.

Solution

The Director: “Captain Smith, in general what assistants has the platoon leader and what are their duties?”

Captain Smith: “The platoon sergeant takes command of the platoon when the lieutenant goes forward, and obtains ranges after the selection of the firing position.

“The communication corporal, with the agents (normally two), maintains communication between the platoon and the rifle company which it is supporting, and sends or signals to the platoon the information necessary to it.

“The transport corporal moves guns and ammunition carts forward in accordance with the movements of the platoon. Improvises packs when necessary. Provides for replenishment of ammunition and replacements for killed or disabled mules.

“There are seven privates in the headquarters detail. One of these is a bicyclist, two are agents to the rifle company, four runners maintain communication with machine gun company headquarters, with the sections and the platoon ammunition point.”

The Director: “Captain Burt, what would Lieutenant Y do after receiving the order from Captain M?”

Captain Burt: “He would proceed to the position assigned to his platoon. He would decide upon the positions to be assigned to his sections, and observe the enemy’s position to determine upon an allotment of targets. As the platoon approached he would halt it well under the cover of the hill and signal the platoon sergeant and the section leaders forward. When they arrived he would issue his fire order.”

The Director: “Captain Jones, give the fire order issued by Lieutenant Y.”

Captain Jones: “Lieutenant Y gives the following verbal order:

“Company —— has encountered heavy fire from (t). It will attack at (u) by building up a firing line at (v), and having a platoon attack in the direction of (w). A red rocket fired by that platoon will indicate the beginning of the attack.

“The Stokes mortars will lay down a barrage in front of the platoon advancing in the direction of (w). The one-pounder will engage hostile machine guns.

“This platoon and the remainder of our company supports the attack.

“Firing positions:

“First section to the right of this rock; 2nd section to the left. Mount your guns below the crest and drag them into position without disclosing your presence.

“Targets:

“First section, the woods on the right of the enemy’s position at (t). Range 1,300 to 1,400. Combined sights.

“Second section, the ridge for 100 yards to the left of the woods. Range 1,300.

“Section leaders will be responsible for lifting their fire on the approach of the infantry.

“Rate of fire 200 for first minute, 150 thereafter.

“Signal me when ready. Open fire on my signal.

“Platoon ammunition point 100 yards down the hill.

“I shall remain here.”

The Director: “Captain Howe, what do you think of telling the 1st section to use combined sights? Explain the use of combined sights.”

Captain Howe: “The target undoubtedly calls for the use of combined sights. Whether it would be necessary for Lieutenant Y to direct the use of combined sights would depend on how well trained the section leader was. If I were at all doubtful I would order combined sights.

“Combined sights is the method of engaging any required depth of ground by applying simultaneously overlapping zones of fire from two or more guns. The depth of the beaten zone is increased by ordering different elevations to be used by each gun. This type of fire is not necessary under 800 meters. When it is used, as many guns as possible should be employed with 100 meters difference if the error in range finding is probably great, and with 50 meters difference if the error is probably small. This kind of fire is used either to engage a target which is deeper than the effective beaten zone or against a small target when the range is not exactly known.”

The Director: “Captain Burt, explain to the class how the section leader determines when the fire should be lifted.”

Captain Burt: “The section leader is equipped with a type EE field glass which has an inverted sight leaf in the field of view. The glass is used as follows:

“Align the inverted sight scale so that the announced range to the target will coincide with the target.

“If the range to the target is 850 meters or less, note where the line in the graticule representing 1,350 meters cuts the landscape.

“If the range to the target is 850 meters or over, add 500 meters to the range to the target, and locate the point on the landscape that is cut by this line.

“If the point located on the landscape is at or above the feet of our own troops, it will be safe to fire.

“The gunner in a similar manner determines when it is safe to fire by means of his rear sight so there is always a double check.”

The Director: “Captain Smith, do you see any purpose in ordering a rate of fire of 200 for the first minute?”

Captain Smith: “Yes, sir, it is important to place as great a volume of fire as possible on the enemy at the beginning of the attack. However, the guns cannot maintain such a rate for but a few minutes, so it is necessary to lower it. A rate of 125 to 150 could be maintained for 20 or 30 minutes, so it is safe to order that.”

The Director: “Captain Jones, what do you mean by the ammunition point?”

Captain Jones: “The machine gun platoon ammunition point consists of the transport corporal, one runner, and the four ammunition carts and four machine gun carts with their drivers. This ammunition point is responsible for maintaining the ammunition supply from the carts forward to the guns.”

The Director: “You are correct about the composition of the ammunition point, but not about its duties. Its function is to maintain a supply of ammunition in the carts sufficiently close to the guns that it can be gotten forward by the ammunition carriers, but it is not responsible for getting the ammunition forward. Numbers 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of each squad are responsible for getting the ammunition forward from the carts to the guns. The transport corporal moves the carts forward from one covered position to another by bounds and keeps the platoon leader informed of the location of the carts. That is the reason a runner is assigned to the point. The corporal is responsible for getting the ammunition forward from the combat wagons. Normally this will be done by sending the ammunition carts to the battalion ammunition point. The machine gun carts should be kept filled at all times, if possible, and at the platoon ammunition point ready to move forward to the guns.

“Captain Brown, what do you think about Lieutenant Y not ordering emplacements and cover trenches to be constructed?”

Captain Brown: “If there is time before opening fire the section leader should construct them without any orders. However, I believe it is always safer to order the construction. In this case the time is limited, so it would be best to get the guns into position and ready to open fire and then begin construction. Great caution would have to be used, however, in the construction as emplacements not properly constructed would show up very distinctly on the crest and would be a source of danger. Cover trenches behind the trench would not be visible and would be a great protection for ammunition carriers.”

The Director: “Captain Howe, no mention was made in the order of communications, what do you think of that?”

Captain Howe: “It is unnecessary if the platoon is trained properly. It becomes a matter of routine, and instructions are given only if something out of the ordinary is required.”

Machine Gun Co. Card No. 3

Director’s Key

1. Pass out Situation No. 3. Have members of the class explain their understanding of it.

2. Have members of the class discuss: Duties of the members of the platoon headquarters detail. Action of Lieutenant Y prior to the issue of the fire order.

3. Have a member of the class give the fire order issued by Lieutenant Y.

4. Have members of the class discuss: Combined sights. Safety angles for direct overhead fire. Rates of fire. The platoon ammunition point. Construction of emplacements and cover trenches. Communications.

Procedure

The Director passes out the papers containing Special Situation No. 4, reads the situation aloud and calls upon one or more members of the class to give their understanding of it.

The Problem

Situation No. 4:

A few minutes after fire was opened by the machine guns, the enemy gave way, and Company —— advanced and disappeared over the ridge at (t) formerly held by the enemy. The left assault company (Company ——) has continued to make progress and is slightly in advance of the right assault company.

Required:

Orders as actually issued by Captain M, commanding the machine gun company.

Explanation

The Director: “The situation is one in which it would be possible for the battalion commander to give orders to the machine gun company, but would be necessary only in case that the company commander was incompetent. The captain of a company must not expect to receive orders from the major at every new phase of the situation. The major is probably eager to get forward to (t) to see for himself what the situation is and has no time to tell Captain M just what he shall do with his company.

“Captain Smith, assuming you are Captain M, what orders would you give to the company?”

Captain Smith: “I would send the following verbal message to the platoon commanders:

“‘Advance your platoon by section to the position at (t).’”

The Director: “If the enemy were still resisting, advancing the platoons by alternate sections would be the normal procedure. However, since the resistance of the enemy has temporarily ceased and he has passed over the ridge where he cannot at present fire on the machine gun company, Captain M has a little more choice in the formation that he will employ in advancing the company. It is perfectly practicable to advance by platoon, and there is some advantage in so doing as it will leave the platoon commanders in direct touch with their whole platoons. The left assault company is slightly in advance of the right, so it would be better to send the left platoon forward to the position at (t) and have the right platoon go forward just as soon as the left platoon has reached (t).

“Captain Jones, what do you think of immediately sending the whole company forward?”

Captain Jones: “It would not be safe. It is too early to know whether the enemy will counter-attack. If he should counter-attack and drive the infantry out of the position at (t), part of the machine guns should be in position to support the infantry. As soon as it appears that the attack of the infantry has succeeded, part of the guns must be sent forward to give the infantry closer support, but some guns must be retained in position until danger of a counter-attack has passed.”

The Director: “Captain Burt, would you give the platoon leaders any additional instructions?”

Captain Burt: “Yes, sir; I would instruct them to replenish their ammunition before sending their ammunition carts forward. They probably would do this any way, but I would play safe and order it. There has not been a long period of firing so that one cart from each section probably would be all that it would be necessary to send to the rear. This would leave plenty of ammunition with the guns and get additional ammunition forward much sooner than if the ammunition carts were permitted to advance without refilling.”

The Director: “Captain Howe, would you give any further instructions to the platoon leaders?”

Captain Howe: “Yes, sir; I would direct them to move forward with the guns on carts. The carts have been placed at the disposal of the platoon leaders so they should employ them without instructions, as there is no danger in so doing. However, the captain usually determines when the guns shall be moved forward by hand, so I think it is safer to caution them to use their carts. There is a great tendency to continue advancing the guns by hand for the rest of the fight when it has once become necessary to dismount them from the carts.”

The Director: “Captain Smith, give the complete messages that should be sent to the platoon leaders to carry out the decisions we have made.”

Captain Smith: “Captain M would send the following verbal messages:

“To the commander of the 2nd platoon:

“‘Move forward at once with guns on carts to the position from which the enemy has just been driven. Replenish ammunition.’

“To commander of 1st platoon:

“‘Replenish your ammunition. Remain in position until 2nd platoon reaches position from which enemy has just been driven and then move forward with guns on carts.’”

The Director: “We have covered the different situations that are likely to occur in an attack with the exception of the opening phases of a prepared attack and the consolidation. The former is most frequently an indirect fire problem and should be treated as a separate exercise. The latter can be handled best as the first phase of a battalion on the defensive.”

Machine Gun Co. Card No. 4

Director’s Key

1. Pass out Situation No. 4. Have members of the class explain their understanding of it.

2. Explain the responsibility of the captain for acting on his own initiative in the absence of orders from the major.

3. Have a member of the class give the orders issued by Captain M.

4. Have members of the class discuss: Different methods of advancing the company. Necessity for retaining some guns in position to meet counter-attack. Replenishment of ammunition. Use of carts.

5. Concluding statement by the Director.

Terrain Exercise No. 5.
An Advance Guard

The Problem

General Situation:

The (a) forms the boundary between hostile states. A Blue brigade is marching towards (b). Small Red forces are reported in the direction of (c).

Special Situation—Blue:

A (d) flank guard, consisting of the (e) battalion (f) infantry, halts for the night at (g).

At (h) (date) Company A, which has been designated to form the advance guard, is assembled at (i).

Based on the orders of the battalion commander, Captain A, commanding, issues the following verbal orders to his assembled officers and non-commissioned officers:

“Small Red forces are reported in the direction of (c). Our brigade marches towards (b) today by the (j)—(k)—(l) road. Our battalion continues its mission as a (d) flank guard. Our main body follows the advance guard at a distance of about 500 yards.

“This company forms the advance guard.

“Lieutenant W, with the first platoon, will form the advance party. March at (m) o’clock by the (n)—(o) road.

“The rest of the company will form the support and follow the advance party at a distance of about 400 yards.

“Corporal White (signalman) watch for signals from the main body.

“The rolling kitchen will join the battalion train.

“I will march with the support.”

(Note.—Company A is organized in accordance with Table of Organization 28-W. See Appendix 1.)

Explanation of Symbols

(a) In designating the boundary line, some natural topographical or geographical feature should be selected, such as a river, creek, canal, crest of ridges, etc. In this problem the boundary may be a number of miles from the point where the problem starts and in the direction in which the march is to be made.

(b) A point a march away in the direction of the enemy.

(c) The locality where the enemy is reported to be. This should be beyond the border in enemy territory.

(d) Indicate whether the battalion is a right or left flank guard. For example: The Blue brigade is marching north on a certain road. The battalion is marching north on a road to the west of that on which the brigade is marching—the battalion would be a left flank guard.

(e) Designate as one of the battalions of the regiment to which the officers participating belong or are attached.

(f) See next above. Example “A left flank guard, consisting of the 1st Battalion, 305th Infantry.”

(g) A point in the vicinity of where the terrain exercise is to start.

(h) Indicate the hour. Make it about 20 minutes before the time designated for the advance guard to start the march.

(j) The point where the terrain exercise is to begin.

(j)—(k)—(l) A road is designated in field orders by naming two or more places located on it. Example: “The FOUR POINT—EMMITSBURG—FAIRPLAY road.” In this case indicate in definite terms the road that the main body of the brigade is to march on.

(m) Designate the hour of marching of the advance guard.

(n)—(o) See remarks pertaining to the symbol (j)—(k)—(l).

The Problem

Situation No. 1:

You, Lieutenant W, commanding the first platoon, have been detailed to form the advance party. It is now (h). Your platoon is formed here.

Required:

The action that you, Lieutenant W, take, and the orders you issue to your platoon.

Procedure

The members of the class are assembled at (g) on the (n—o) road (see explanation of symbols), where it is intended that the advance guard formation is to be taken up.

The Director: “Before taking up the problem for solution, I want to make a few remarks on the formation of a column of troops on the march and to review briefly the formation and duties of an advance guard.”

Explanation

The Director: “A column of troops on the march consists of a main body and such covering detachments as may be necessary. These covering detachments are denominated advance guards, rear guards and flank guards. They are thrown out for the purpose of gaining information of the enemy, to protect the main body from surprise, and to hold off the enemy a sufficient length of time for the main body to prepare for action.

“The covering detachment that goes ahead of and protects the march of a marching column is called an ‘advance guard.’ It consists of a series of detachments or groups increasing progressively in strength from head to rear, each being charged with the protection of the group immediately following it from surprise and thus gaining time for the latter to get ready to fight.

“Formation.—The advance guard is normally divided into a support and a reserve. From the support, an advance party is sent to the front a few hundred yards, and from this advance party a small patrol, technically called a ‘point,’ is sent out. From time to time as the occasion demands, patrols are sent out to the right and left. These are called ‘flankers.’

“When the advance guard consists of a small force the reserve is omitted and we have only a support, from which an advance party is sent out.

“In the problem we have an advance guard composed of one rifle company of infantry. What is the proper formation?

“The advance party will consist of one platoon, from which a ‘point’ of one squad will be sent out to the front, a distance of about 200 yards. The remainder of the company will constitute the support and follow the advance party at a distance of about 400 yards.

“We do away with a reserve. It would divide the company into too many component parts and make control just that much more difficult.

“That is what may be termed the usual formation. Conditions may be such that it would be desirable to make the advance party stronger; as where the enemy habitually opposes us with relatively small detachments and we want to run over them and drive them off without bringing the support into action.

“In any case you must have a knowledge of the functions of an advance guard. You must know the mission and be able to size up the situation of the particular case. You must then use your plain commonsense in meeting the situations as they develop.

“Duties.—Now let us see what the duties of the advance guard are:

“1. To prevent the main body of our troops from being fired into while they are in a formation that prevents them from defending themselves. You can imagine what would happen if an effective fire were suddenly poured into the company while it is marching in column of squads on the road.

“2. To gain information of the enemy by sending out detachments to the front and flanks at such points as may be necessary. Here is an important thing to remember. Under the conditions of modern warfare, the haphazard method of sending out flanking patrols has every chance of resulting in disaster. These men never get back in time to be of use to you when you need them. Much of this patrolling and marching of flanking detachments across country is exhausting and wears out your troops. It should be reduced to the minimum.

“3. To push back small parties of the enemy. The progress of the main body must not be arrested by small, comparatively insignificant detachments of the enemy. It is the duty of the advance guard to brush them aside. How many times at maneuvers have you seen a skillfully handled patrol make a whole advance guard deploy? It should have been swept away by the advance party. The idea is, that you simply have to keep pushing to the front until you really encounter something that will stop you.

“4. To check the advance of the enemy in force long enough for the main body to prepare for action. When the enemy is met in sufficient force to warrant the employment of troops of the main body there is a certain process that the commander has to go through before he can get his troops in action. A reconnaissance must be made to determine the strength and disposition of the enemy, for it would be folly to commit a force to action without knowing something of these elements. Then, too, the orders for the deployment have to be issued and the deployment has to be effected. All of this takes a certain amount of time during which period the advance guard holds off the enemy.

“5. To remove obstacles, repair the roads, and favor in every way the uninterrupted progress of the main body.

“These are the duties of the advance guard. These are the things that platoon, section and squad leaders must ever keep in mind when they are on advance guard duty. These are the things that we officers must learn about in time of peace in order that we may do them as a matter of habit in time of actual service.

“Distances.—The distances between the several elements of the advance guard are fixed by the general rule that ‘the element in front must be at such a distance that the next succeeding element will not be involved in a disaster to the former.’

Formation of Advance Guard of One Company for a Battalion

“The point will be from 150 to 200 yards in advance of the advance party. The latter will be from 300 to 400 yards in front of the support and the main body will follow at a distance of from 400 to 500 yards. It will thus be seen that the head of a battalion with one company as advance guard will be about 1,400 yards away from the enemy. This allows a minimum distance of 400 yards from the leading man of the point to the enemy. If a deployment becomes necessary, it can be made in comparative security. These distances are not fixed. They are flexible. They may be increased or diminished to meet the situation. When the advance guard commander prescribes distances between the several elements it is not to be taken that the exact distance will be maintained at all times. It is merely an indication of the approximate distances desired.

“Communication.—Communication between the several elements of the advance guard and with the main body is kept up by means of connecting files which march between them. They employ signals and act as runners when necessary.

“Are there any questions?”

Procedure

The Director will endeavor to answer any questions that may be asked by members of the class.

After all questions have been cleared up the Director will hand a copy of the problem to each member of the class. A few minutes are allowed for the class to read over the problem.

The Director: “Please give me your attention while we go over the problem.”

The Director reads the problem aloud, each member of the class following from the copy in his possession. The direction of places mentioned are pointed out.

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, give a brief statement of the tactical situation, as you understand it.”

Lieutenant Williams states his understanding of the tactical situation. As he proceeds the Director makes such explanations as may be desirable. One or more additional members of the class may be called upon to state their version of the tactical situation. All of this is for the purpose of fixing the elements of the problem firmly in the minds of the members of the class and prevent any subsequent misunderstanding of them.

The Director: “Captain Hastings, you note that the problem states that our battalion is a right (left) flank guard. Just what do you understand by that?”

Captain Hastings: “Ordinarily the flanks of a column on the march may be protected by small patrols sent out from the advance guard. There are, however, occasions when patrols will not suffice and it is necessary to send out a stronger detachment, to march along a route essentially parallel to and abreast of the force. A detachment so sent out is called a flank guard. In this case our whole battalion is a flank guard sent out to protect the right (left) flank of our brigade in its march towards (b).”

The Director: “What do you understand to be the duties of a flank guard?”

Captain Hastings: “They are much the same as those of an advance guard, that is, to do everything possible to facilitate the uninterrupted progress of the main body. All other duties are incidental to this and all have this prime object in view.”

The Director: “Very good. Are there any questions at this time? Now I want each member of the class to consider himself as being Lieutenant W, commanding the first platoon of Company A. Your platoon is right over there (pointing), formed up in line, at the right of the company. You, together with the other officers and non-commissioned officers of the company, have assembled here and have received the verbal orders of the captain for the formation of the company as the advance guard of the battalion. You are now ready to return to your platoon. Just how are you going to do the job that has been assigned to you?”

The Director will now conduct the class to the point where the first platoon is supposed to be.

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, we will assume that you are commanding the platoon. Just how do you go about the task of getting started on the day’s work?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I should first see if all the men are present, and then I would inspect the platoon to make sure that everything is all right.”

The Director: “The first part of your problem is simple. All you have to do is to glance down the ranks to determine whether every man is in his proper place. Let us assume that all are present. Now, with regard to the proposition of the inspection. In campaign the platoon commander should inspect his platoon at reveille—check up the appearance of the men and note the condition of the arms and equipment. At this time he should take the steps necessary to remedy deficiencies and make provision for the evacuation of any man that is physically unfit. This should be a matter of routine. Then, when the day’s work is to be started, there is no delay.”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I see the point and realize the necessity for the procedure you have outlined. There is one other point. When should the rifles be loaded?”

The Director: “Some advocate that the rifles should be loaded and the safety locks turned to ‘Safe’ just after the inspection in the morning. I do not believe that to be the best procedure. It increases the chances for an accident. I would have the men load their rifles, in this case, just before starting to form the advance party. Let us assume that the platoon has been inspected at reveille and that all the men are in fit physical condition and ready for the work in hand. What is the first move you would make, Lieutenant Ralston?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “Well, sir, I would want to get the platoon a short distance away from the rest of the company. So the first thing I do is to march the platoon about 75 to 100 yards up the road.”

The Director: “What is the idea?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “There is always more or less confusion around the company on an occasion of this kind, and I want to get my platoon off by themselves so they can give me their undivided attention while I am issuing my orders and getting them all set for the work in hand.”

The Director: “That seems to be a very good reason. Let us assume that you have moved the platoon 100 yards away from the rest of the company. You are formed up in line. What are you going to do now?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would have the men load their rifles.”

The Director: “All right; you have done that. Captain Harvey, what is the next step?”

Captain Harvey: “I would take a few minutes to dope out the situation and determine what I am going to do.”

The Director: “That is time well spent. Now let us go through the process you have just mentioned. What is the first thing you are to determine?”

Captain Harvey: “What is the mission of the platoon? It is to form the advance party.”

The Director: “What is the next step, Captain Hodges?”

Captain Hodges: “To consider the enemy—where he is, what he is doing, and what he is likely to do. In this case the only information we have is that small forces of the enemy are reported in the direction of (c). We have no information of his strength or composition or what he is doing. We must be prepared to meet him at any time and govern our action accordingly.”

The Director: “What is the next step, Captain Mason?”

Captain Mason: “To consider our own supporting forces. We know that our brigade is to march towards (b) by the (j)—(k)—(l) road. That our battalion continues its mission as a right (left) flank guard. That our company, less this platoon, is the support, which follows us at a distance of about 400 yards.”

The Director: “What is the next step, Captain Jones?”

Captain Jones: “We then consider our plans of action—what we are going to do. There is no information on which to base our plans very far ahead. We can only get the advance party into the most favorable formation and be prepared for eventualities. We will have a point, consisting of one squad, precede the advance party at about 200 yards. The rest of the platoon will march in column of twos, a file on each side of the road. From this formation a rapid deployment can be made, and we are always ready to meet the enemy. Measures for local protection will be taken as the march progresses.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, what is the next step in this process?”

Lieutenant Baker: “Based upon what has been said before we arrive at a decision as to what we are going to do. In this case it would be—To march at (m) o’clock by the (n)—(o) road as advance party of the advance guard. We then embody this decision in a field order and issue it verbally to the platoon.”

Explanation

The Director: “All of that which we have just discussed is what we call the ‘Estimate of the Situation.’ It is simply a sizing up of the tactical situation in a logical and systematic manner. The commander of troops who fails to do this fails to do everything possible to promote the success of the military operation he is about to undertake—he does not take advantage of all the aids at his disposal. The commander who blunders into action without sizing up the situation as we have outlined here is doomed to failure and disaster. It may be an operation in which there is little to consider—where there is little choice of methods—but you should religiously go through the process, even if only a few minutes of time are available.

“At this point I want to invite your attention to the merits of the simple five paragraph field order provided for in our Field Service Regulations. The elements of it are:

“Paragraph 1. Information of the enemy and our own troops.

“Paragraph 2. The plan of the commander, stated in general terms.

“Paragraph 3. Orders for the several elements of the command.

“Paragraph 4. Administrative and communication arrangements.

“Paragraph 5. The place where messages are to be sent, or where the commander will march.

“This form of field order has stood the test of time and, what is more to the point, it has proved to be a suitable and effective method of issuing orders in time of war. When we went to France we found the long-winded, highly detailed orders that were the development of years of trench warfare. No one read them and, if they did, they did not understand them. We used them in order to conform with requirements from higher headquarters. When we really got down to the business of fighting and had to produce results we fell back on our own simple five paragraph order, and it met all the requirements. Get the elements of this order firmly fixed in your minds and follow them. They are applicable to any body of troops, large or small.

“The next point I want to bring out is the necessity for letting every man in the platoon know what the work for the day is to be. This information is imparted to them in the form of a verbal order by the platoon commander, which embraces the points brought out in the ‘Estimate of the Situation,’ which we have just discussed.”

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hall, based upon the decision reached in our ‘Estimate of the Situation’ and the discussion prior thereto, state your solution of the problem in detail.”

Captain Hall: “I give the command: 1. Platoon, 2. ATTENTION; then follow with: 1. With ball cartridges, 2. LOAD. After all pieces are loaded and locked, I give the command: 1. Order, 2. ARMS. I then give the command: AT EASE, and direct: ‘Give me your attention.’ I then issue my order as follows:

“Small Red forces are reported in the direction of (c) (indicating the direction). Our brigade marches towards (b), by the (j)—(k)—(l) road, which is —— miles to the —— of here. Our battalion continues its mission as a right (left) flank guard. Our company forms the advance guard. The company, less this platoon, is the support and follows us at a distance of about 400 yards.

“‘This platoon forms the advance party.

“‘Sergeant Roberts (section leader, first section) with the first squad will form the point. March by that road (indicating the road). I will signal the direction as we go along. Precede the advance party by about 200 yards.

“‘Private Allen (rifleman from front rank, second squad), act as connecting file between the point and advance party.

“‘The remainder of the platoon will march in column of twos, one file on each side of the road, at easy marching distances.

“‘Corporal Howard (section guide, second section), watch for signals from the rear.

“‘I will march at the head of the advance party.

“‘You have about five minutes before the advance begins. Move out with the point, Sergeant Roberts, get your distance and formation and await my signal to start.

“‘Remainder of the platoon REST.’

“When the time for starting arrives I will give the command: 1. Platoon, 2. ATTENTION; and then follow with: 1. Right, 2. FACE; then: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH, and direct: ‘A file on each side of the road.’ I will then signal the point: FORWARD MARCH.”

The Director: “That is very good. Now I want each member of the class to write out the order of the platoon commander on his pad.”

Procedure

Each member of the class writes out the order of the advance party commander. When all have completed this the Director collects the work and distributes it, making sure that no member of the class receives his own solution back again.

One or more of the solutions are read aloud, and a discussion of any errors or points of importance is conducted. At the conclusion of this the Director inquires if there are any questions. He endeavors to answer any questions that may be asked, after which the class is ready to go ahead with the next situation.

Advance Guard Card No. 1

Director’s Key

1. Prepare copies of the problem and the situations, one for each member of the class.

2. Conduct the class to the point on the road where it is intended that the advance guard formation is to be taken up.

3. Make a short talk on the subject of advance guard duty: (a) Formation of a column of troops on the march. (b) Description of an advance guard. (c) Duties of advance guard: Security of main body; gain information; push back small parties of the enemy; check advance of enemy in force, clear road, etc. (d) Distances. (e) Communication.

4. Distribute sheets bearing problem and Situation No. 1.

5. Read problem and question members of class on tactical situation.

6. Discuss flank guard.

7. Take up solution of problem: Inspection of platoon; when to load pieces; get platoon away from company.

8. Estimate of the Situation: Mission; enemy; own troops; plans of action; decision.

9. Discussion of Field Orders. Information of enemy and own troops; plan of commander; tactical dispositions; administrative arrangements; place of commander.

10. Final solution of problem: Commands of platoon commander; orders of platoon commander; getting the platoon in march.

11. Have members of class write out orders of the platoon commander. Collect solutions and redistribute them. Have several solutions read and discussed.

Explanation

The Director: “In our solution to Situation No. 1, Captain Hall, in giving the order of the platoon commander said: ‘Sergeant Roberts, with the first squad, will form the point, etc.’ That was an eminently proper order. It did not go into details. He assumes that Sergeant Roberts is familiar with the methods of forming the point of an advance guard and conducting its operations.

“It is a very simple matter for the platoon commander to pass the order along to the sergeant in this manner. But unless the platoon commander knows how the work should be done he has no means of checking up and seeing to it that it is done properly.

“While it is not contemplated that any member of this class will ever be called upon to conduct the operations of the point of an advance guard, all should be familiar with what happens when he gives someone else an order to do so.”

Procedure

The Director passes out the papers containing Situation No. 2, reads the situation aloud and calls upon one or more members of the class to give their understanding of it.

The Problem

Situation No. 2:

You, Sergeant Roberts, have been designated to command the point, consisting of the first squad. Your men have been turned over to you by the platoon commander. You have been ordered to move out and get your distance and formation.

Required:

What do you do?

Procedure

The Director: “Captain Sands, what is a point?”

Captain Sands: “A point is an element of an advance guard that precedes the advance party.”

The Director: “That is right, and it is no more or less than a fighting patrol that is assigned a definite line of march. Its operations are conducted on that basis. It can afford to be bold and aggressive because the advance party is close at hand to back it up. What factors govern the formation of the point, Lieutenant Wallace?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “The point must have a formation that renders it the least vulnerable to hostile fire. This means dispersion. On the other hand, the dispersion should not be so great that the commander is not able to control its operations. I should say that a patrol formation, where the men march in pairs on opposite sides of the road, would be suitable.”

The Director: “What should be the distances between the men?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “Twenty to 25 yards. That distance would provide the necessary dispersion, and at the same time there would be sufficient compactness to insure control.”

The Director: “Where will the point commander march, Lieutenant Ralston?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “He should march at the head of the point.”

The Director: “Do you agree with that statement, Captain Harvey?”

Captain Harvey: “No, sir; I do not. It seems to me that the commander should be free to go wherever he is needed. He should not be tied down to any one place.”

The Director: “I agree with you. There are other reasons why he should not habitually march at the head of the point. In the first place, the man at the head of the point must always be on the lookout for the enemy, and if the point commander is the man his whole attention will be devoted to that task and there will be very little leadership exercised in the point. Again, we do not want to take a chance on our point commander becoming a casualty unnecessarily. He has been placed in command, presumably because he is the best man fitted for the job. He knows the plans for the day’s work better than any of the other men. If he becomes a casualty on the first few shots, there may be no one to take his place without some confusion and delay. If the point commander marches a little distance back, say in the second or even third pair, he will be sufficiently close to the front to perform his duty. I prefer to have him in the second pair. Before leaving this subject of the formation of the point I would like your opinion, Captain Hughes, on the question of deploying the men in a line of skirmishers at extended intervals.”

Captain Hughes: “That might be all right after the enemy is encountered, but I would not do it on an ordinary march. In the first place, it would be rough going for the men off on the flanks of the road, and they could not keep up. If the rate of march is held down to keep abreast of them, the progress of the main body will be delayed. In the next place, if the intervals are too much extended, the point commander will not be able to control the operations and will not have his men where he wants them at the critical moment.”

The Director: “Your reasons seem to be logical and possess merit. Before going further I want to say a few words about the operations of a point.”

Explanation

The Director: “The main idea to be instilled into the minds of the members of a point is that it must keep moving. It positively must not stop until absolutely compelled to do so by the fire of the enemy.

“When the enemy is encountered the point commander will have to size up the situation quickly and take the necessary action which invariably includes getting information back to the advance party commander.

“The men must look to the leader for instructions and guidance and await his orders.”

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Hastings, what elements are included in the orders of a point commander to the members of his point?”

Lieutenant Hastings: “They are the elements included in every field order. The point commander must be sure that every man has all the available information of the enemy and our own supporting troops. In this case they were given all of this by the platoon commander, and it is not necessary for Sergeant Roberts to repeat it. That is paragraph 1 of the order. The point commander must then announce his plans, in general terms, and that constitutes paragraph 2. Then comes the formation of the point and giving each man his instructions as to where he is to march in the formation—paragraph 3. He must now arrange for communication and follow with the place where he, himself, is to march. That completes the order.”

The Director: “Now, Captain Harvey, let us assume that you are Sergeant Roberts. Your squad is standing here on the road ready to move out. Let us hear the exact orders that you would give them.”

Captain Harvey: “I will take post in front of the squad and command: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.

“I will then address the men as follows:

“‘You heard what the lieutenant said about the enemy and our supporting troops.

“‘We are going out as the point.

“‘Crane and Hanson (both riflemen), march on the right and left of the road, respectively. Keep about abreast of each other.

“‘Pendleton (rifle grenadier), follow Crane and Hanson at a distance of about 25 yards. March on the right side of the road.

“‘Alley (rifleman) and Stone (carrier for the automatic rifleman), follow Pendleton at 25 yards distance—Stone on left, Alley on right of road. Stone, watch the country to the east and Alley, watch the country to the west.

“‘Patrick (automatic rifleman) and Corporal Smith follow Alley and Stone at a distance of about 25 yards—Patrick on the right, Corporal Smith on the left of road.

“‘Bailey (rifleman), follow Patrick and Corporal Smith at a distance of about 25 yards and watch for signals from the advance party.

“‘I will march with Pendleton on the left side of the road.

“‘Move out.’”

Procedure

The Director: “Are there any questions?”

Lieutenant Williams: “Yes, sir. I would like to ask why Captain Harvey places the automatic rifleman so far back in the formation?”

The Director: “Captain Harvey, will you please explain your reasons?”

Captain Harvey: “If the point encounters the enemy, we would want to conduct a little reconnaissance before committing the automatic rifleman to action. If he is any farther to the front, he is most likely to get involved early in the encounter and perhaps in a position hastily chosen, where his weapon could not produce his maximum effect. The automatic rifle has the fire power of several rifles, and we want to take advantage of this fact. We must therefore get the weapon into the position where it can be done, and this cannot usually be determined with the first few shots of an advance guard meeting engagement.”

The Director: “Those are very good reasons—ones which I believe all the members of this class will remember when it comes to training their own non-commissioned officers. Are there any other questions?”

Lieutenant Williams: “Why did Captain Harvey omit to designate a second in command?”

The Director: “The succession in military command is determined by seniority. Corporal Smith is the next senior and will automatically assume command. If there were no non-commissioned officer with the squad, Sergeant Roberts would have designated one of the privates as second in command. Any other questions? (Pause.) There appear to be none. I wish you would ask questions to bring out points that are not fully understood. It is by a discussion of these points that we arrive at a reasonable solution of these problems. Now, a few remarks before we pass on to the next situation.”

Explanation

The Director: “When you come to the training of your own men you cannot be too particular about insisting upon their learning the form of tactical orders and the language to be used in expressing their contents. It takes long practice to be able to do this without getting confused and omitting essentials.

“When a non-commissioned officer takes charge of a detachment for any tactical duty and gives his instructions in a clear and concise manner, leaving nothing to be guessed at, he inspires the confidence of his men. They realize immediately that there is someone at the helm who knows his business and they cheerfully respond. Noncommissioned officers should be practiced in stating the instructions that they would have to give under the various tactical situations that they may be called upon to handle. There is no surer way to gain that confidence so necessary to military efficiency.[6]

“If there are no further questions we will proceed with the problem.”

Advance Guard Card No. 2

Director’s Key

1. Explain necessity for learning the details of tactics.

2. Hand out Situation No. 2. Have members of class explain their understanding of it.

3. The Point. What it is. Formation. Distances. Dispersion.

4. Where commander marches.

5. Deployment of point as skirmishers.

6. Operations of point.

7. Elements of the order for the point.

8. Solution. Issue of orders.

9. Position of automatic rifleman in formation.

10. Second in command.

11. Training of men.

Procedure

The class is now conducted forward along the route of march of the advance guard for a distance of several hundred yards. The distance should be such that the class will at least be beyond the sight of the starting point in the Terrain Exercise, so that entirely new terrain will be available. There should be a considerable stretch of road ahead in sight so that the various elements of the advance guard could be seen if they were actually on the road.

The class is halted and the Director passes out the slips containing Situation No. 3.

The Problem

Situation No. 3:

It is assumed that the advance guard has been marching for a period of two hours.

You, Captain A, marching at the head of the support of the advance guard, have reached this point. Nothing has occurred to change the initial formation of the advance guard.

Required:

Point out the formation and location of the various elements of the advance guard at this moment.

Procedure

A few minutes are allowed the members of the class to look over the situation and get their new bearings. The Director reads the situation aloud and inquires whether there are any questions, which he endeavors to answer.

Explanation

The Director: “You will note that the situation indicates that the advance guard is assumed to have been marching for two hours. This would make the distance we have marched a little more than 5 miles. As a matter of fact, we have only come a few hundred yards from our starting point. You will have to draw on your imagination in this matter, disregard all things behind you, and consider only those to the front. It would consume too much time to actually go the distance assumed and it is not necessary to do so, for we are now on new terrain, which serves our purpose equally as well as if we were the full distance of 5 miles farther to the front.”

Procedure

The Director: “What are the several elements of the advance guard, Lieutenant Williams?”

Lieutenant Williams: “First, we have the point, which is the small body of men farthest to the front; next, we have a connecting file between the point and the advance party; next comes the advance party, then the connecting files between the advance party and the support, and finally the support, which is right here on the road.”

The Director: “Captain Hastings, what is the strength and disposition of these several elements of the advance guard?”

Captain Hastings: “The point is composed of one complete squad commanded by a sergeant. It is in patrol formation, marching on the road with a distance of about 20 to 25 yards between each pair of men. The point precedes the advance party by a distance of about 150 to 200 yards. The connecting file between that point and advance party marches so that he can keep both of these bodies in sight. He has no fixed place where he is to march—”

Lieutenant Wallace (interrupting): “Right there is a point that I want to bring up. I can conceive of a situation where the connecting file could not keep both bodies in sight all the time—for example, on a winding road or in hilly country. What does he do in that case?”

The Director: “Under those circumstances the commander of the advance party would have to send out a sufficient number of men for this duty, so as to insure communication being kept up at all times. It is simply a problem to be solved by the advance party commander. Captain Hastings, proceed with your discussion.”

Captain Hastings: “Next comes the advance party composed of the first platoon, less one squad and connecting file, commanded by Lieutenant W. It is marching with a column of files on each side of the road at easy marching distances. The connecting files between the advance party and support march so that they can keep both bodies in communication with each other all the time. The distance between the advance party and support is about 400 yards. Now comes the support, composed of the company, less the first platoon and connecting files with the advance party, which marches in a column of squads on the road. Following is the main body of the battalion, at a distance of about 500 yards.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, what provisions are made for flank protection?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I do not think that any flank protection is necessary at this time. No considerable body of the enemy will get between our column and the main body of our brigade. If they did they would be doomed to destruction. On the other flank the country is open, so that no patrols are needed in that direction. I do not believe in wearing men out on flank patrol duty when there is no necessity for it.”

Explanation

The Director: “That is exactly the point that I wanted to bring out. There is no necessity for wearing men out on flank patrol duty beating their way over rough country and climbing fences, when they accomplish no useful purpose. Never send out a flank patrol unless there is some sound tactical reason for it. Then when the time comes and there is necessity for patrols, your men will be found ready to put forth superhuman efforts, if need be, to help you accomplish your mission. If you are in contact with the enemy, or there is immediate danger of such contact, flank patrols may be necessary and a commander should not hesitate to send them out. On the solution of these small tactical problems, that confront a commander in actual service, will determine your success or failure as a leader. You must ever keep in mind that it is a combination of these small tactical situations that go to make up the big military operations on which the fate of a nation may depend.”

Procedure

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the class to make a rough sketch of the road occupied by the advance guard and show on it the dispositions of the advance guard.”

Some 10 or 15 minutes should be allowed for this. After the sketches are completed they should be collected and passed back to the members of the class—taking care to see that no man gets his own solution back again. The members of the class should be invited to make any criticism of the sketch he has in his possession and following this the next situation should be proceeded with.

Advance Guard Card No. 3

Director’s Key

1. Conduct the class to the place where the situation is to be taken up for solution.

2. Hand out Situation No. 3. Read Situation aloud.

3. Explain why Situation is taken up at this point instead of five miles farther on.

4. Proceed with problem: Elements of the advance guard; strength and disposition of the elements of the advance guard; connecting files; flank protection.

5. Explain flank patrols.

6. Make sketch of road showing the formation of the advance guard.

Procedure

The class is now conducted to the point selected for the next tactical situation. This should be several hundred yards in advance of the point where Situation No. 3 was staged. The slips bearing Situation No. 4 are passed out to members of the class.

The Problem

Situation No. 4:

You, Sergeant Roberts, have arrived at this point. The two leading men of the point (Crane and Hanson) are about 25 yards ahead of you. The remaining members of the point are on the road behind you. At this moment both Crane and Hanson take cover and point in the direction of ——. You join them and observe about a squad of the enemy on foot (moving around in the woods—describe just what the enemy is doing). They apparently have just arrived and have not seen you. Several horses are being led to the rear.

Required:

What do you, Sergeant Roberts, do?

Procedure

The Director reads the situation aloud and points out the location of the enemy.

Explanation

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the class to consider himself as being Sergeant Roberts. The incidents contained in the situation have transpired just as indicated. You were marching along the road; you saw Crane and Hanson take cover and point in the direction of the enemy; you joined them here; you see the enemy (explain what the enemy is doing). It is now up to you to make a decision as to what you are going to do and proceed to do it. Before going into the solution of the problem I want to make a few remarks on the conduct of the operations of a point.

“The real work of the advance guard begins when it gets in contact with the enemy. All formation and all operations are designed to insure success when this event happens. The point is the first element that meets the enemy and success or failure may depend upon what is done by this small body. The big idea is that we must get the jump on the enemy. We must lead and make him follow. In other words, we must take the offensive for it is only by offensive action that military success is gained.

“The commander of the point of an advance guard must be on the lookout for the enemy all the time. He must continually look ahead and dope out what he is going to do if the enemy should suddenly appear in this or that place.

“Sergeant Roberts has been doing this very thing and the proper action is plain to him. Let us see if it is plain to you.”

Solution

The Director: “Captain Harvey, when you saw Crane and Hanson take cover, what is the first thing you would have done?”

Captain Harvey: “I would join Crane and Hanson immediately just as the situation indicates.”

The Director: “Would you have done anything before going forward?”

Captain Harvey: “Well, sir, I would want to see for myself just what is going on before I took any definite action.”

The Director: “Would you have done anything else, Captain Hodges?”

Captain Hodges: “Yes, sir. I would have signaled the rest of the point ‘DOWN’ so as to give them warning that the enemy is in sight. I will tell Pendleton ‘Signal back. Enemy in sight,’ because Lieutenant W will want to know immediately why the point has halted, and this will give him the information. Then I would go to the front and join Crane and Hanson.”

The Director: “Those are the points I wanted to bring out. You see them, Captain Harvey, do you not?”

Captain Harvey: “Yes, sir.”

The Director: “Now, Captain Harvey, let us take up your solution again. Let us say that you have joined Crane and Hanson. Just what are you going to do?”

Captain Harvey: “I would open fire on the enemy immediately. Then get the rest of the point up and have them join in the firing.”

The Director: “Do you agree with that procedure, Captain Hodges?”

Captain Hodges: “Not entirely, sir. I appreciate the necessity for opening fire right away so as to get the jump on the enemy, but I think we should get as many rifles up as possible before opening fire and disclosing our position to the enemy. I would try to get the whole point in position to fire before opening up, if I could. I would first make provision for Crane and Hanson to open fire by giving them firing data: ‘Range: —— yards. Target: enemy at (describe location of target briefly). Hold your fire.’ I would then signal the other members of the point to come up and, as they arrive, indicate the location of the target and announce the range to them.”

Captain Jones: “That solution seems to me to be all right if the enemy will remain inactive until all of this is done, but suppose he does not do so. Suppose he discovers us. Suppose he opens fire himself. Suppose he starts to retreat. Suppose he keeps coming along towards us.”

Captain Hodges: “I am coming to all of that. I would keep the enemy under observation. If he does anything that should cause us to open fire before all of the squad is up, I would open up with every rifle that is in position to fire. I would take no chances on the enemy getting the jump on me. It will only take a minute or two to get the men into position, and I think I am justified in delaying that long.”

Captain Jones: “I would make mighty certain that I did not wait too long before opening fire.”

The Director: “I think Captain Jones is right in his contentions, but I agree with Captain Hodges’ solution to get as many men as possible up on the line before opening fire. Of course, if the enemy does anything that would warrant opening fire before all the men are up, it should be done.”

Explanation

The Director: “The advantage of waiting until all the rifles are on the line is that, as soon as these men are fired on, they will probably try to make their get-away. They will furnish a target for only a few seconds. If our point can inflict sufficient casualties, they may fall back and abandon the attempt at further reconnaissance, especially if they can down the patrol leader. If the leading men of the point open fire, by the time the last man gets up, the enemy will be well under way and there will be no target to fire at. If the enemy returns the fire, they at once reveal themselves, and Sergeant Roberts will do well to be seeking out other detachments in the vicinity. A reconnoitering patrol does not fire on an occasion of this kind unless it is surprised and forced to do so in self-defense. It has a much better chance of accomplishing its mission of securing information by avoiding combat. If this small body of the enemy open fire, it may be reasonably assumed that they are being backed up by other troops or have accomplished their mission of finding out the strength and composition of our forces and have turned themselves into a fighting patrol and open fire to delay us and thus give information to their own troops that we are advancing in force. If they immediately try to make a get-away, it will indicate that they are a reconnoitering patrol and will probably try to work around to the flanks of the column to get information of our main body. On the other hand, they will know that we are not a reconnoitering patrol as soon as we open fire. They know that we are backed up by other troops.

“You now see the elements involved in this simple situation. You see the responsibility that devolves upon non-commissioned officers when they are placed in the position of Sergeant Roberts. To know what to do and how to do it requires training and close attention to detail. Probably any of us could blunder through a situation of this kind, but it takes a man trained in military tactics to make his decisions quickly, to act upon them promptly and take advantage of the fleeting moments to inflict damage on the enemy. These are the things that we study to become proficient in. These are the things that we must teach our non-commissioned officers if we are to have confidence in their ability to meet tactical situations that confront them, with judgment and decision. And there is no royal road to success along this line. The knowledge required can be attained only by thorough study and practice.”

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, suppose the enemy does something which, in your judgment, requires fire to be opened before the whole point is up and in position, would you join in the firing yourself?”

Lieutenant Baker: “No, sir. I would not. I estimate that I would have plenty to do to direct the fire of the other men; to search the country to see if any other parties of the enemy were in our front, and to keep the advance party commander advised of what is going on at the front.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Barney, let us assume that you were able to get all of the men on the line before opening fire and were able to open as a surprise to the enemy. He takes cover and returns the fire. What further action would you take?”

Lieutenant Barney: “I would keep on firing. I would signal the advance party commander to send up some reinforcements.”

The Director: “Do you agree with that solution, Lieutenant Hunt?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “No, sir. I would go after him. I cannot run him out of his position by fire action alone. I would immediately start filtering my men forward while keeping up a heavy fire with the other man.”[7]

The Director: “Captain Hall, give us Sergeant Roberts’ solution to the situation.”

Captain Hall: “I will signal the members of the point ‘Down,’ and tell Pendleton to signal the advance party commander ‘Enemy in sight.’ I will then join Crane and Hanson. I will locate the enemy, give Crane and Hanson firing data and order them to hold their fire. I will signal the other members of the point to come up, and as they arrive on the line I will give them the range and indicate the target. When all are ready I will open fire on the enemy. Should the enemy do anything to warrant it I will open fire immediately, with all the rifles on the line. I will search the landscape for other parties of the enemy. As soon as I open fire I will take steps to advance and close with the enemy and drive him off.”[8]

The members of the class should not be required to make a written solution to this situation.

After all questions have been answered the class is ready to proceed to the solution of the next situation.

Advance Guard Card No. 4

Director’s Key

1. Conduct the class to the point where the situation is to be taken up for solution.

2. Hand out Situation No. 4. Read situation aloud and explain it. Explain action of point, when enemy encountered.

3. Solution: Signal Down. Information to advance party commander. Join leading men. When open fire. Firing data.

4. Explain action of reconnoitering and fighting patrols. Necessity for the training of N. C. O.’s.

5. Solution of problem.

Procedure

The Director now passes out slips, bearing Situation No. 5, to the members of the class.

The Problem

Situation No. 5:

When the point opened fire the enemy retreated under cover of the woods (or such cover as is actually available). They did not return the fire. You, Sergeant Roberts, observe two riderless horses galloping through the woods.

Required:

What action do you take?

Procedure

When the members of the class have had a chance to get their bearings the Director reads the situation aloud and points out the direction in which the enemy retreated and where the riderless horses are at this time.

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what is your estimate of the enemy?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I should say he forms a reconnoitering patrol sent out to secure information about our movements. He has not yet gained the information he desires or he would have given us a fight. Again, had he been the advance element of a larger body he would have engaged our point and by now we would begin to see evidences of the troops following him.”

The Director: “Is there any member of the class who does not agree with the views just expressed?”

Captain Hastings: “I agree with them in the main, but it seems to me that the enemy would have opened fire if for no other purpose than to make trouble for us and cause delay to our troops.”

The Director: “We must always give the enemy credit for being up to his job. The moment we opened fire the leader of that patrol knew that he had encountered a fighting element of our forces. If he stops to engage in a fight, he knows that every minute that passes makes it just that much more difficult for him to make his get-away. He knows that we are going to close on him right away and he will not get the information he has been sent out to secure. You must always remember that a reconnoitering patrol does not fight except when it is forced to do so in self-defense, or when it has secured all the information it wants, has sent it back, and then turns itself into a fighting patrol to delay the advance of the enemy. Are there any other points to bring up about the mission of the enemy?

“Lieutenant Wallace, you are assumed to be Sergeant Roberts. What do you do now?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would form up my point in the original order of march and move out along the road. We would take up the double-time until we get our proper distance.”

The Director: “Would you do anything else?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would send two members of the point out to the place where the enemy was to see if we could get an identification.”

The Director: “Do you agree with that procedure, Lieutenant Ralston?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “Our battalion commander would want an identification if it is possible to get one, and it seems to me that something should be done at once to secure it.”

The Director: “I agree with you entirely that an identification is desirable, but it is not the job of the point to get it. Members of the point do not go off on excursions to the flank. They keep plugging along on the line of march. If flank patrols are to be sent out, they must come from the advance party or the support. I cannot conceive of any circumstances that would warrant sending two members of the point off on patrol duty. Now, Lieutenant Ralston, assuming that it is desirable to get an identification, what would you, as point commander, do?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would send a message back to Lieutenant Wallace, who is with the advance party.”

The Director: “By whom would you send this message?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “By Private Bailey, the rear man of the point.”

The Director: “Now state the exact message that you would send back.”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would fall back to where Bailey is marching. I would say to him:

“‘Bailey, you go back to Lieutenant Wallace. Tell him that we fired on an enemy reconnoitering patrol of about one squad. Show him where they were. Tell him that they did not return the fire. That when we opened fire they withdrew. That there are probably two dead or wounded men in the woods. Rejoin the point when you can.’

“I would then double-time up to the point. As I pass Corporal Smith I would say: ‘Watch for signals from the advance party.’”

Captain Harvey: “That solution seems to be all right, but don’t you think Lieutenant Wallace would come forward to the point when it halted? In that case he would know all about the situation, and it would not be necessary to send the message back to him.”

The Director: “I am very glad you brought up that point, Captain Harvey. No; I do not think Lieutenant Wallace would leave his advance party at such a critical moment. In my opinion it would be absolutely wrong if he did. In the first place, he has no business up with the point. Sergeant Roberts is either capable of handling it or he is not so. If he is, he should be let alone to solve his own problem; if he is not capable, he should be relieved. On advance guard duty the commander of each element will have plenty to do if he sticks to his own job and does not go molesting that of someone else.”

Procedure

The class should now be conducted 200 or 300 yards farther along the road. It is here halted and the Director states: The point has now gotten into formation and is continuing the advance. A message has been sent back to the advance party commander as indicated in our solution a few minutes ago. At this moment you see about six mounted men of the enemy off in that direction (points out the location toward the flank).

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hodges, how do you size up the situation now?”

Captain Hodges: “I estimate that the mounted men are the survivors of the patrol that we fired on. They are working around to the flank of the column to secure information of the strength and composition of our main body. Having this information, it is my job to get it back to the advance party commander as soon as possible in order that proper measures may be taken to beat off the enemy patrol and keep him from getting the information he wants. I would send a verbal message back by Alley, who is marching just behind me in the point.”

The Director: “Now, let us assume that I am Private Alley. Give me the message that you would send back.”

Captain Hodges: “I would fall back to where Alley is marching, and as we walk along say to him:

“‘You see those mounted men over there? They are the patrol we fired on. Go back to Lieutenant W and show him where you saw them. Tell him they are working around our flank to get in touch with the main body. Come back to the point when you can.’”

The Director: “I think that will cover the situation. Are there any questions?”

Advance Guard Card No. 5

Director’s Key

1. Hand out slips bearing situation No. 5. Read situation and point out places mentioned.

2. Estimate of situation. Reconnoitering patrol. Action of enemy.

3. Action taken by point commander. Get point in formation and on road.

4. Sending out patrol from point.

5. Message to advance party commander. State message.

6. State verbally problem re enemy on the flank. Make solution. Send message back to Lieutenant W.

Procedure

The slips bearing Special Situation No. 6 are passed out to the members of the class.

The Problem

Situation No. 6:

You, Lieutenant W, with the advance party, have arrived at this point. Private Alley comes to you with a message from Sergeant Roberts and points out the place where the enemy was a few minutes ago. You already have the message from Sergeant Roberts delivered by Private Bailey.

Required:

What action do you, Lieutenant W, take?

Procedure

The Director reads the situation and explains that each member of the class is to now consider himself as being Lieutenant W.

Solution

The Director: “Captain Jones, what would you do under the circumstances?”

Captain Jones: “In the first place, the enemy’s patrol is trying to work around our flank to get in touch with our main body. The question to my mind is: Is it the job of the advance party to try and prevent this? We can hardly be expected to send patrols from the advance party so far afield. It will require a patrol of at least a squad, and probably two of them, to accomplish such a mission. It would seem to me that the task should be left to the support. I would, therefore, get word back to the advance guard commander of what is going on and he would send out the necessary patrols. In the next place, it will be necessary to investigate the place where the enemy was when our point fired on him and secure an identification if possible. This is close-in reconnaissance and may be undertaken by the advance party. I would send a patrol of three men under a corporal for the purpose.”

The Director: “How would you get the message back to Captain A?”

Captain Hodges: “Private Alley has been with the point. He has seen all that has taken place up there. I would send him back with the message to Captain A. In order that Sergeant Roberts may know what action is being taken I would send Bailey to him with a message.”

Captain Jones: “Would you make these written or verbal messages?”

Captain Hodges: “They would be verbal messages.”

Explanation

The Director: “This is a point I want to bring out. The platoon commander will seldom have time to write messages. He must depend upon his men, and especially his runners, to see for themselves what is going on so that when it is desired to send information back all the platoon commander has to do is to turn to one of his runners, give him a few words of a message, and the runner is off to make his report. He will not only carry the message, but he will give accurate information of what is going on. The careful training of runners will repay the trouble in large dividends when the time comes.

“In the present situation I think it would be well for Lieutenant F to send one of his trained runners back to the captain with Private Bailey so that he can hear the captain’s orders and see just what he does to meet the situation. The runners will then return to Lieutenant W and tell him about it.”

Solution

The Director: “Now, Captain Hodges, let us assume that you are going to send Private Alley back with the message; just what instructions would you give him?”

Captain Hodges: “I would say to Private Alley:

“‘You go back to the captain. Repeat your message to him. Tell him about what happened at the point during the halt. Tell him I am sending a patrol to investigate the place where the enemy was fired on.’

“I would adopt the Director’s suggestion and send one of my runners with Private Alley. I would say to him:

“‘You go with Private Alley to the captain. See what he does to meet the situation, hear his orders, and bring back information of all this to me.’”

The Director: “That appears to cover the situation very well. Lieutenant Baker, what message would you send to Sergeant Roberts?”

Lieutenant Baker: “I would say to Private Bailey, who was present when I gave Private Alley his instructions:

“‘Go to Sergeant Roberts and tell him what I have done to meet the situation.’”

The Director: “Let us assume that you have selected Corporal Jansen as the patrol commander to investigate the place where the enemy was fired on. Corporal Jansen has reported to you. What orders do you give him, Captain Hall?”

Captain Hall: “As we march along I would say to Corporal Jansen:

“‘You have heard the message just brought back by Private Bailey. Take the front rank of your squad and reconnoiter the edge of that wood (pointing). An enemy identification is especially desired. Report the facts to the battalion commander when he comes up. Rejoin the advance party when you can.’”

The Director: “I think these orders cover the situation admirably. I hope you all now appreciate the multitude of little problems that come up for solution in the course of a tour of advance guard duty.”

Advance Guard Card No. 6

Director’s Key

1. Hand out slips bearing Situation No. 6. Explain that each man is now to consider himself as being Lieutenant W.

2. Discussion of enemy patrol. Reconnaissance from advance party—from support.

3. Messages sent back by Sergeant Roberts.

4. Relay messages to Captain A.

5. Training of runners and messengers.

6. Messages of Lieutenant W to Captain A and Sergeant Roberts.

7. Orders for patrol to investigate place where enemy was fired on.

Procedure

The class is now conducted along the route of march, for a distance of several hundred yards, to a place where entirely new terrain is available and where the lay of the land is such that a march outpost may be established.

The class is halted and the Director passes out the slips bearing Situation No. 7.

The Problem

Situation No. 7:

It is assumed that the advance guard has been marching for two hours since the march was resumed after the enemy patrol was encountered. During this time enemy scouts have been observed from time to time, but they have not attempted to interfere with the march of the column.

You, Captain A, are marching at the head of the support. When you arrive at this point the signal “HALT” is received from the rear. You halt and relay the signal forward. A moment later the battalion adjutant joins you and states: “The column will halt for one hour. The major directs that the advance guard provide for the security of the command for that time.”

Required:

What action do you, Captain A, take?

Procedure

The Director reads the situation aloud and makes any explanation that may appear to him to be necessary.

Explanation

The Director: “When a column on the march halts for any considerable length of time the advance guard continues its covering duty by forming march outposts. These are simply patrols sent out to the front and flanks, a certain distance, where they halt and remain there until ordered to continue the march or until they are recalled.

“The advance party usually furnishes these patrols which are sent out on the routes by which the enemy may approach. The support is posted at some central point from which it may readily reinforce any group that may be threatened by the enemy.

“In a situation like this the question always comes up as to how the advance guard commander will issue his orders for the establishment of the march outposts—that is, whether he will do it by a message to the several elements or whether he will issue an order and have copies made and sent out.

“If the message system is employed, the advance guard commander will have to include the new information of the enemy and our own troops and give the order to the element. All of this is accomplished by issuing a simple five paragraph order and sending it out. This is more expeditious than message writing. The commander has all the information he requires, and he is given definite instructions as to what he, himself, is to do. The order method is favored.”

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hall, how do you size up the situation?”

Captain Hall: “The mission of the advance guard now is to continue to provide protection to the main body by establishing a march outpost. Enemy scouts have been observed from time to time, but they have not interfered with the march. We have no information regarding any considerable force of the enemy.

“Our main body is halted and will remain so for at least an hour. Our advance guard is so disposed that it will be able to take up its new formation without confusion. The advance party can cover the main road and, in general, the head of the column. Our patrols, of which I assume there are two on the exposed flank, will form march outguards and protect that flank. I would send out another patrol of one squad to cover the other flank and prevent enemy scouts from working around there and observing the main body.

“My decision is to form a march outpost.”

The Director: “What Captain Hall has said constitutes Captain A’s ‘Estimate of the Situation.’ These are the points that would flash through his mind as soon as he gets the information that the halt is to be made. Lieutenant Barry, what is now necessary to put the decision into effect?”

Lieutenant Barry: “It is necessary to issue an order.”

The Director: “How would you go about this?”

Lieutenant Barry: “I would assemble the two platoon commanders, the platoon sergeants and the first sergeant, and have them write down my order in their message books. This would give me a sufficient number of copies for all purposes.”

The Director: “This shows the necessity for a company commander having some means whereby several copies of an order may be made by a duplicating process—carbon paper. I believe the plan of having the first sergeant or a clerk carry a duplicating book would solve the problem. Now, Lieutenant Hunt, you may dictate Captain A’s order.”

Lieutenant Hunt: “In order to save a repetition and at the same time let all of the company with the support know what is going on I would have the men give me their attention. My order would be:

“‘There is no further information of the enemy. Our battalion halts for one hour.

“‘The advance guard will establish march outposts.

“‘The advance party will be posted on the main road and cover the head of the column.

“‘The two flank patrols on the —— flank will be posted as march outguards and cover that flank.

“‘Sergeant Hamilton with the Fourth Squad, 2nd Platoon, will establish a march outguard on the —— flank in the vicinity (point out location) and cover the —— flank of the column. The support will be posted here.

“‘Messages to Support.’”

The Director: “That seems to cover the situation. Now, how would you get this order out to all the people to whom it should go?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would send it to Lieutenant W by a runner. I would send it out to the flank patrols by the section guide of the 3rd Platoon and direct him to make an inspection of the dispositions out there so as to make sure they are in position to carry out their mission. I would send it to the battalion commander by a runner.”

The Director: “So much for the distribution of the order. What would you do now, Lieutenant Barry?”

Lieutenant Barry: “I would now see that Sergeant Hamilton gets started on his mission, and then I would post sentinels at the support to watch out for signals from the various detachments that are out.”

The Director: “I believe that would meet the situation very well.”

Explanation

The Director: “Before terminating this Terrain Exercise I want to invite the attention of the members of the class to the multitude of small details that infantry commanders have to attend to in a problem so simple as the one we have had under consideration today. Let us suppose we have an active and aggressive enemy opposing our advance, and you can see how these details would multiply. The point I want to bring up is that, unless officers and non-commissioned officers prepare themselves for this duty by study and practice, they have not a chance of being able to meet these problems intelligently in active service. You must know what to do under any given situation, and you must know how to go about doing it. The commander who hesitates, gives his orders and then changes them several times, soon loses the confidence of his men and will eventually find himself replaced by another man who has taken advantage of his opportunities to learn the game and has the ability to carry it out. The best way I know of to acquire this knowledge is by actual practice along the lines that we have gone today.”

Advance Guard Card No. 7

Director’s Key

1. Hand out slips bearing Situation No. 7. Read situation and make any necessary explanations.

2. Explain what advance guard does when the column halts. State relative advantages and disadvantages of message and order systems.

3. Estimate of the situation, mission, enemy, own troops, plans of action, decision.

4. Captain A’s orders. Five-paragraph order. Distribution of order.

5. Remarks on necessity for study and practice.

Terrain Exercise No. 6.
A Flank Guard

The Problem

Special Situation—Blue:

A regiment of Blue infantry, operating in hostile country, is marching on the (a)-(b) road, towards (c).

The support of the advance guard, composed of Companies A and B (less 1 platoon, Company B), is this time at (d). The reserve, consisting of the remainder of the battalion, is following at a distance of about 400 yards and the main body follows the reserve at a distance of 500 yards.

A (e) flank guard, consisting of the 3rd platoon, Company B, has arrived at this point (f) marching on the (g)-(h) road.

A force of the enemy is reported in the vicinity of (i) and detachments of mounted men have been operating in the direction of (j).

Situation No. 1:

You, Lieutenant A, commanding the (e) flank guard, and marching at the head of the main body of your command, have arrived at this point (f).

Required:

What is the formation of your (e) flank guard at this moment?

(Note.—The platoon is organized in accordance with column 8 T. O. 28-W. See Appendix I.)

Explanation of Letter Symbols

(a)-(b) The road on which the Blue regiment is marching. In military orders and problems roads are designated by naming places located on them. For example, the Longs-Emmitsburg-Fairplay road would mean the main road passing through these places. When military maps are made all cross-roads and road-forks should be numbered and all hills and other prominent topographical features either designated by their local names or given letter designations. This will greatly facilitate their designation in orders and messages. When maps have grid lines on them the location of points may be designated by the use of coordinates.

(c) Some point, a number of miles distant, in the direction in which the troops are marching.

(d) The point on the main road where the support of the advance guard of the column has arrived. It should be about abreast of (f), (see below).

(e) The designation of the flank guard, right or left.

(f) The point at which the flank guard is supposed to have arrived. The point where the Terrain Exercise is to begin.

(g)-(h) The road on which it is intended that the flank guard is to march and along which the Terrain Exercise is to be conducted. This road should lie approximately parallel to and not more than a mile distant from the road on which the main body is marching. If no such network of roads exist, the Director may explain to the class the conditions and assume that the nearest road is about a mile distant and work out the problem on that assumption. This procedure strains the situation a little and robs it of some of its reality. The members of the class will have to make the best of it and will have to draw upon their imagination to picture it.

(i) A locality some miles distant in the direction of which the Blue force is marching.

(j) Localities or places some distance to the flank of the Blue force and in the direction of the road on which the flank guard is marching.

Procedure

The members of the class are conducted to (f) where the Terrain Exercise is to begin.

The Director distributes the sheets containing the Special Situation Blue and the Situation No. 1. A few minutes are allowed the members of the class to look them over. The Director then reads the problem aloud, the members of the class following from the copy in their possession, and makes such explanation as may be necessary. One or more members of the class are called upon to state their understanding of the tactical situation.

Explanation

The Director: “Before going ahead with this exercise I want to make a few remarks about a flank guard.

“Ordinarily the flanks of a column on the march may be protected by small patrols sent out from time to time from the advance guard. There are occasions, however, when patrols will not suffice, as in the present situation, where it is known that hostile troops are operating on the flank of our line of march. In this case it is necessary to send out a stronger detachment to march parallel to the route of the main body. This detachment is denominated a Flank Guard and is an element in the system of covering troops provided for the protection of a marching column.

“The flank guard marches abreast of the column and assumes the general formation of an advance guard, having a point thrown out to the front, followed by the remainder of the detachment, much as an advance party and support. Patrols are sent out to the exposed flank whenever necessary, and communication is maintained with the main body by means of small patrols or connecting files. In some cases it may be necessary to detach a small rear guard, as in the case where a flank guard has been attacked by a comparatively large force of the enemy and has taken up a position to hold them off until the main body can pass the danger point and the flank guard resume its march.

“The general duties of the flank guard are much the same as those of an advance guard; that is, to do everything possible to provide for the uninterrupted progress of the main body. All other duties are incidental to this and all have this prime object in view.”

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, into what parts is your flank guard divided at this time?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I would have an advance party and a support. Each element would consist of one section of three squads each. From the advance party a point consisting of one squad would be sent to the front.”

The Director: “Had you thought of a formation in which the whole platoon is kept intact as one body with only a point of one squad out in front?”

Lieutenant Williams: “Yes, sir. I had considered that possible formation and abandoned the idea because we can cover more road space with the formation that I have adopted and the more road space the flank guard can cover without undue dispersion the more of the column of the main body it covers and protects.”

The Director: “All right. Now let us assume that we adopt your formation of an advance party with a squad as point and the second section as a support. What is the formation of your point, Captain Hastings?”

Captain Hastings: “It would be in the ‘Boni Point’ formation, the men marching on alternate sides of the road with a distance of about 20 yards between them.”

The Director: “I think that formation would be just right for this occasion. What is the next element of the flank guard?”

Captain Hastings: “The connecting files, sir.”

The Director: “How many of them?”

Captain Hastings: “I would have two at least.”

The Director: “Wouldn’t one man be sufficient as a connecting file?”

Captain Hastings: “At this particular point one man would, but there are places on this road where one man would not be able to keep up the communication, and to make sure of that being done all the time I would detail two men. The duty is no more arduous than marching with the point or the advance party, and I do not consider that it is any hardship.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, what would be the distance from the rear man of the point to the head of the advance party?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “About two hundred yards.”

The Director: “What would be the distance from the advance party to the head of the support?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would have that about 350 yards.”

The Director: “You will want to keep in communication with the main body on the (a)-(b) road. How would you accomplish that?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would send out two men to march so that they can see the main body and the flank guard. I realize that they cannot do this all the time but they will be able to do it at sufficiently frequent intervals to keep both bodies informed if anything unusual happens.”

The Director: “Would you have a patrol out on the exposed flank at this time?”

(Note.—The answer to this question will depend upon the lay of the country on the exposed flank. If it is close, a patrol will be necessary. If it is open to the limit of effective rifle fire a patrol would not be necessary. In any event, the Director should bring out the principles stated below, at some point in the Terrain Exercise.)

“No, sir; I do not see the necessity for a patrol on the exposed flank at the present. We can see all the country to the limit of effective rifle range from the road, and I think a patrol there would be a waste of men. If, later on, the topography should demand it, I would send out such patrols as may be necessary. At what distance they would march from the column cannot be stated. It would depend entirely upon the country. They would have to go out far enough to see something more than can be seen from the road, if they are to be of any use.”

The Director: “You are exactly right. I think all the members of the class will agree with you. There is no necessity for wearing men out on flank patrol duty, beating their way over rough country and climbing fences, when they accomplish no useful purpose. Never order a disposition unless there is a sound tactical reason for it. Then when the time comes your men are ready to put forth superhuman efforts, if need be, to help you accomplish your mission. On the solution of these small problems in actual service rests your success or failure as a tactical leader of men. You must remember that it is the combination of these small tactical situations that go to make up the big maneuvers.”

The Director: “What would be the march formation of the support, Lieutenant Ralston.”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would have three squads in the support. I would have them march with a column of files on each side of the road. I would have two squads on this side of the road towards the enemy and one squad on the other side.”

The Director: “What are the advantages of this formation?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “It makes easier marching than in a column of squads; the column is not so vulnerable to enemy fire; if a deployment to the front is necessary it may readily be effected by deploying the leading squad of each column to the right and left respectively and deploying the rear squad of the column towards the enemy in rear of them. If a deployment to the flank towards the enemy is necessary it is practically already made for we have two squads on that flank now, and all the men will have to do is get a little more interval, the squad on the side of the road away from the enemy will get their proper interval and are in the right position for a small reserve; and deployments can be made without any confusion in case of sudden attack.”

The Director: “I think we can all agree that you have the proper formation. Now, I want each member of the class to draw a rough sketch of the road at this point and show on it the detailed formation of the flank guard. Make the scale large so you can show the details.”

Procedure

When the sketches are completed the Director distributes a mimeographed sketch showing the disposition of the flank guard in order that the members of the class may compare their sketches with it.

Flank Guard Card No. 1

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to place where the Terrain Exercise is to begin. Distribute the problem. Read and explain. Have members of class explain their understanding of the problem.

2. Explain necessity for employment of a flank guard:—protection of exposed flank; where march; formation; patrols; rear guard; duties.

3. Solution:—formation; advance party and support; covers more road space; dispersion; formation of point; connecting files; distances between elements; communication with main body.

4. Flank patrols:—necessity for; do not use except when necessary.

5. Marching formation of support. Advantages of column of files on each side of the road:—easy marching; invulnerability to enemy fire; deployments facilitated.

6. Have class make sketch; distribute sheets showing solution and compare with sketches made.

Procedure

The class is conducted along the road on which the flank guard is supposed to be marching to the point where a road leading from the flank where the enemy is reported, enters it. It may be assumed that the flank guard has marched a mile or more to reach this point.

The Director distributes the sheets bearing Situation No. 2, to the members of the class.

The Problem

Situation No. 2:

You, Lieutenant A, commanding the flank guard, and marching at the head of the support, are approaching this road fork. The flank guard is now marching abreast of the interval between the reserve of the advance guard and the head of the main body of the column on the (a)-(b) road. There has been no contact with the enemy.

Required:

What action do you take?

Procedure

The Director reads over the problem and makes such explanation as may be necessary.

The Director: “Captain Harvey, how do you size up the situation at this time?”

Captain Harvey: “The mission of the flank guard is the protection of this flank of the column marching on the (a)-(b) road, and provide for its uninterrupted progress. The enemy has been reported out on this flank (pointing). He will naturally take advantage of roads leading towards the Blue column to facilitate his operations. The road we are approaching leads from the direction of the enemy and must be watched until our main column has passed the danger point. We are marching abreast of the interval between the advance guard and the main body of our main column. This road will have to be watched until the main body passes beyond it. The road space occupied by the main body of the column would be about 2,900 yards, including field train of the regiment and excluding the combat train of the 1st brigade. The column will pass a given point at the rate of about 88 yards per minute. It will therefore take about 32 minutes for the main body to pass.

“My decision would be to send a patrol out on the road to the —— (direction).”

The Director: “Your estimate seems to cover the necessary points and I think we can agree that you have arrived at the proper decision. Just a mention of this ‘Estimate of the Situation.’ It is a logical process of thought involving the elements just mentioned by Captain Harvey, terminating in a tactical decision. This is what you have to do in the solution of all tactical problems. The patrol leader does it in every move of his patrol. The platoon as a flank guard requires the same process on the part of the platoon leader. The company commander, as commander of the advance party of an advance guard, must consider these same elements in the conduct of his covering detachment. It is the same with the battalion commander, the regimental commander, and on up to the commander of a division. When you are presented with a tactical situation for solution, figure out all the elements of it; your mission, your situation with respect to the enemy, the influence of the terrain, and then arrive at a clean-cut decision as to what you are going to do. Captain Hodges, what would be the strength of the patrol?”

Captain Hodges: “I would make it one squad. I think that would be about right.”

The Director: “Whom would you detail in charge of the patrol?”

Captain Hodges: “Sergeant Wilkins, the left guide of the platoon.”

The Director: “When would you issue your orders for the patrol?”

Captain Hodges: “As we march along I will call Sergeant Wilkins to the head of the support and give him his orders as we march along. That would do away with the necessity for halting the column while I am giving the orders.”

The Director: “Now, Captain James, tell us just how you would give the orders to the patrol and just what you would say.”

Captain James: “As we approach the cross-road I will call Sergeant Wilkins to join me. As we march along I will give him the orders for the patrol:

“‘We have not heard or seen anything of the enemy. Our flank guard is now marching abreast of the distance between the advance guard and main body of our column on the (a)-(b) road.

“‘You will take the sixth squad and patrol down the road we are approaching to the (direction) to cover the passage of the main body. Remain out about 35 minutes and then return. Catch up with the flank guard when you can.

“‘Messages to head of support.’”

The Director: “That seems to cover the situation very well.”

Lieutenant Baker: “It seems to me that if I were Sergeant Wilkins I would want you to indicate how far I am to go with the patrol. Can the Director enlighten us on that point?”

The Director: “Captain Hall, what do you think about the point that Lieutenant Baker brings up?”

Captain Hall: “Captain James told the Sergeant to stay out about 35 minutes. It seems to me that is sufficient. The Sergeant can keep tab on his time and judge his distance by that.”

The Director: “Yes, I think the time element is one thing, but there is another point that has not been mentioned. You do not want to hamper your subordinate with detailed instructions. It may be that there is a point on this road only a short distance out where Sergeant Wilkins has a good view over the country and a good position in case the enemy does come upon him. There would be no necessity for going on beyond such a point. If he had specific orders to go a certain distance he would feel that he had to do it. You give the Sergeant his mission, make him understand what he is out there for. Tell him about how long he is to remain out and then let him work out his own problem. You must not go into details. The moment you do so you get beyond your depth. You cannot foresee all contingencies. There has been only one military commander that was able to do this. He was the great Napoleon.”

Flank Guard Card No. 2

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class along road to point where there is a cross-road.

2. Distribute sheets bearing Situation No. 2.

3. Estimates of Situation:—Mission; enemy; own troops; plans of action; decision; discuss necessity for.

4. Selection of commander of patrol. How give orders to him.

5. Orders:—Enemy and own troops; detail troops for patrol; mission; how long stay out; messages.

6. Questions of distance to go out.

7. Discuss going into detail in order to subordinates.

The Problem

Situation No. 3:

As the column approached this cross-road the platoon commander calls you, Sergeant Wilkins, to him. As you march along he gives you the following verbal orders:

“We have not heard or seen anything of the enemy. Our flank guard is now marching abreast of the distance between the advance guard and main body of our column marching on the (a)-(b) road.

“You will take the sixth squad and patrol down the road we are approaching to the (direction) to cover the passage of the main body. Remain out about 35 minutes. Catch up with the flank guard when you can.

“Messages to head of support.”

The sixth squad, marching in column of files has arrived at this point with Corporal Jenkins at the head.

Required:

What action do you take?

Procedure

The Director distributes the sheets bearing the problem to the members of the class, and makes such explanations as may be necessary.

Explanation

The Director: “It is realized that it is probable that no member of this class will ever be called upon to actually conduct the operation of a small patrol such as we have here. It is, however, necessary for you to have a knowledge of just what is likely to happen to any patrol that you may have occasion to send out from a covering detachment of which you may be in command. It shows you the problem that may be put up to non-commissioned officers for solution and indicates in a most practical manner the necessity for their training and instruction.”

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Barry, let us assume that you are Sergeant Wilkins. Just what would you do on receipt of the platoon commander’s order?”

Lieutenant Barry: “I would step aside and as the sixth squad comes up I join it, marching abreast of the squad leader. As we get to the cross road I look at my watch to get the time. When the head of the squad reaches the cross-road I command:

“‘Sixth squad, FOLLOW ME.’

“I conduct the squad down the cross-road for a few yards and then command:

“‘1. Squad. 2. Halt.’”

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, we have the squad halted near the cross-road here where Lieutenant Barry has conducted it. Let us assume you have sized up the situation and are ready to issue your verbal orders to the squad. Just what would you say? I want you to give the exact words.”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would say:

“‘We have seen or heard nothing of the enemy. Our main column continues the march on the (a)-(b) road.

“‘Our flank guard is now marching abreast of the distance between the advance guard and the main body.

“‘This squad will cover this road until the main body has passed the cross-road to the —— (direction).

“‘Renolds will march on the right-hand side of the road. Shane will follow at a distance of 20 yards and march on the left-hand side of the road.

“‘The rest of the squad except Halley, follow me.

“‘Halley will follow at a distance of 50 yards as get-away man.

“‘Signals to me.

“‘MOVE OUT.’”

The Director: “Are there any comments on the order as given by Lieutenant Hunt?”

Lieutenant Williams: “It seems to me that it would be well to follow the Lieutenant’s order and tell the men how long we are going to stay out.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt will you please answer that comment?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I do not calculate that it makes any difference to the men of the squad. They should be told what they are going out for so that they may know the purpose of the patrol. But as for their having any information as to how long they are to stay out, I do not think it has a place in the order. That part of the order was only for Sergeant Wilkins.”

The Director: “I think you are right. The Lieutenant made a mental calculation of the time that it would take the main body to pass the danger point and specified that 35 minutes as the time the patrol should stay out. I do not think that is any concern of the men. Sergeant Wilkins might well tell it to Corporal Jenkins so if anything should happen to him he would know the orders. Any further comment?”

Lieutenant Williams: “Does the Director think that it would be proper to halt the squad to give them the orders?”

The Director: “Yes, I think that was the proper procedure. It is highly important that every man of the squad know what they are going out for. Time is not a specially important factor just now. Then, too, the squad must be gotten into patrol formation. I think time is saved by taking a minute or two to issue the orders and make sure that every man understands the mission. The men can then go about the work so much more intelligently.”

Flank Guard Card No. 3

Director’s Key

1. Distribute Situation No. 3. Read and explain.

2. Explain that no member of class will be called upon to lead a patrol of this kind, but they must know what happens when they send one out. Necessity for training of non-commissioned officers.

3. Action of Sergeant Wilkins. Get squad out of column and halt it.

4. Orders to patrol: Information of enemy and own supporting troops; plan of commander; tactical dispositions; signals.

5. Comment: How long to stay out; halting patrol for orders.

Procedure

The class is now conducted along the road on which the patrol is operating to the point selected for the next situation, where it is halted. The Director distributes the sheets containing Situation No. 4 and makes such explanation as may be necessary.

(Note.—The terrain selected for this and the following situations should be carefully selected for the purpose of bringing out the tactical features included in the solutions. In framing up the problem and fitting it to the ground the Director will do well to first select the terrain on which Situation No. 4 is to be carried out and then construct the problem back from this point.)

The Problem

Situation No. 4:

You, Sergeant Wilkins, have arrived at this point. Your patrol is in the formation originally adopted. Nothing has yet been seen or heard of the enemy.

Required:

What action do you take?

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hastings, you have arrived at a point which is sufficiently far out on the road to prevent the enemy from firing into the main body. You have here very good observation over the country to your front and flanks. You have a fairly good field of fire. As you know, only cavalry has been reported operating on this flank and on account of obstacles, wire fences, etc., their operations will be confined more or less to the roads. After considering all of these facts what is your reaction?”

Captain Hastings: “I can see no necessity for going further. I do not think anything more could be accomplished by doing so. From a position here we could certainly stop any small body and we could administer considerable punishment to a body as large as a troop if we caught them mounted on the road. I would take up a position here and make my disposition so as to cover the road.”

The Director: “Having decided to take up a position in this vicinity, just how would you do it, Lieutenant Wallace, where would you place your men?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “There is sufficient space on the road and at the sides of the road to accommodate the squad. I think I would place them so they can fire straight down the road.”

The Director: “What do you think of that solution, Lieutenant Ralston?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would not do it that way.”

The Director: “Why?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “Well, sir, the men would be too much exposed. Suppose the enemy appeared on the road with as much as a troop. We fire into him. Perhaps the hostile captain’s orders are to check the advance of our main body. He decides to take his losses and charges down the road. Our small detachment would be in a precarious situation, only eight men against an entire troop. The men know they have no means of getting out of the way. They would be thinking more of their own safety than of hitting the enemy. They would shoot wild, and the chances are that the squad would be ridden down and destroyed. On the other hand, if we put the men on the other side of the wire fences, they will know that a mounted charge cannot hurt them. They will have more confidence in their ability to stop it and the firing will be much more effective.”

The Director: “Then you would place your men on the other side of the fence, would you?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “Yes, sir.”

The Director: “On which side of the road would you place them?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “On both sides, sir. Half a squad on each side. This disposition would give me a good cross-fire on the road.”

The Director: “Have you any objections to that disposition, Captain Harvey?”

Captain Harvey: “Yes, sir. It divides the force and makes it very difficult for Sergeant Wilkins to control and direct the fire.”

The Director: “Captain Hodges, do you see any other objections?”

Captain Hodges: “Yes, sir. I would not only want all the men on the same side of the road but I would want them on this side (indicating the side in the direction of which the flank guard is marching). If it comes to the point where we are compelled to fall back we can do so directly on our own troops and not have to expose ourselves while climbing the fences and crossing the road. And the field of fire is about as good on this favorable side, too.”

The Director: “I think your points are well taken. Let us decide that we are to place the patrol in position on this side (indicate) of the road. Captain James just how would you go about it?”

Captain James: “I would get the men through the fence, and to the vicinity of the position that we are to take up.”

Procedure

The Director now conducts the class to the place where the position is to be taken up.

Solution

The Director: “Captain James, let us assume that you have gotten your squad here. Tell us just what orders you would give?”

Captain James: “I would say:

“‘There is no further information of the enemy. Our troops continue the march.

“‘We will take up a position here.

“‘Each man get into a good position along this line (indicating) where he has a good field of fire, especially on the road.

“‘Hasker, you keep a lookout towards the right flank.

“‘Elliott, you keep a lookout down the road.

“‘Johnson you keep a lookout towards the left flank.

“‘I will be here (indicate).’”

The Director: “I think that would cover the situation for the time being. Would you make any personal reconnaissance to the flanks?”

Captain James: “No, sir, I would stay right here. If anything happens I want to be here to direct my men. If I considered a flank reconnaissance necessary I would send Corporal Jenkins to make it.”

The Director: “You are right. Your place is right here with the squad at this time.”

Flank Guard Card No. 4

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class down the road on which patrol is operating.

2. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 4 and explain.

3. Location: Fire on main body; observation; field of fire; cavalry confined to roads; reaction.

4. Position: In road; both sides of road; one side of road.

5. Conduct class to side of road when position is to be taken up.

6. Orders: Information of enemy and own troops; plan; disposition; place of commander.

7. Flank reconnaissance.

Procedure

It is assumed that the patrol has taken up a position on the side of the road towards which the flank guard is marching.

The Director will indicate the exact position of each man so that all members of the class will enter upon the solution of the next situation on the same basis.

The Director will now distribute the sheets bearing Situation No. 5 to the class and make such explanations as may be necessary.

The Problem

Situation No. 5:

The patrol has occupied a position at this point. At this moment you, Sergeant Wilkins, observe a party of enemy cavalry approaching along the road at a trot.

Two troopers are in the lead; at a distance of about 75 yards two more follow; about 150 yards in rear there are four more troopers with short distances between them. Apparently they have not observed your patrol.

Required:

What action do you take?

Procedure

The Director will point out to the members of the class the position of each of the troopers at the moment. They should be far enough away to allow the orders of Sergeant Wilkins to be given.

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, what class of cavalry detachment do you estimate this to be?”

Lieutenant Baker: “I should say it is a contact patrol sent out from a larger body to reconnoiter. If it were the point of an advance guard we would now be seeing other troops farther to the rear of them.”

The Director: “What would you do?”

Lieutenant Baker: “I would open fire on the cavalrymen.”

The Director: “When would you open fire?”

Lieutenant Baker: “There are only eight of them. We have an ambuscade and ought to be able to bring down practically all of them. There would be no danger in letting them come close up.”

The Director: “How close would you let them come?”

Lieutenant Baker: “Well, sir, I would let the leading men come within 50 yards, if they would do so, before opening fire. The man farthest away would then be about 450 yards distant. I would assign a target to each man beginning at the right man taking the rear trooper and so on through the squad to the left. I would make it my particular business to see that no man passed this point.”

The Director: “Just what orders would you give? I want you to state the exact words that you would employ in meeting the situation.”

Lieutenant Baker: “As soon as I determine how close I am going to let the enemy come before opening fire I will order:

“‘Four men on right. Range: 450 yards. Target: Enemy cavalry on road, four men at rear of patrol. Renolds and Shane. Range: 300 yards. Target: Enemy cavalry on road, two men in center of patrol. Healy fire on second man. Corporal Jenkins take the leading man. When you get your man fire on the man next farthest away. Wait for my command to open fire.

“‘When the enemy patrol has advanced to the point where I have indicated the ranges I will command:

“‘Fire at will.’”

The Director: “Let us assume that the patrol came up the road and that you opened fire in accordance with your orders. The two leading men and one of the next group of two were brought down and one of the latter made his get-away. At least two of the last group were brought down. You have then inflicted five casualties on the patrol and the three remaining men got away. Now, Lieutenant A will hear the firing and will want to know what it is all about. How would you meet this requirement, Captain Hall?”

Captain Hall: “The action will be over in a minute. I would want to get an identification as soon as possible. I would say to Corporal Jenkins:

“‘Go out to the leading trooper we brought down and see if you can get an identification.’

While Corporal Jenkins is doing this I will call Halley, who is the expert semaphore man to me and say to him:

“‘Go back to the cross-roads and signal Lieutenant A:

“‘“Eight men, Sixth Cavalry fired on, disabled five of them, three got away.” Bring me any message that Lieutenant A may send.’

“I would assume that Corporal Jenkins secured an identification on the leading cavalryman. If he did not the message would be modified accordingly.”

Lieutenant Barry: “I do not understand why we go to so much trouble at this particular time to get an identification.”

The Director: “Suppose you were commanding the Blue force and you ran into the enemy in this locality. Cavalry troops are operating on your front and flanks. If the advance guard picks up an identification of the 6th Cavalry in its front, the flank guard does the same and we get our identification here. This information put together indicates to the Blue command that he is being opposed by a single regiment of cavalry and considering the front he is covering he cannot be very strong at any point. But suppose the identification of three different regiments are picked up. This puts a different aspect on the situation. Our commander would estimate that he is probably confronted by a cavalry division and his plans would have to be made accordingly. Make it a general rule that you secure an enemy identification when it is possible to do so. It may have little value at the time and again it may be most valuable. You play safe by getting it and sending it in.”

Lieutenant Barry: “I see the point.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, there are five dead or wounded men of the enemy lying out there in the road. Would you do anything about them?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “Except to secure the identification, I would not. The men of the enemy who made their escape probably did not have a very clear idea of where the fire came from and I would not want to surrender any of the advantages I now possess with respect to position and concealment. When the enemy learns of the disaster to his patrol he may send out a strong detachment to secure their dead and wounded and punish us. Our own main body is marching away from us and our position is becoming momentarily more dangerous. I could do nothing for the enemy wounded. They would have to stay where they are for the time being.”

The Director: “When do you estimate that you should leave here?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “In the absence of orders or other circumstances which I do not now see, I will leave here when the time designated by the flank guard commander is up.”

The Problem

The Director states the following situation orally:

“At this moment you hear quite heavy firing which you estimate comes from the direction of the main body. There are a few shots from the direction of the flank guard. The time you were ordered to remain out here is about up.”

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, how do you size up the situation now?”

Lieutenant Williams: “Our original mission was to cover this road for a certain number of minutes. That time is about up now when we will have completed the mission. New conditions have arisen which could not have been provided for when Lieutenant A gave us our original orders and a new situation confronts us. It would seem to me that our mission would now be to ‘continue to cover the road.’

“From the firing we have heard, it is possible that our main body has run into a considerable force of the enemy on the main road. If this is a Cavalry force covering one of Infantry it will soon transfer its activities to the flanks and try and cut in on the flanks of our main body. Under those circumstances our flank guard will have a very important role to play. The road that we are on leads directly to the flank and rear of our main body and must be guarded for the time being. The fact that we have already encountered the enemy indicates that he intends to make use of it if practicable and the presence of even our small force here will make him more cautious and delay and hamper his operations. If our main body has run into only a small Cavalry force of the enemy it will be quickly brushed aside and the situation will be cleared up in a few minutes.

“After considering all of these circumstances, I think Sergeant Wilkins’ decision would be to remain here and continue covering this road.”

The Director: “I think you are right. Now, having arrived at that decision, what are you going to do next, Captain Hastings?”

Captain Hastings: “The men would be looking to me for instructions. I would say:

“‘It is apparent that our main body has encountered a force of the enemy. It is possible that our flank guard has halted.

“‘We will remain here for the present.

“‘Shane, you will keep on the look out for the enemy.

“‘Take off your packs and put them on the ground behind you.

“‘Secure your intrenching tools and each man improve his firing position.

“‘I will remain here.’”

The Director: “I think that order would meet the immediate requirements.”

Procedure

The Director will bring out the points involved in the preparation of the position for defense. This will depend entirely upon the terrain. By questioning members of the class and a discussion the method of preparing certain of the individual fire positions will be arrived at. The question of obstacles in the road to interfere with the enemy’s advance should also be considered and discussed.

Flank Guard Card No. 5

Director’s Key

1. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 5. Read and explain.

2. Estimate of enemy. Contact patrol. Action—open fire on enemy. How close to let them come. Fire orders.

3. Assumption regarding action of patrol and enemy. Identification.

4. Message to flank guard commander. Importance of identification.

5. Action with respect to enemy dead and wounded.

6. State new situation verbally. Main body encounters enemy. Size up new situation.

7. New mission of patrol. Decision to remain where it is.

8. Orders for patrol: Information of enemy and own troops; remain here; look out for enemy; take off pack; prepare for defense.

9. Bring out points involved in preparation for defense. Improvement of firing position. Obstacles.

The Problem

Situation No. 6:

Halley returns to the patrol. He reports that he sent the message to Lieutenant A, and that it was acknowledged. He received the following message from Lieutenant A for Sergeant Wilkins:

“Advance guard meets strong opposition on main road—Cavalry. Main body halted. Flank guard halts abreast of head of main body. Your patrol will cover cross-road. Corporal Vincent being sent to you with his squad.”

Required:

What do you, Sergeant Wilkins, do?

Procedure

The Director distributes the sheets containing Situation No. 6 to the class and makes such explanation as may be necessary.

Solution

The Director: “What action would you now take, Lieutenant Wallace?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “In the first place, I would not want Corporal Vincent’s squad to come out here on this road. I have been thinking for some little time about the fact that there are no troops back at the cross-roads where we turned off from the flank guard. The enemy finding his efforts blocked on the roads leading toward our main body will find that opening sooner or later. I would want Corporal Vincent to take up a position near the cross-road and cover the approaches from the —— (direction). I would send Halley back to the cross-roads with a message to Corporal Vincent to that effect.”

The Director: “I think that is a proper move on your part. The cross-road certainly needs to be covered. We will assume that Halley has left with your message to Corporal Vincent. Would you take any other action at the time?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “Yes, sir. The men would know that Halley has come back with some information. I would give the information to the men in order that they may know. I would tell them of Corporal Vincent’s squad coming back to reinforce us and inform them of what I intend to do with it.”

The Director: “I think you are right in giving this information to your men. They can go about their task more intelligently. Would you go back to the cross-road to inspect Corporal Vincent’s position after he had made his disposition, Lieutenant Ralston?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “The flank guard commander has charged me with the defense of the cross-road. He has given me Corporal Jenkins’ and Corporal Vincent’s squads for the purpose. It is just as important that I know from personal observation what arrangements are made for the defense of the main road as it is on this flank. I would turn over the defense of this position to Corporal Jenkins and then go back and inspect Corporal Vincent’s dispositions.”

The Director: “I think you are right. Are there any questions by any member of the class?” (The Director will answer any questions that may be brought up.)

Flank Guard Card No. 6

Director’s Key

1. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 6. Read and explain.

2. Decision with respect to Corporal Vincent’s squad. Cover the cross-road.

3. Message to Corporal Vincent.

4. New information received from flank guard commander given to men.

5. Inspection of Corporal Vincent’s position.

Procedure

The class is now conducted back to the cross-road where Situation No. 7 is distributed by the Director.

The Problem

Situation No. 7:

You, Corporal Vincent, commanding the 5th squad, have arrived at this point. Here you meet Halley, who delivers the following message to you from Sergeant Wilkins:

“No further information of the enemy. Corporal Jenkins’ squad has taken up a position on the road leading to the flank about —— yards from the cross-road.

“You will take up a position on the road on which the flank guard is marching covering the cross-road.

“Messages to cross-road.”

Required:

What action do you, Corporal Vincent, take?

Procedure

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the class to consider himself as being Corporal Vincent. You have just arrived here with your squad and received the order of Sergeant Wilkins. It is up to you to select the point where you are going to place your squad to cover the road. I want each of you to solve this phase of the problem independently. Make a rough sketch showing the position, and write out the orders that you will issue as squad commander. Twenty minutes will be allowed for the purpose. It is now —— (state time).”

At the end of twenty minutes the class is assembled. The solutions are collected and redistributed. One or more members are called upon to read the solution he has in his possession.

The position will then be selected and the Director will give a statement of the orders that would be issued. This may have been previously prepared for distribution to the class as “a solution.”

The solution of each member of the class is returned to him in order that he may compare it with the solution submitted by the Director.

Explanation

The Director: “This is the termination of this Terrain Exercise. Let us see what we have gotten out of it—of what tactical benefit it has been to us.

“The first situation was devised to show you the tactical necessity for a flank guard, the duties that devolve upon it, and the formation that is best calculated to enable it to carry out its functions.

“The second situation was devised for the purpose of illustrating the necessity for covering approaches by which an enemy may cut in on the main body of a column and delay or annoy it. Further, the method employed in giving orders and instructions while continuing to march.

“The third situation was devised to give you experience in giving orders to and conducting a combat patrol along the road.

“The fourth situation brings out the elements contained in a tactical ‘estimate of the situation’ and the selection and occupation of a small position.

“The fifth situation was devised to give you practical instruction in the methods of troop leading; rendering a quick decision on the appearance of the enemy and handling a squad in action. Also in making an estimate of the situation and rendering a decision when your mission has been carried out and circumstances which could not have been foreseen have arisen and it is necessary to embark on a new mission on your own initiative and without orders—in other words, when a man is thrown upon his own resources and has to decide for himself what he is going to do.

“The sixth situation was devised for the purpose of placing the members of the class on their own responsibility in the selection of a position for the defense of a particular point and make practical use of the knowledge they had gained in the solution of Situations Nos. 4 and 5.

“It is by the constant practice in solving these situations on the ground that we gain that confidence in our ability to handle them when we have troops actually present. The idea of these Terrain Exercises is that you come out here and work out the solution without troops. Then after you have learned how, you bring your troops out and take them through the problem according to the solution that you have worked out in the Terrain Exercise.

“I am sure that any of you are now more competent to handle the operations of a flank guard and a force sent out to cover a particular point. I am sure that you would have a very good idea of what to do if in actual service you were confronted with situations similar to those we have considered in our exercise today.”

Flank Guard Card No. 7

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class back to cross-road.

2. Distribute Situation No. 7. Read and explain.

3. Solution of situation. Each member of class consider himself as being Corporal Vincent. Select position, make sketch, write out orders.

4. At end of twenty minutes collect solutions. Read one or more of them. Arrive at solution. Distribute solution to the class.

5. Explain purpose of each situation. Necessity for flank guard; covering approaches; giving orders on march; conduct of small patrol; estimate of situation; selection of position; troop leading and rendering quick decisions; changing to new mission; solution of problem on own responsibility.

Terrain Exercise No. 7.
Posting an Outpost

The Problem

General Situation:

The (a) forms the boundary between hostile states. A Blue force is concentrating at (b). Red troops have been reported in the direction of (c).

Special Situation—Blue:

A Blue detachment consisting of one regiment of Infantry has been sent out toward the border as a covering force. It is disposed as follows:

The regiment (less 2nd and 3rd Battalions) on the (d) road; 2nd Battalion on the (e) road; 3rd Battalion on the (f) road.

The 2nd Battalion marching on the (e) road, with Company E as advance guard, has reached (g), where the battalion commander decides to halt for the night. It is now 3 o’clock p. m. The column has halted, and the company commanders have assembled at this point.

The battalion commander issues verbal orders as follows:

“Small detachments of the enemy have been reported at (h) and (i). Our 3rd Battalion is halted for the night at (k); our regiment (less 2nd and 3rd Battalions) is halted for the night at (l).

“This battalion halts for the night at (m). March conditions cease.

“The advance guard will furnish the outpost along the line (n).

“The remainder of the battalion will bivouac, Company F at (o); Company G at (o); Company H at (o); Headquarters Company at (o). In case of attack the outpost will be supported.

“The field trains will join the troops.

“Messages to (p).”

(Note.—Company E is organized in accordance with T. O. 28-W. See Appendix 1.)

Explanation of Letter Symbols

(a) In designating the boundary line, some natural topographical or geographical feature should be selected, such as a river, creek, canal, crest of a ridge, etc. In this problem it may be assumed that the halt of the battalion for the night is made just within the boundary or across the boundary in enemy territory. The choice will depend upon the location of suitable ground for the outpost with a view to bringing out the elements involved in the posting of the outpost.

(b) A point within friendly territory. Should be a march or two from the boundary.

(c) A point within enemy territory. Should be a march or two from the boundary.

(d), (e), (f) Detachments are sent out to cover the concentration of troops when the concentration is made at a point where there is danger that the enemy may attempt to interfere with it. Such detachments proceed toward the border on the main routes by which the enemy must advance. (d) Would be the next main road to the left of the road (e) on which the 2nd Battalion is advancing; (f) would be the next main road to the right of the road on which the 2nd Battalion is advancing. This places the 2nd Battalion in the center of the formation.

(g) A point in the vicinity of the place where the Terrain Exercise is to be conducted.

(h) and (i) The places where the enemy troops are reported to be. They should be several miles away from (g), where the battalion is to halt for the night.

(k) The place where the 3rd Battalion halts for the night.

(l) The place where the regiment (less 2nd and 3rd Battalions) halts for the night. The three places where the battalions halt should form a general line covering the place where the Blue forces are concentrating.

(m) The place where our battalion bivouacs for the night.

(n) Indicate the general line that the outpost is to occupy. If it is impossible to do this it may be stated as follows: “Covering the approaches from the (south, north, etc.).”

(o) Designates the locality where each of the companies of the battalion is to bivouac for the night. The companies should be separated, and there should be cover from aerial observation if practicable.

(p) The headquarters of the battalion.

The Problem

Situation No. 1:

You, Captain E, are in command of Company E, which is now the advance guard, and has been designated to form the outpost for the night. Your company is in advance guard formation on the road.

Required:

The action you, Captain E, take and the orders you issue.

Procedure

The members of the class are assembled at (m) (see explanation of symbols), where the battalion is to halt for the night.

Explanation

The Director: “Before taking up the problem for solution I want to make a few remarks on the subject of the protection of a body of troops while in bivouac, and to review briefly the duties and formation of an outpost.

“As a command on the march protects itself from surprise by covering detachments called advance guards, flank guards and rear guards, so also does a command at a halt protect itself by a system of covering detachments denominated outposts.

“Duties.—Like advance guards on the march, the outpost is charged with the duties of observation and resistance.

“Specifically these duties are:

“1. To protect the main body so that the troops may rest undisturbed.

“2. In case of attack, to check the advance of the enemy long enough to enable the main body to make dispositions to meet him.

“3. To reconnoiter the enemy, prevent his reconnaissance and give timely warning of the approach of hostile bodies.

“Subdivisions.—The outpost is divided into two general lines. The first, which is called the ‘line of observation,’ does the watching for the enemy and prevents his small bodies from getting any information about our troops or annoying them. The second is a ‘fighting line,’ which holds off larger bodies.

“These lines must cover the front and flanks of the troops at rest. The ‘watching line’ must be so located that the watchers out in front will be able to see the enemy before he gets close enough to do damage. The ‘fighting line’ must be so located that it will have what we call a ‘good field of fire;’ that is, the ground in front must not be such that it will hide the movements of the enemy and allow him to get within effective rifle range without coming under our fire.

“Formation.—The formation of an outpost may best be described by referring to an outstretched hand.

“Hold your left hand in front of you with the thumb and fingers extended and pointing to the front, palm of hand down.

“The wrist will be the location of the troops in camp or in bivouac.

“The knuckle joint of the second finger will be the location of the reserve of the outpost. This is the body of troops that is held out of the fight until the direction of the enemy’s main attack is developed, when it is thrown in to meet it, or to make what we call a ‘counter-attack.’ In very small outposts this reserve is usually omitted.

“The second joints of the fingers and thumb will mark the positions occupied by the ‘supports.’ These are the fighting troops and they occupy the fighting line of the outpost. From these supports, small detachments, which we call ‘outguards,’ are sent to the front.

“The first joints of the fingers and thumb will mark the positions of the outguards. These are classified as pickets, sentry squads and cossack posts. A picket consists of two or more squads and is posted so as to cover the most important route by which the enemy may come. The sentry squad consists of one rifle squad. The cossack post is composed of a non-commissioned officer and three men.

“The tips of the fingers and thumb will mark the line of the sentinels. These are the ears and eyes of the outpost system.

“The sentinels are sent out to the front from the outguards. A picket posts one double sentinel post for each of its squads. Each sentry squad is charged with maintaining one double sentinel post. The cossack post maintains a single sentinel who is posted nearby.

“Are there any questions?”

Procedure

The Director will endeavor to answer any questions that may be asked by the members of the class. After all questions have been cleared up, the Director will hand a copy of the problem to each member of the class. A few minutes are allowed for them to read it and get oriented.

The Director: “Please give me your attention while we go over the problem.”

The Director reads the problem aloud, each member of the class following from the copy in his possession. The direction of places mentioned are pointed out.

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, give a brief statement of the tactical situation as you understand it.”

Lieutenant Hunt states his understanding of the tactical situation. As he proceeds, the Director makes such explanations as may be desirable. One or more additional members of the class may be called upon to state their version of the situation. All of this is for the purpose of fixing the elements of the problem in the minds of the members of the class and prevent any subsequent misunderstanding of them.

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Barry, what do you estimate the mission of our battalion to be?”

Lieutenant Barry: “We are an element of the force sent out to cover the concentration of the Blue forces and prevent the enemy from interfering with it.”

The Director: “We have not yet gained contact with the enemy. Why do we halt at this time?”

Lieutenant Barry: “There may be one or more reasons for it. In the first place, we are a detachment of a larger force (our regiment), and it is probable that before we started out, instructions were given our battalion commander to halt in this locality, so as to be on the general line of all the covering troops.”

The Director: “That is correct. Our battalion must conform to the general plan of the operation.

“Before going further let us consider the process by which our battalion commander arrived at his decision to halt and make the disposition indicated in his order. He has sized up the situation with respect to his mission, the enemy, our own troops; considered the plans of action open to him and the enemy; and the terrain. Based on all of this he decides to halt for the night with the advance guard as the outpost and the other companies bivouacking as indicated in the order. Now, let us see how well this order conforms to the form laid down in Field Service Regulations. Captain Hall, what are the elements of an order as applied to the halt of a command on the march?”

Captain Hall: “The first part contains information of the enemy and our own troops. The next is the plan of the commander in general terms. In this case it is merely to halt for the night, with the added sentence to the effect that march conditions cease. Next comes the tactical dispositions in which each element of the command is given orders as to just what it is to do. The last section of this paragraph tells what action is to be taken in case the enemy should make an attack. Then comes the disposition of the trains or administrative arrangements, and finally the location of the battalion C. P. is indicated by telling where messages are to be sent. All of this is included in the order, and I should say that every essential point has been covered satisfactorily.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, why is Company E detailed to furnish the outpost?”

Lieutenant Baker: “It is the general rule that troops are detailed on covering duty for a period of twenty-four hours. Company E has been our advance guard for today’s march. If the battalion continues the march again tomorrow morning, another rifle company will be detailed to form the advance guard. It will get into advance guard formation before it reaches Company E’s outpost line, and when the advance guard support crosses the line of outpost supports it assumes responsibility for the protection of the column, the outpost troops are withdrawn and take their proper place in the column. Then, too, the advance guard is in the best position to continue the protection of the battalion. It has merely to change its formation from an advance guard to that of an outpost, which involves the least marching on the part of the troops.”

Procedure

The Director: “We will now go forward to the point where the support of the advance guard is halted on the road. How far would that be, Captain James?”

Captain James: “I should say that the support should be about 500 yards in advance of the main body of the battalion.”

The class is now conducted about 500 yards down the road to the place where the support of the advance guard is supposed to be halted.

The Director: “Before proceeding further with the problem it is necessary for us to decide upon the formation of the advance guard at this time. Just what do you think the formation would be, Captain James?”

Captain James: “The support would be right here in column of squads on the road. It would consist of the company (less one platoon and two connecting files). About 400 yards farther down the road would be the advance party, consisting of one platoon, from which there would be a point of one squad, about 150 yards farther to the front.”[9]

The Director: “I think we can all agree on those dispositions and proceed to the solution of our problem based on them. Now, let each member of the class consider himself to be Captain E, commanding the advance guard. You have attended the assembly of officers at the head of the main body and received the major’s orders. You have now returned to the company and are ready to go ahead with your part of the operation, that of posting the outpost. Just how are you going about the task that has been allotted to you? Captain Hodges, tell us what you would do.”

Solution

Captain Hodges: “I would first send a runner to Lieutenant M, commanding the advance party, telling him to report to me here. While waiting for Lieutenant M to come back I would size up the situation and decide upon my tactical dispositions.”

The Director: “What would be your primary dispositions?”

Captain Hodges: “I would have a line of supports on which I would employ one platoon and one section and a reserve consisting of the rest of the company.”

The Director: “That would be a reasonable disposition. How many supports would you have Captain Harvey?”

Captain Harvey: “I would have three supports—one on the main road and one at a suitable interval on each side of the road. There would be a section in each support.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, do you agree with that disposition?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “No, sir. It seems to me that two supports would meet the situation better. In the first place, this main road is the route on which any considerable force of the enemy must advance after dark, and I would want to cover it with a relatively strong force. I would put one support on the road and have it extend over to the right for a sufficient distance to cover the front and the immediate right flank. It would extend its front to the left of the main road. I would have support No. 2 off to the left to cover that flank.[10]

“Support No. 1 would consist of one platoon and No. 2 of one section.”

The Director: “Explain why you extend the front of your support No. 1 to the left of the road?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “So that the boundary line between supports will not fall on the road. One man must be made responsible for the covering of this main road, and if I make it the boundary line between supports, even if I include it in the front of one of them, it will be more or less neglected. But if I extend the front of support No. 1 beyond the road to the left, I am reasonably sure that it will be taken care of properly.”

The Director: “That is the point I wanted to bring out. I hope that all the members of the class see it. We have now to decide upon the troops to be designated for each of the supports. What would be your decision as to that, Lieutenant Wallace?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would have the first platoon, which now forms the advance party, form support No. 1 which will be posted on this main and cover the front from that —— (indicating right boundary of front) to that —— (indicating left boundary of front). The first section of the second platoon would form support No. 2. It would be posted at —— and cover the front from —— to ——.”

The Director: “That seems to be a reasonable disposition. Where would you have your reserve?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would have it posted at ——.”

The Director: “There is one point on which we have not yet touched. That is the matter of the covering of the posting of the outguards. What would you do about that, Captain Hastings?”

Captain Hastings: “I would let each support cover the posting of its own outguards. I believe they can do it better and more efficiently than any detachment that may be made from the rest of the company for the purpose.”

The Director: “Let us now assume that Lieutenant M has arrived and you are all ready to issue your orders. Just how would you go about it, Lieutenant Williams?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I would assemble the officers, platoon sergeants and section leaders in front of the company. I would give the command: 1. Company, 2. ATTENTION, and follow with AT EASE. I would then say: ‘Let me have your attention.’ I would issue my orders as follows:

“‘Small detachments of the enemy have been reported at (h) and (i) (indicating where the places are). Our 3rd Battalion is halted for the night at (k). Our regiment (less 2nd and 3rd Battalions) is halted for the night at (l). Our battalion halts for the night at (m) (point out location). March conditions have ceased.[11]

“‘This company furnishes the outpost along the (n) (point out general line).

“‘Lieutenant M, with the first platoon, will form support No. 1, which, posted on the road at ——, will cover the front from —— (inclusive) to —— (inclusive).

“‘Lieutenant N, with the second platoon (less one section), will form support No. 2, which, posted at ——, will cover the front from —— (exclusive) to —— (inclusive).

“‘The remainder of the company will be posted at —— as reserve.

“‘The rolling kitchen will be with the reserve. Meals will be cooked and distributed to the supports.

“‘Messages to the reserve.’”

Procedure

The Director: “You will note that the order given by Lieutenant Williams follows the form of the five paragraph order and covers all essentials. Are there any questions?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “It seems to me that we are imposing on the first platoon. They have been on advance party duty all day, and now we propose to keep them on front-line observation duty all night.”

The Director: “If the platoon had had any serious contact with the enemy during the day, it would have been proper to bring it back to the reserve, but they have just been marching along on the road. They have had practically no flank patroling to do and are in just as good shape as the rest of the company. I can see no reason for not detailing them for support duty tonight. The platoon is out in front, near the place where it is to be posted.

“Any other questions? There appear to be none.

“Now I want each member of the class to write out, on his pad, the order of Captain E. Try to get the proper form and wording for each sentence in it and cover the points brought out by Lieutenant Williams in his solution.”

The necessary time is allowed for this. The solutions are collected and redistributed. One or more members of the class may be called upon to read the solution in his possession and comment upon the wording and form of the order.

The Director will then distribute slips of paper containing the order of Captain E as given. This is done in order that each member of the class may compare his work with it and that the situations following and their solution may be based on it.

Outpost Card No. 1

Director’s Key

1. Prepare copies of the problem and Situation No. 1, also the solution to Situation No. 1, a copy for each member of the class.

2. Conduct the class to the point on the road where the battalion is halted and where it will bivouac for the night.

3. Make short talk on the protection of troops in bivouac and the formation and duties of outposts: (a) How a command protects itself at a halt; (b) Duties of outposts; (c) Subdivision of outposts; (d) Formation of outposts (illustrate by reference to outstretched hand), main body, reserve, supports, outguards, sentinels.

4. Distribute sheets bearing problem and Situation No. 1.

5. Read problem aloud and question members of the class on the tactical situation: mission of battalion; why halt; estimation of the situation; elements of field order; compare with battalion commander’s order; why Company E for outpost.

6. Conduct class to point where support of advance guard is supposed to be.

7. Discuss formation of advance guard. Each man now consider himself as being Captain E.

8. Discuss formation of outpost: Primary dispositions; number of supports; why support on main road; boundaries of support front; location of supports; location of reserve; covering posting of outguards.

9. Final solution of problem: Preliminaries; order of Captain E; five paragraph order; why first platoon forms one support.

10. Have members of class write out order. Collect solutions and redistribute them. Distribute copies of Captain E’s order. Read and discuss solutions.

Procedure

The class is now conducted to the point on the road where the advance party is supposed to be halted.

The Director: “We are now at the point where the first platoon, which is the advance party of the advance guard, is halted. Lieutenant M has joined his platoon and is ready to proceed with the execution of the task allotted to him.”

The Problem

Situation No. 2:

You, Lieutenant M, have joined your platoon here. The platoon has been designated to form support No. 1. The Captain’s order was as follows:

“Lieutenant M, with the first platoon will form support No. 1, which, posted on the road at ——, will cover the front from —— (inclusive) to —— (inclusive).”

Required:

Carry out your mission.

Procedure

The Director reads Situation No. 2 aloud and explains that each member of the class should now consider himself to be Lieutenant M, commanding the first platoon, designated to form support No. 1.

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, how would you go about carrying out your mission?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would first size up the situation and arrive at a decision as to what I am going to do and how I am going to do it.”

The Director: “How is security provided for during the time that the outpost is being posted?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “By sending out some troops to cover the posting of the outguards. This is sometimes provided for by the outpost commander detailing a unit for the purpose of covering all the outguards and then withdrawing to the reserve. The alternative is to have each support cover the posting of its own outguards. The latter system has been adopted in this problem, and we will have to provide our own covering troops.”

The Director: “What troops would you detail for this duty?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would send out the first section (less the squad on duty as point) under the section commander. I would have the point withdraw to the support as soon as the covering troops have taken over the duty of security.”

The Director: “That seems to be a reasonable solution. Into what parts is an outpost support divided, Lieutenant Barry?”

Lieutenant Barry: “Into the support proper and the outguards. From the outguards sentinels are posted.”

The Director: “What are the duties assigned to each of the component parts of the support?”

Lieutenant Barry: “The support proper is the fighting element of the outpost. It is posted on the line where the outpost will make its stand. The outguards with their sentinels from the observation element. They are posted on the line of observation.”

Captain Hall: “That may be the usual line up for the support. But is it not a fact that sometimes the outguards are posted on the fighting line?”

The Director: “Yes. It may be that the line of observation is also the best fighting line for the supports. In that case we say ‘the line of observation and the line of resistance coincide’—that is, they are the same. When we issue the order for the support we make provision for that by stating: ‘In case of attack the outguards will be supported.’ This means that the outguards will hold their positions and the supports will come up to them in case the enemy attacks.”

Captain Hall: “In that case, why not place the support right up on the line of resistance in the first place?”

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, can you answer Captain Hall’s question?”

Lieutenant Baker: “I believe I can give a reason for it. If we should place the support right up on the line of outguards we would commit it to one position, and in case of attack it would be difficult to move it to meet the enemy’s main effort. If we keep it at a central point to the rear of the line, we can readily move it to any point where it may be most needed.”

The Director: “You are right. We do not want to commit our support to action until we find out the direction of the enemy’s attack. The shifting of troops along a front line is a most difficult and hazardous operation. I hope you see the point, Captain Hall.”

Captain Hall: “Yes, sir. I do.”[12]

The Director: “How many outguards do you think are required on the front assigned to the support, Captain Jones?”

Captain Jones: “I should have one on the main road leading toward the enemy; another on the right of the road in the vicinity of —— (indicating); and another to the left of the road in the vicinity of —— (indicating). I think this would be sufficient for observation purposes.”

The Director: “Upon what main elements do you base the strength of these outguards?”

Captain Jones: “On the number of sentinel posts they must maintain. If a double sentinel post is required, a sentry squad should be allotted to the outguard. If only a single sentinel is required, the outguard should be a cossack post.”

The Director: “That is exactly the point I wanted to bring out. We will take it up in detail later on in the problem. Let us assume that three outguards will be required to cover the front. No. 1, on the right of the road, is to be a sentry squad; No. 2, posted on the road, is also to be a sentry squad; and No. 3, posted on the left of the road, is to be a cossack post. How many men in a cossack post, Captain Hodges?”

Captain Hodges: “A non-commissioned officer and three men. This number furnishes a commander for the post and three reliefs for a single sentinel post.”

The Director: “That is correct. Are there any questions on the points that we have been discussing?”[13]

Solution

The Director: “We are now ready to issue Lieutenant M’s order for the establishment of support No. 1. Captain Hodges, please tell us the first and second paragraphs of the order.”

Captain Hodges: “I would tell the men about where the enemy is and all I know about our own troops and then tell them what we are going to do.”

The Director: “All right. Now, assume that you are Lieutenant M, and the rest of us here are the members of your platoon. Put all you have said in the form of an order to us.”

Captain Hodges: “You want me to do everything I would do if I were Lieutenant M?”

The Director: “Exactly.”

Captain Hodges: “I would give the command: 1. Platoon, 2. ATTENTION, and order CLOSE UP. I assume that the men are in columns of files, one on each side of the road. I then give the command AT EASE, and caution the men, ‘Let me have your attention.’ I direct, ‘Noncommissioned officers assemble here.’ I then give the order for the establishment of the support as follows:

“‘Small detachments of the enemy have been reported at (h) and (i). Our 3rd Battalion is halted for the night at (k). Our regiment (less the 2nd and 3rd Battalions) is halted for the night at (l). Our Battalion halts for the night at (m). Our company furnishes the outpost with the second platoon (less one section) as support No. 2 at —— and the remainder of the company as reserve at —— March conditions have ceased.

“‘This platoon forms support No. 1.’”

The Director: “Captain Harvey, what does the third paragraph of the order deal with?”

Captain Harvey: “With the disposition of troops.”

The Director: “Will you state what you think should go into it?”

Captain Harvey: “Yes, sir. I think it should be as follows:

“‘Sergeant X, with the first section (less one squad), will cover the posting of the outguards, and on completion of that duty withdraw to the support.

“‘Corporal W, with the fourth squad, will form outguard No. 1, which, posted in the vicinity of ——, will cover the front from —— (inclusive) to —— (inclusive).

“‘Corporal V, with the fifth squad, will form outguard No. 2, which, posted on the main road at —— will cover the front from —— (exclusive) to —— (exclusive).

“‘Corporal T, with the front rank of the sixth squad, will form outguard No. 3, which, posted at ——, will cover the front from —— (inclusive) to —— (inclusive). Communication with outguard No. 1 of support No. 2 will be maintained.

“‘The remainder of the platoon will be posted at —— as support.

“‘In case of attack the outguards will be supported.’”

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, what elements does the rest of the order contain?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “The next paragraph contains the administrative arrangements. In the platoon the main thing is the messing of the men. They will all want to know about the arrangements for meals. I would say:

“‘Meals will be distributed to the outguards by details from the support.’

“The next item is the designation of the place where to send messages.

“Message to the support.”

“I would then direct: MOVE OUT.”

Procedure

The Director: “I believe we have gone over and discussed the salient features of the problem. Now, I desire each member of the class to write out Lieutenant M’s order on his pad. Try to get it in the proper form and use as far as possible the wording as stated by Captain Hodges, Captain Harvey and Lieutenant Ralston.”

When the written orders have been completed they are disposed of in the same manner as indicated under Situation No. 1.

Outpost Card No. 2

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to point on road where advance party is halted.

2. Hand out Situation No. 2. Read and explain that each member of the class is now supposed to be Lieutenant M.

3. Security while outpost troops are getting into position.

4. Main elements of support line—observation, resistance. When they coincide. Location of support.

5. Number of outguards required. Basis of strength of outguards; sentinel posts; sentry squads; cossack posts.

6. Details of Lieutenant M’s order. Information of enemy and own troops. Plan of commander. Disposition of troops: Three outguards, location, strength, front each is to cover, location of support, action in case of attack. Meals. Messages.

7. Have class write order. Collect solutions and redistribute them. Read and discuss solutions.

Explanation

The Director: “The next phase of our problem deals with the matter of covering the posting of the outguards. In the posting of the outguards there will unavoidably be more or less moving around and exposure to view of the enemy’s patrols, should any be lurking in the vicinity. The non-commissioned officers will be seeking out the best positions for their outguards, selecting observation posts for their sentinels and making arrangements for defense. The officers will be moving from point to point along the line making inspections, pointing out errors, rectifying the position of the various elements and making a sketch of the sector covered.

“In order that all of this may be accomplished in security, it is necessary to have covering detachments well out to the front to prevent small parties of the enemy interfering with the work in hand or making observations that would enable them to form an estimate of the position occupied by the outposts.

“There are two methods by which the covering force may accomplish its mission:

“1. It may deploy as a line of skirmishers at greatly extended intervals.

“2. It may cover the front with a number of small patrols.

“No hard and fast rule can be laid down that will provide for all contingencies. The first method has the disadvantage of being most difficult for the non-commissioned officers to control the action of the men. The second method possesses the great advantage of having each group directly under the control of a leader, so that in case the enemy’s patrols are encountered and it is necessary to drive them back, there can be concert of action instead of dependence on the decisions of individual men as to what is to be done in the emergency. The method to be employed will depend upon circumstances, the nature of the country, the number of men available for the duty and the proximity of the enemy. It may be advisable to use a combination of the two systems.”

The Problem

Situation No. 3:

You, Sergeant X, have been detailed to cover the posting of the outguards. Lieutenant M’s order to you is as follows:

“Sergeant X, with the first section (less one squad), will cover the posting of the outguards and on completion of that duty withdraw to the support.”

The troops have been turned over to you and you have been directed to move out.

Required:

Carry out your mission.

Procedure

The Director reads the situation aloud and calls upon one or more members of the class to state his understanding of it.

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the class to consider himself as being Sergeant X. You have your troops right here on the road and everything is ready to proceed with the work in hand. Just how do you go about carrying out your mission? Lieutenant Wallace, what is the first move you would make?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would want to get my men away from the rest of the platoon so I can give them their instructions without having their attention diverted by other things.”

The Director: “All right. Let us assume that you have done so and you have them right here. We are now ready to proceed. Go ahead with your solution.”

Solution

Lieutenant Wallace: “In the first place, I would not want the men to be burdened with their packs, so I would have them taken off and piled here.”

The Director: “Would you have them take off the entire pack? Tell us just what equipment they would carry.”

Lieutenant Wallace: “Only the rifle and belt.”

The Director: “Captain Hastings, do you agree with that?”

Captain Hastings: “No, sir. I would have the men take off only the rolls. I would have them carry the haversack with them. The Infantry pack is designed for this very purpose. We can relieve the men of the burdensome part of the pack and still retain the essentials. I do not believe a man should ever be without his haversack in the field.”

The Director: “You are correct. Let us assume that we have taken the rolls off and piled them here. Now, Lieutenant Wallace, what are you going to do?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I am going to give my orders. All the men of the section have heard the platoon commander’s orders about the enemy and our own troops, so there is no necessity for repeating them. The next thing is to tell the men what our mission is to be. I would cover this by the simple statement:

“‘This section (less the first squad) will cover the posting of the outguards.’

“I will now have to decide upon the formation that I am going to take up. The front to be covered is too extensive to be covered by a line of skirmishers, and besides I do not approve of such a formation. It is too difficult to control the operations. I would use the patrol method. Divide the section up into small patrols and keep a small support.”

The Director: “Captain Hastings, do you agree with such dispositions?”

Captain Hastings: “Yes, sir. I think the patrol formation is best. It has many advantages over the line of skirmishers.”

The Director: “How many patrols would you have?”

Captain Hastings: “I should have three patrols of a leader and three men each. This would account for the second squad and the front rank of the third squad. I would keep the rear rank of the third squad under my own control as a support.”

The Director: “Based on that disposition, what orders would you give?”

Captain Hastings: “I would say:

“‘Corporal D, take the front rank of your squad and move out to the right oblique in the direction of that ——.

“‘Private E, you are detailed as acting corporal. Take the rear rank of the second squad and move to the front along this road.

“‘Corporal F, take the front rank of your squad and move out to the left oblique in the direction of that ——.

“‘The rear rank of the third squad will accompany me. I will march 200 yards in rear of Private E’s patrol.

“‘Patrols will advance about 1,200 yards to the front. Keep in communication with me. Remain out until you receive orders to withdraw.

“‘Messages to me.

“‘Take charge of your patrols and move out.’

“I believe these orders would set the covering troops in motion.”

The Director: “I agree with you. Are there any questions? I assume that when no questions are asked every member of the class not only understands what is being done, but also the reasons for doing it that particular way. If there is ever any doubt in your mind about any part of the problem or the solution, you should ask questions and demand explanations until the matter is entirely cleared up.”

Procedure

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the class to write out Sergeant X’s orders on his pad. The information about the enemy and our own troops that has already been given to the men by the platoon commander need not be repeated. The first paragraph might be.

“‘You have heard what the platoon commander said about the enemy and our own troops. There is no further information.’”

When all the members of the class have completed writing the order the papers are collected and redistributed. One or more members may be called upon to read the order in their possession and comment upon it. The whole idea is to impress the solution of each phase of the problem so firmly in the minds of the members of the class that, in case they should ever be called upon in active service to meet a similar situation, they would know exactly how to go about it.

Outpost Card No. 3

Director’s Key

1. Explain necessity for covering the posting of the outguards. Formations that may be used: Skirmishers; patrols; advantages of patrol system.

2. Pass out problem and read it. Have members of class explain their version.

3. Disposition of packs. Keep haversacks. Remove rolls.

4. Orders: Information of enemy and own troops known. Second paragraph. Dispositions. Orders for patrols. Three patrols and support. How far to go out. When to return.

5. Asking questions.

6. Have class write out solution. Collect and redistribute solutions. Read and comment on solutions.

7. Explain object of problem.

Procedure

The class is now conducted down the road to the point where outguard No. 2 is to be posted.

Explanation

The Director: “The order of the platoon commander requires Corporal V, with the fifth squad, to post outguard No. 2 on the main road in this vicinity and covering the front from —— (exclusive) to —— (exclusive).

(Note.—The Director points out the limits of the front to be covered by the outguards.)

“There are some definite rules that may be laid down governing the location of an outguard. In the first place, the location within reasonable limits has been designated by the support commander in his order. We are to cover the main road leading from the direction in which the enemy is reported to be. The outguard should occupy a good defensive position—that is, it should have a good field of fire to the front and in oblique directions toward both flanks. It should be so far concealed that the enemy could not discover it without attacking.”

Procedure

Situation No. 4 is now handed out to the members of the class.

The Problem

Situation No. 4:

You, Corporal V, have been given the fifth squad, and ordered to establish outguard No. 2 in this vicinity. You have arrived at this point with your squad.

Required:

How will you carry out your mission?

Procedure

The Director reads the problem aloud and calls upon one or more members of the class to explain their understanding of it.

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the class to visualize this situation—to consider himself as being Corporal V. You have arrived here with your squad to establish outguard No. 2. Just how do you propose to go about it? Captain Hastings, what would you do?”

Captain Hastings: “Well, sir, I would first decide where I am going to post the outguard and then decide upon the number of sentinels I am to post and where I am to post them. I have the limits of the front assigned to me definitely pointed out. I must first find a location for the outguard that will cover this front.”

The Director: “Have you decided upon such a location?”

Captain Hastings: “Yes, sir. My outguard posted at —— would accomplish the desired results. In the first place, any considerable body of the enemy must travel at night on a well defined road or trail. He cannot strike off across country unless elaborate preparations are made for guiding his columns. We would know about any such preparations and could counter them. If I cover this main road and the country adjacent to it, I will be able to accomplish my mission.”

(Note.—The Director should bring out all the elements connected with the selection of the position of the ground in question. There will be many small points that may be brought up for consideration such as: Is the position selected a good one for defense? Is there a good field of fire? Is there cover for the enemy to conceal a formation for attack? Is the position naturally strong; if not, can it be made so? Can obstacles be so placed as to hold the enemy under effective fire of the outguard? Is there ground to the front or flanks within rifle or machine gun range that commands the position? Are there good approaches to the sentinel posts from the outguard? Is it possible to provide for mutual supporting fire with the other outguards? Are there good communications with the adjoining outguards and with the support? While it is not contemplated that an outguard position will fulfill all of these conditions, it should be selected so as to fulfill as many of them as possible.)

The Director: “In your discussion a minute ago you stated that you would determine the number of sentinels to be posted. Just what do you mean by that?”

Captain Hastings: “I will want to post a sufficient number of sentinels to keep the sector of the front allotted to me under observation at all times. I have not yet decided how many will be required.”

The Director: “That is just the point I wanted to bring out. The number of sentinels that you can post is determined by the strength of your outguard. You can post only one double sentinel post from a squad. If more than one is required your outguard must be allotted additional men for the purpose. Now, let us see how this proposition works out in practice. You have seven men besides yourself. This will provide three reliefs for one double sentinel post and give you one spare man. The outguard is to be on duty until the march is resumed tomorrow morning. You cannot expect to keep all the men on post all the time. They must have their rest if they are expected to march tomorrow. Sentinels are ordinarily on post for two hours, after which they are given a four-hour period of rest before going on post again. To do otherwise is to wear your men out and render them unfit for further service. Let us all get this system firmly fixed in our minds. A squad furnishes three reliefs for a double sentinel post. If only a single sentinel is required, a cossack post will furnish three reliefs for it. I hope you will all see the point.”

Captain Hastings: “I understand the system now. But, suppose I should determine that at least two double sentinel posts are necessary, what should I do?”

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, can you answer the captain’s question?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I would send a report to the platoon commander setting forth my views of the situation and request that another squad be sent to the outguard.”

The Director: “That would be a proper procedure. The initial disposition of the outguard is only tentative. Soon after the outguards are posted the support commander will be out to make his inspection of them. At that time the situation may be represented to him, and he can make his decision as to whether or not he deems it necessary to supply the additional men.”

(Note.—The exact location of the outguard should be decided upon at this time, and the tentative position of the sentinels should be determined.)

Solution

The Director: “We have decided upon the location of the outguard, and the dispositions to be made. It is now necessary to embody these in the form of orders to the members of the squad. Lieutenant Hunt, what should this order contain?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “Do you want me to give the entire order for the posting of the outguard?”

The Director: “Yes. If any point comes up that is not fully understood by a member of the class, he should feel free to interrupt with a question.”

Lieutenant Hunt: “The men have all the information about the enemy and our own troops. It is not necessary to repeat that. I would cover this by saying:

“‘You have heard the information about the enemy and our own troops. The first section is out in front covering the posting of the outguards.’

“I would then state the mission of the squad.

“‘This squad forms outguard No. 2 of support No. 1.’

“The tactical dispositions are next in order. The reliefs have to be told off and other arrangements made.”

“‘Hanna and Crow (riflemen), first relief; Smith and Carney (riflemen), second relief; Harris and Welch (riflemen), third relief; Rainer (automatic rifleman), spare man.

“‘Rainer, you select the tentative positions for your automatic rifle and get ready to prepare them for occupation.

“‘The members of the second and third reliefs will prepare the bivouac for the outguard and the firing positions which I will designate later.

“‘In case of attack we will be supported.’

“The administrative arrangements are simple. They will relate to the messing of the men.

“‘Meals will be sent up from the support.’

“Then the location of the outguard commander will be stated:

“‘Messages to me, here.’

“I will then direct the men to remove their packs and order:

“‘First relief, FOLLOW ME.’”

Procedure

The Director: “You seem to have covered the essential points of the order of an outguard commander. Now, in order to impress it on your minds, I want each member of the class to write out the order on his pad. Follow the form of the five paragraph order and try to get the wording just as was given by Lieutenant Hunt.”

When all have finished writing the order the papers are collected and distributed again. Members of the class are called upon to read and comment on the order they have in their possession.

(Note.—The Director should insist that members of the class prepare these orders with great care and attention to detail. It will be found that there is a tendency to slight them and take a lot for granted.)

Outpost Card No. 4

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class down the road to location of outguard No. 2. Indicate limits of front of outguard.

2. Hand out Situation No. 4. Read and explain it to class.

3. Location of outguard. Defense. Field of fire. Cover. Strength of position. Obstacles commanding ground. Approaches and communications.

4. Number of sentinels supplied by outguard. Explanation of.

5. Tentative dispositions.

6. Orders for posting of outguards: Information of enemy and own troops; mission; disposition—division into reliefs; action in case of attack; messing; messages.

7. Write out orders. Collect. Distribute. Read.

Explanation

The Director: “We are now ready to proceed with the next step of the problem, the posting of the first relief. Before we go into that I want to make a few remarks about the location of sentinel posts.

“By day the sentinel must be able to see the whole of the ground allotted to him for observation. He should be provided with sufficient cover so that the enemy’s patrols will not be able to locate him. He should have good communication with the outguard and the adjoining sentinels. Excellent observation posts may sometimes be found in large trees, one of the sentinels of the double post being located in a tree and the other on the ground near the foot of the tree. It may be that the best location for observation is also the best for resistance, in which case the sentinels may be posted on or very near the actual locality to be defended by the outguard. There is no objection to this, provided the members of the outguard, as well as the sentinel, are well concealed from the view of the enemy.

“The location of the sentinel post at night requires the most careful consideration. It depends considerably upon the degree of darkness, and consequently the value of eyesight as compared with hearing. On a very dark night, when the sentinel can see only a few yards in front of him, it is evident that his ears will be more useful than his eyes. Furthermore, the difficulties of the enemy will be increased by the darkness, and he is likely to make more noise by stumbling over unseen obstructions. On a still night a sentinel posted on high ground can hear better than when on low ground, because there is likely to be less obstruction in the way of trees and other objects to interfere with the sound waves passing through the atmosphere. It therefore appears that on a very dark night, when the ears are more efficient than the eyes, the sentinel should be posted on high ground, with low ground to his front.

“When the darkness is not so great and the powers of sight more nearly approach in value the powers of hearing, it is better to place the sentinel on low ground, with the sky line to his front. This is because approaching persons will be silhouetted on the sky line and that it is difficult to see when looking down from a height into a dark valley.

“The night post should always be provided with an obstacle placed from 10 to 30 yards to the front of the sentinel. It must be low, so that it will not be seen by an approaching enemy. Its value is increased if a wire or rope is attached to some object that will fall down with a loud noise when anyone trips over the obstacle.”

Procedure

The class is now conducted to the place where the sentinel post is to be established.

The Director: “Lieutenant Barry, where would you locate your sentinel post?”

Lieutenant Barry: “I would locate it at ——”

(Note.—The location of the sentinel post should be determined upon after careful consideration of all the factors that enter into the problem.)

The Director now distributes the sheets containing Situation No. 5.

The Problem

Situation No. 5:

It has been decided to locate double sentinel post No. 1 of outguard No. 2 at this point. You, Corporal V, have arrived here with the members of the first relief.

Required:

The orders and instructions you give your sentinels.

Explanation

The Director: “The sentinels must have imparted to them all information of the enemy and our own troops. With respect to the latter, they must be fully informed of the covering patrols that have been sent out and the location of the adjoining sentinel posts. The location of the main body of the outguard should be pointed out, and, if practicable, the position of adjoining outguards.

“They will be given the number of their own post and the number of the outguard from which they are posted.

“They will be informed as to the points to which the roads and trails lead, and, if practicable, the names of important topographical points in sight.

“They will be given the countersign, if one is used. The method of challenge and identification of persons approaching the outpost sentinels at night should be changed from time to time so that there will be less chance for the enemy to know just what system is being used on a particular night. On one occasion a countersign using the name of a battle or general may be used; on another night the system of tapping the knuckles on the rifle stock may be employed.

“The mistake of giving sentinels too many orders and instructions should be carefully avoided. If their minds are burdened with too many details, they are likely to become hesitating, timid and confused. The controlling idea is that they should know where to look for the enemy and what to do if they see him.”

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hall, having in mind what I have just said, what orders would you give your sentinels?”

Captain Hall: “I would give them the following orders:

“‘You have all the information of the enemy and our own troops.

“‘You are double sentinel post No. 1 of outguard No. 2 of support No. 1. Outguard No. 1 is —— (point out location). Outguard No. 3 is —— (point out location). Information of the exact location of the sentinel posts will be given to you later.

“‘This road leads to ——. That trail leads in the direction of ——. That —— is known as the ——.

(Note—Locate and name other important topographical features in view.)

“‘If you see the enemy, signal to me at the outguard.

“‘The countersign will be given to you later.’”

The Director: “I think that covers the orders for your sentinel very well. The big idea is that we should not burden them with too many things to think about. We will omit the written solution of this part of the problem.”

Explanation

The Director: “There are certain rules for the guidance of a sentinel on post with which all officers and soldiers should be familiar. They must be scrupulously observed under all circumstances. They are:

“1. He must watch and listen without betraying his presence. Observation is the first consideration and concealment of secondary importance.

“2. He must not smoke, and matches must not be lighted at night.

“3. Such conversation as is absolutely necessary must be conducted in subdued tones.

“4. He must not have any arms or accoutrements that will glitter in the sunlight.

“5. Except at night and in foggy weather, the bayonet must be kept in the scabbard.

“6. Persons arrested are ordinarily held at the post until a patrol comes out to take charge of them.

“7. He will not allow his vigilance to be disturbed by the requirements of military etiquette. He pays no compliments and does not salute officers unless addressed by them.

“8. Everything that he observes with respect to the enemy must be communicated to the outguard commander, especial care being taken to report promptly all indication of the enemy’s approach. If he is satisfied that the enemy is advancing to attack, the alarm may be given by firing. When immediate alarm is not necessary, firing should be avoided.

“There is nothing that so irritates troops as needless outpost firing at night, when they need rest. Needless firing, besides alarming the outpost troops, and possibly those of the main body, gives information to the enemy of the location of the line of observation, from which he is able to deduce the position of the outguards. It should be an invariable rule that sentinels do not fire except as a last resort. There is never any necessity for it except when the covering patrols are being driven in and are being hard pressed, in which case the sentinel may fire to assist in covering the withdrawal, if such action is absolutely necessary. Night firing is of little value in any event. It is only effective for very short distances, and should be discouraged by every possible means.”

Outpost Card No. 5

Director’s Key

1. Location of Sentinel Posts. By day. At night. Obstacles. Field of view.

2. Conduct class to place where sentinel post is to be established.

3. Discuss location of post.

4. Hand out Situation No. 5. Read and discuss it.

5. Orders for sentinels: Information of enemy and own troops; number of post; identify support and outguard; countersigns; too many orders.

6. Proceed with verbal solution of problem.

7. Explain rules for guidance of sentinels: Watch and listen; smoke; matches; conversation; arms; vigilance; etiquette; report of observations; night firing.

Procedure

The class is now conducted to the location of outguard No. 1.

Explanation

The Director: “After sufficient time has elapsed for the outguards to get into position and post their sentinels the support commander makes an inspection of the elements of his support. In this inspection any or all of the following questions may be presented for consideration.

“1. Is the outguard located at the best place to cover the sector of the front allotted to it? Is there a good field of fire over the ground by which the enemy may approach?

“2. Are the sentinels so located that they can observe all approaches? Are they well instructed in their duties? Do they know what to do if they should see the enemy?

“3. Have provisions been made for rapid communication between sentinels and the outguard? Has communication been established with adjoining outguards and sentinels and with the support?

“4. Have fire positions been prepared for all riflemen, the automatic rifleman and the rifle grenadier? Are the men well supplied with ammunition?

“5. Are all the men familiar with the plans for defense? Do they know what to do in case the enemy attacks?

“6. Have necessary arrangements been made for patrolling?

“7. Have necessary arrangements been made for messing?

“In the course of the inspection the support commander will make such changes in the dispositions as may be necessary and will give such instructions as he may deem desirable for the proper conduct of the duty with which the support is charged.

“Having completed this inspection he will return to the support and make his report to the outpost commander. This report may be made in the form of a message and must contain information as to the location of the main body of the support, the location of each of the outguards, their strength and disposition, the extent of patrolling contemplated, and finally the place where messages are to be sent is indicated. A report such as this received from each support and detached post commander gives the outpost commander detailed information regarding the disposition of the entire outpost upon which he may base his report to the commander of the main body.

“When practicable the report is accompanied by a rough sketch showing the dispositions of the support.”

Procedure

While at the location of outguard No. 1, the Director will point out the location of the outguard and the sentinels and question various members of the class regarding these locations and the instructions under which the outguard is operating.

The class is then conducted to the location of outguard No. 3, and the same procedure is gone through with.[14]

The class is then conducted to the position of the support, and Situation No. 6 is distributed.

The Problem

Situation No. 6:

You, Lieutenant M, have completed the inspection of your outguards and returned to your support.

Required:

Write out the body of the report that you would send back to the outpost commander.

Procedure

The Director: “We have been over the entire front covered by our support and made a detailed inspection of the dispositions, rearranged them where it was necessary and given instructions that will insure efficient outpost service. We have now returned to the position of the support. Word has been sent out to withdraw the covering troops. It is now up to Lieutenant M to make his report to the outpost commander. I want each member of the class to consider himself as being Lieutenant M and to write out on his pad the body of the report that he would send in.”

The members of the class write out the report. When this is done they are collected and redistributed as indicated heretofore. Members of the class are required to read the solutions and comment on them.

Outpost Card No. 6

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to location of outguard No. 1.

2. Explain method of inspection of line of outguards by support commander. Considerations that will come up: Location of outguard; location of sentinel posts; arrangements for communication; fire positions; men familiar with plans for defense; patroling; messing; changes in dispositions.

3. Report and sketch.

4. Conduct class to outguard No. 3. Discuss dispositions.

5. Conduct class to support. Pass out Situation No. 6. Write out report of support commander.

Terrain Exercise No. 8.
A Visiting Patrol

The Problem

Special Situation:

A blue force operating in hostile country halts at (a) and establishes an outpost along the line (b). Support No. 2 is located at (c) with outguard No. 1 at (d); outguard No. 2 at (e) and outguard No. 3 at (f).

Situation No. 1:

You, Lieutenant A are in command of Support No. 2, consisting of your platoon and located at this point. The first section furnishes the outguards and the platoon (less 1st Section) the main body of the support. You have made the inspection of your line of observation and sent your report to the company commander.

Required:

What arrangements do you make for visiting patrols?

Explanation of Letter Symbols

(a) The location of the bivouac of the main body of the Blue force. This should be located at a central point with reference to the outpost line.

(b) Designate the general line of the Blue outpost.

(c) The location of Support No. 2. It should be located at a central point with reference to the line of outguards. (d)-(e)-(f) The location of the three outguards posted from Support No. 2.

In fitting this exercise to the ground the location of the outguards should be selected first. Care should be taken to so locate them that the ground is suitable for illustrating the tactical features that are to be brought out and discussed in the Terrain Exercise. The location of Support No. 2 should then be selected and finally that of the Blue main body. If you have had a previous Terrain Exercise covering the subject of outposts it may be convenient and advantageous to base this Terrain Exercise on the same situation and covering the same ground.

Procedure

The class is conducted to (c), the location of Support No. 2.

The Director distributes the sheets containing the Special Situation and Situation No. 1, reads them aloud to the class and makes such explanation as may be necessary. One or more members of the class may be called upon to state his understanding of the situation.

Explanation

The Director: “It is fully realized that no member of this class will ever be called upon to conduct the operations of a visiting patrol. You will, however, have to order your non-commissioned officers to do so and you must have a knowledge of how it should be gone about and whether the duty is being properly performed.

“The military text-books usually tell you that a visiting patrol consists of a non-commissioned officer and two or three men that make the rounds along the outpost line of observation at night. That is about all. It is assumed that the subject is so simple that you just naturally know it and there is nothing further to be explained. Such is not the case and before we have completed this exercise we will demonstrate it to you. Another good test of the proposition is this: Take your non-commissioned officers out on a Terrain Exercise and give them the situations that we will have today. See how many of them get away with it. I am sure you will be surprised at the results, especially with the men who have had no previous preparation for the exercise.”

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what is a visiting patrol?”

Lieutenant Williams: “It is a patrol consisting of a non-commissioned officer and two or three men. It is sent out from the support at intervals during the night to keep up communication between the elements of the outpost.”

The Director: “Captain Hastings, tell us just how the visiting patrol makes its rounds.”

Captain Hastings: “Let us say that the patrol is to start out from our support No. 2, which is located at this point. The patrol will go out to the right and touch upon the left outguard of Support No. 1; then pass along our own line of observation to the right outguard of Support No. 3 and then come back here.”

The Director: “Yes, that is the general procedure. The details of how the patrol is to do all of this is what we are interested in and that is what will be brought out in this Terrain Exercise. Lieutenant Wallace, what do you understand to be the specific duties of a visiting patrol?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “Included in the duties of visiting patrols may be enumerated:

“1. They bring back information of incidents that may occur along the line of observation and form a medium of exchange of information between the various elements of the outpost.

“2. In a measure, they prevent the unobserved approach of the enemy between sentinel posts. When the enemy is very active there is constant patrolling between the observation posts.

“3. They drive off small patrols.

“4. They take charge of detained persons and conduct them back to the support.”

The Director: “That is very good. Now, Lieutenant Ralston, suppose you were Lieutenant A, commanding Support No. 2. What instructions would you give regarding your visiting patrols?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “The visiting patrol is a night institution. There is little necessity for its employment in the day time, but I would not wait until dark to give my instructions regarding it. I would give orders:

“‘There is no further information of the enemy and our own troops.

“‘The second section will furnish the visiting patrols for tonight.

“‘Corporal Black, with the 4th Squad, will conduct the visiting patrols at 8 and 10 o’clock p. m.

“‘Corporal Canes, with the 5th Squad, will conduct the visiting patrols at 12 midnight and 2 o’clock a. m.

“‘Corporal Dorr with the 6th Squad, will conduct the visiting patrols at 4 and 6 o’clock a. m.

“‘Patrol leaders will go over the route of their patrols before dark.

“‘Messages to support, here.’”

The Director: “I think you have covered the necessary points.

“Are there any questions by any member of the class? If so, now is the time to clear them up.”

Visiting Patrol Card No. 1

Director’s Key

1. Assemble the class at (c) the location of Support No. 2.

2. Distribute sheets bearing the Special Situation and Situation No. 1. Read and explain. Have members of the class state their understanding of the problem.

3. Explain that no member of class will ever be required to conduct a visiting patrol, but it is necessary for them to know how it should be done. Definition of visiting patrol. Test by taking N. C. O.’s on Terrain Exercise.

4. Solution: What is visiting patrol. How it makes rounds. Duties. Orders given for visiting patrols. Any questions.

The Problem

Situation No. 2:

You, Corporal Canes, have been designated to conduct the visiting patrol that is to go out at 12 o’clock midnight and at 2 o’clock a. m. You have been given your squad to form the reliefs.

Required:

What do you do?

Procedure

The Director distributes the sheets bearing Situation No. 2 to the members of the class, reads it aloud and makes such explanations as may be necessary.

Explanation

The Director: “Now I want each member of the class to consider himself as being Corporal Canes. Put yourself in his place and consider what you would do under the orders you have received from the support commander. We are going to work these situations out in detail to show you how it ought to be done. Then when you are a support commander and give an order for your visiting patrols, you will know just how each Corporal should go about his job.”

Solution

The Director: “Captain Harvey, what would you do?”

Captain Harvey: “I would get the men of my squad together and while they are assembling I would size up the situation and determine just what orders I am going to give. When the men are together I would give them their orders:

“‘Manley, Harrison and Kline will be the first visiting patrol.

“‘Oliver, Hasker and Payne will be the second visiting patrol.

“‘We go out at 12 and 2 o’clock tonight. Be ready at those hours.

“‘I am going over the route of the patrol before dark.

“‘Dismissed.’

“I do not think of anything else to say at this time.”

The Director: “Captain Hodges, have you any criticism to make of Captain Harvey’s order?”

Captain Hodges: “Yes, sir. In the first place, he has left out several things that ought to be told to the men. He has not provided any instructions for one man of the squad. He has not made it clear just which patrol each man belongs to. He has not told the men what equipment they are to carry with them.”

The Director: “To what do you attribute these omissions?”

Captain Hodges: “Well, sir, I could not say. The thing that appeals to me is that if I were one of the men I would want to know about them.”

The Director: “I think, if you will all reflect, that the underlying trouble with Captain Harvey’s order is that he has not followed our five paragraph order. Had he done so, I am sure he would not have omitted these essentials. Now I am going to have Captain Harvey give the order again and follow the five paragraph order system and see how he comes out. Your first paragraph would be ‘Information of the enemy and our supporting troops.’ All right, Captain Harvey, what would your first paragraph contain?”

Captain Harvey: “Well, sir, the men know everything that I do regarding the enemy and our own troops. They all heard the Lieutenants order when he established the support. So I would say:

“‘There is no further information of the enemy or our supporting troops.’”

The Director: “You have stated it exactly in your last sentence. Now for your plan.”

Captain Harvey: “My plan would be to have the squad furnish two of the visiting patrols—I see what you mean.

“‘Our squad will furnish two visiting patrols tonight.’”

The Director: “Now comes the disposition of troops and orders for each element.”

Captain Harvey: “I would divide up the squad as I did in my previous order and provide for that extra man that Captain Hodges spoke of. He is my Automatic Rifleman. I would say:

“‘Manley, Harrison and Kline will be visiting patrol No. 1. It will go out at 12 o’clock midnight.

“‘Oliver, Hasker and Payne will be visiting patrol No. 2. It will go out at 2 o’clock a. m.

“‘Bailey (automatic rifleman) will be supernumerary.’”

The Director: “The next is your administrative arrangements, paragraph 4 of an order. What would you include in that?”

Captain Harvey: “The equipment to be carried. I would say:

“‘Rifle and belts of ammunition only will be carried. The bayonet will be fixed. The scabbard and canteen will be left here.’

I would not want the men to carry anything that is not absolutely essential.”

The Director: “You are right. The members of the visiting patrol travel light. They do not want to be hampered with equipment that is not necessary. Above all, they do not want anything with them that will rattle and make a noise. They leave the bayonet scabbard at the post of the support because if they wear it on the belt it will be dangling between the men’s legs and interfere with their freedom of movement. They will probably not need any water on this short march so I see no objection to leaving the canteen behind, although, on the other hand, I can see no objection to carrying it. That is a mere matter of opinion. The bayonets are fixed so as to have them ready for hand to hand night fighting in case it is required. A great deal of the night work will be done with the bayonet. Rifle fire is effective only for short distances due to inability to see the target for any distance. Now, Captain Harvey, how do you conclude your order?”

Captain Harvey: “In the usual manner by telling the men where messages are to be brought, I would say:

“‘Messages will be brought back to the support, here.’”

That concludes the order. I see my error and will profit by it in the future.”

Captain James: “There is one point in the order that I did not understand. Captain Harvey detailed his automatic rifleman as ‘supernumerary.’ Just what does he mean by that.”

The Director: “He means that he is an extra man not specifically detailed with either patrol. But, if for any reason, one of the other men is unable to go on the patrol when the time comes the supernumerary will take his place. Do you see the point now?”

Captain James: “Yes, sir.”

The Director: “I hope you all now realize how far astray you can go in issuing tactical orders if you fail to follow the five paragraph system. On the other hand, I hope you have observed how simple it is to include all of the essential elements in an order if you do follow the system. You here see the system applied to the most insignificant element in the domain of tactics, the visiting patrol. You see how nicely it fits. If you were issuing an order for a division of 20,000 men you would see how well it works there. I hope you will all stick to this plan of issuing orders. You positively cannot go far wrong if you will. If there are no further questions we will proceed.”

Explanation

The Director: “Corporal Canes will now dismiss the squad and the men will go about getting ready for their night work. Corporal Canes will go over the route that he is to conduct the patrol tonight. He will proceed to the right parallel to and in rear of the line of outguards to the left outguard of Support No. 1; thence along our own line of observation to Outguard No. 1 of Support No. 3; and then back to the support. He will note the route carefully and mark it if necessary. He will especially note the approaches to the outguard posts and arrange for recognition signals with the outguard commanders.”

Procedure

The Director: “Let us assume that it is now 11.50 p. m. The obscurity is such that a man may see another at a distance of about 12 yards. Corporal Canes has been awakened by the support sentinel. He is up and getting ready to start with his patrol. Captain James, you are now Corporal Canes. What would you do?”

Captain James: “I would wake Manley, Harrison and Kline and say to them:

“‘It is time to make our 12 o’clock patrol. Get up. You have about 5 minutes to get ready.’

“At 11:55 I would have the patrol fall in for inspection. I would inspect the men to see if they had the proper equipment and make sure that each man is fully awake. I would then give the command:

“‘With ball cartridges. 2. LOAD.’

“I am now ready to start.”

The Director: “All right. It is now 12 o’clock. Give the orders for the start.”

Captain James: “I would say:

“‘Manley, you will lead; I will follow at a distance of 8 yards; Harrison, you follow me at 10 yards; Kline you follow Harrison at 12 yards. Move out.’

“I think that order would get the patrol under way.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, have you any criticism of the formation proposed by Captain James?”

Lieutenant Baker: “Yes, sir. It seems to me that here is one instance where the patrol commander should actually lead the patrol himself. He knows the route that is to be taken and no other member of the patrol knows it. He is the man that knows the recognition signals with the outguard commanders. I think there is every reason why he should physically lead the patrol.”

The Director: “I think so, too, and feel that Captain James will when he considers the situation. Now then, this new disposition will change the orders somewhat. Lieutenant Baker how would you state the orders now?”

Lieutenant Baker: “I would say:

“‘I will lead. Manley, you follow me at a distance of about 8 yards. Harrison, follow Manley at a distance of about 10 yards; Kline will follow Harrison at a distance of about 10 yards.

“‘Keep the man ahead of you in sight at all times.

“‘Manley, you will be second in command.

“‘Follow me.’”

The Director: “I think this order will get our patrol under way in the proper formation. I hope you see and understand the necessity for going into the minute details of these situations. Herein lies one of the greatest values of the Terrain Exercise. It not only teaches the student of Minor Tactics the principles, but affords practice in giving the orders to meet the various situations and fixes all indelibly on the mind. When you conduct a Terrain Exercise yourself you cannot be too particular about going into the details of every situation.”

Visiting Patrol Card No. 2

Director’s Key

1. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 2. Each member of class is now Corporal Canes. Explain why this Terrain Exercise is given to officers.

2. Orders for squad. Failure to use five paragraph order. Information of enemy and own troops. Plan of commander. Tactical dispositions and order for each element; detail each patrol, time of going out, supernumerary, equipment—only rifle and belt of ammunition, no bayonets, canteen, messages.

3. Meaning of supernumerary.

4. Necessity for following five paragraph order system.

5. Men get ready for patrol duty before dark. Corporal Canes goes over route of the patrol.

6. State special situation. Now 11:50 p. m. Ready to start. Formation of patrol. Corporal leads. Load rifles.

7. Orders for patrol:—Formation, communication, second in command.

8. Explain necessity for going into details. Great value of Terrain Exercise.

The Problem

Situation No. 3:

You, Corporal Canes, the leading man of your visiting patrol, have arrived at this point. Outguard No. 1 is right there (indicate); the double sentinel post is there (indicate).

Required:

What do you do?

Procedure

The class is conducted to the point selected for Situation No. 3, which should be located between the outguard and the sentinel post if practicable. The Director reads the situation aloud and points out the position of the outguard and that of the sentinels posted from the outguard.

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hall, let us assume you are Corporal Canes. You have arrived right here, the other members of your patrol are in the original formation behind you. Now just what would you do under the circumstances?”

Captain Hall: “I would go to the sentinel post and ask the men.”

The Director: “Wait a minute. Let us not go too fast on this proposition. You have the other men of your patrol with you. What are you going to do with them?”

Captain Hall: “That’s right. I would have to tell them what to do. I would say to Manley in a low tone;

“‘Have the patrol halt and remain in place.’

Which means the men would halt where they are and stay there until I return.”

The Director: “We will assume that you have halted the patrol. Would you go to the sentinel post without first notifying the outguard that you are going to do so?”

Captain Hall: “No, sir. I had forgotten about that. I would go to the outguard and tell the outguard commander that I am going out to see his sentinels and would get him to come along with me.”

The Director: “Reflect a moment. Remember, yours is not the only visiting patrol that comes along the route tonight. There is one every two hours. The outguard commander has to be up every two hours to post his reliefs. The support commander has arranged his visiting patrols so that they will come along the line of observation when the sentinels on post are about in the middle of their tour. If you get the outguard commander out at this time, he will be up practically all night and will not be fit for much service tomorrow. I do not think you would insist on seeing the outguard commander unless he happened to be awake at this particular time. It would be sufficient to tell the outguard sentinel what you are going to do.”

Captain Hall: “I would go to the outguard and notify the man on duty there that I am going out to the sentinel.”

The Director: “Don’t go too fast. What I want to bring out at this time is just how you are going to approach the post of the outguard. Tell us in detail how you would do it.”

Captain Hall: “I will go up to this point. (Captain Hall advances to the point indicated). I will call in a low tone of voice ‘Visiting patrol.’ If I get no response I will advance a little closer and repeat my recognition signal and would continue until I am recognized. When the man on duty hears my call he will probably say to me ‘Give the countersign.’ I will give the countersign in a low tone of voice. He will tell me to advance and I will then go to the post of the outguard.”

The Director: “Those are the details I wanted to bring out. And that is the value of the Terrain Exercise. We come out here and learn to do the things that we must do in actual campaign when we do not have to pay for the mistakes with our own lives or the lives of our men. You have to draw upon your imagination to picture the situation that confronts you. You have to use your gray matter to figure out and decide just what you are going to do. Finally, you have to draw upon your power of speech to put your decision into words and express it in a clear and intelligent manner.

“When you get up to the outguard you find that the outguard commander is asleep. You decide not to awaken him. You tell the man on duty that you are going to the sentinel post. Now Lieutenant Barry I want you to tell us and show us just how you do it.”

Lieutenant Barry: “I would proceed cautiously in the direction of the sentinel post. When I figure I am within hearing distance I will give the recognition signal. The sentinel will give me the return signal and I will know everything is all right and be free to go up to him.”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I do not understand this recognition signal proposition. Can the director enlighten us on that?”

Explanation

The Director: “Yes, we will go into that in a few minutes. Before doing so I wish to review and consider in detail this comparatively simple proposition of approaching a sentinel post at night. You must remember that the line of observation of an outpost is a ‘spooky’ place at night and that outpost sentinels are as easily flushed as a pheasant. Their nerves are strung to the breaking point. In every shadow an enemy lurks. They soon learn to take no chances. It becomes the rule to shoot first and challenge afterwards. If one makes a practice of running headlong into sentinel posts on dark nights he may get away with it a few times, but you are taking serious chances and the game will finally get you. Having these things in mind, let us review the process of approaching the sentinel post.

“1. The patrol leader halts his patrol some little distance from the post. He gives the orders for the other members to stand fast until he returns. He then goes to the outguard and notifies them that he is going out to the sentinel. There is no necessity for any other person than the patrol commander going up to the post. If others go it makes just that much more confusion and adds that much more chance for lurking scouts to locate the post and get information.

“2. The patrol leader advances towards the post and when he is near enough he calls in a low tone, ‘Visiting patrol,’ and continues to call until he is recognized. We never approach a sentinel post from the front at night and, if it can be avoided, never from a flank, always from the rear.

“3. When the sentinel discovers the presence of the patrol leader he will verify his identity by calling upon him for the countersign. Corporal Canes gives the countersign, and the sentinel directs him to advance.

“This countersign is the recognition signal that Lieutenant Hunt asked about. It may be given by word of mouth. It may consist of whistling a few bars of some familiar service call. It may be made by tapping with the knuckles on the stock of the rifle. The number of taps to represent a number, for example: The countersign or recognition signal is 22-33. Corporal Canes would approach the sentinel post and strike his rifle, tap, tap (pause) tap, tap. The sentinel will answer in the same manner tap, tap, tap (pause), tap, tap, tap. He would then know that he had been recognized as a friend and proceed to the post. If the sentinel discovered Corporal Canes first he would keep him under observation and when he is close enough to hear would challenge him, tap, tap (pause), tap, tap. Corporal Cane’s answer would be tap, tap, tap (pause), tap, tap, tap. The system is interchangeable. The first number may be said to be the challenge or inquiry signal and the second number the recognition.

“It is not well, however, to confine ourselves to any one set of signals or method of identification. They should be changed frequently, so that the enemy will never know what system is being used on any particular night.

“When the countersign is a word it should be spoken in a very low tone of voice for fear of betraying it to the enemy’s scouts who may be near by. History is replete with incidents of disaster to covering detachments arising from the enemy’s knowledge of the countersign.”

Solution

The Director: “Now, Lieutenant Hunt, let us assume that you are at the sentinel post and ready to make your inspection. Just what would you say to him?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “Well, sir, I am free to confess that I do not know just what I would say, but I would make a stab at something.”

The Director: “That is just the point. Our text-books are here deficient again. They assume that this is so simple that we just naturally know what to do and what to say. Have you ever seen in any text book, any where, detailed instructions as to just how to inspect a sentinel on post. They say: ‘The officer of the day will inspect.’ I should like for you to be in a concealed position and hear some ‘Officer of the day’ make his inspection of a sentinel. Try it sometime and see the results.

“During the time that Corporal Canes is with him the sentinel will not cease his vigilance. The inspection will be conducted in a low conversational tone. ‘I am Corporal Canes of visiting patrol No. 3 from Support No. 2.’ ‘What is the number of your post?’ ‘What is the number of your outguard?’ ‘Where is it located?’ ‘Do you know the location of the sentinel posts to your right and left?’ ‘In what direction is the enemy?’ ‘Where does that road (trail) lead to?’ ‘Do you know what that light is (pointing)?’ ‘Have you observed any signs of the enemy since you have been on post?’ ‘What is the countersign (recognition signal) tonight?’ ‘What would you do if you saw any signs of the enemy out in front?’ ‘How would you alarm the outguard?’ ‘I have no information of the enemy on this immediate front.’ ‘When I was at outguard No. 3 of Support No. 1 the outguard commander told me that an enemy scout had been picked up near the Outguard No. 1 of their support about an hour ago?’ ‘Notify your outguard commander when you are relieved that I was here at —— o’clock.’

“These are some of the things that would be included in the inspection by the patrol commander.

“Corporal Canes would now go back to the outguard and tell the man on duty that he is going on with the patrol. If, in his inspection of the sentinel on post, anything happened that the outguard commander should know about Corporal Canes would wake him and tell him about it. He will then join the other members of the patrol and proceed along the route selected before dark.”

(Note.—To give the Terrain Exercise added interest it may be well to send two of the members of the class ahead to represent sentinel post No. 2 and one to represent the outguard. They will take post in the normal location of those elements of the line of observation. Then have four members of the class represent the visiting patrol. Have the leader conduct them just as he would under actual service conditions. Make the approach to outguard No. 2 in the same manner as indicated herein and carry out all the details of the situation.)

Visiting Patrol Card No. 3

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to point near location of Outguard No. 1.

2. Distribute Situation No. 3. Point out location of the outguard and Sentinel Post.

3. Details of approach to outguard. Halt patrol. Recognition signal. Do not disturb outguard commander. Explain necessity for details.

4. Approach sentinel post. Necessity for caution.

5. Review problem up to this point. Explain recognition signals.

6. Corporal Canes inspection of the sentinel. Identify himself to sentinel. Number of post, outguard, location. Posts on right and left. Road lead to. Light. Any signs of enemy. What he would do if he saw enemy. How alarm outguard. Give sentinel any news. Notify outguard commander of time of inspection.

7. Corporal Canes goes back to outguard and then joins patrol.

8. Send members of class out to represent Outguard No. 2 and sentinels posted from it. Detail a patrol from among class and conduct it to Outguard No. 2.

Procedure

On completion of the problem at Outguard No. 2 the class is conducted to a point somewhere between Outguard No. 2 and Outguard No. 3 where the following situation is distributed:

The Problem

Situation No. 4:

The Visiting Patrol has arrived at this point. You, Corporal Canes, are right here (indicate). You hear a slight noise in that direction (indicate). In a moment you see the dim outline of a man. He is armed with a rifle which he seems to be carrying at the position of “High Port.” He is stooping forward and moving very cautiously towards you. Apparently he has not seen you.

Required:

What action do you take?

Procedure

The Director will read the situation aloud and indicate where Corporal Canes is and where the man is.

(Note.—The place selected for this situation should be chosen with great care. It should preferably be in a woods with some underbrush and some cleared places. The place where the patrol is located when the situation is given out should preferably be at the near edge of one of these clearings.)

Explanation

The Director: “Now I want each member of the class to visualize the situation as it exists. You are reminded that it is supposed to be night and you should base your decisions and actions on that assumption.”

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hastings, what would you do?”

Captain Hastings: “Am I to understand that the man approaching is one of our own force or one of the enemy?”

The Director: “That is one of the points of the problem. You do not know yet whether he is a friend or enemy. It is dark and impossible to tell. You merely see the outlines of a man. He is crouching. Has his rifle at a ‘High Port’ which places it in readiness for instant action.”

Captain Hastings: “I would not want to shoot one of our own men. I guess I would halt and wait and see what he is going to do.”

The Director: “The moment you let the man take the lead you are just one lap behind him in decision and action. If you do something and take the lead yourself he will have to make his decisions rapidly and base his action on what you do. Never lose the opportunity to put your opponent in that hole. As far as can be seen, you now have the drop on the man. Don’t make a blunder and lose the advantage. Of all tactical offenses, indecision and inaction are the most to be condemned.

“Lieutenant Wallace, how do you size up the situation?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “Well, sir, I would hate to make the mistake of killing one of our own men. But I consider that no man of this outpost has any business running around between the lines at this time of the night unless he is a member of a patrol. If such is the case the sentinel at No. 2 Outguard would have known about that and told me. So, I suppose if it came to the point of killing him, he would be paid for. Next, I do not know whether the man is alone or whether there are others with him. Up to this time I have only seen one man, and it is not likely that one man of the enemy would be wandering around in our lines alone. Considering the possibility of his being one of our men, I would give him just one chance.”

The Director: “That is a very good estimate of the situation. Now arrive at a decision as to what you are going to do and tell us about it.”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would halt and crouch down. The other members of the patrol seeing me do this would follow my action without any orders. Without making any noise I would unlock my piece and aim it at the approaching man. As soon as he arrived at a point where I could see him sufficiently in the dark to make sure of hitting him if it were necessary to fire I would call out in a tone loud enough for him to hear and understand that I meant business: ‘Halt! Drop that Rifle! Throw up your hands!’ If there was the least hesitation on his part or any move to use his rifle I would fire. In other words, if he did not drop his rifle instantly and throw up his hands, I would shoot him. If he obeyed my orders, I would call to him in a low tone, ‘I have the drop on you. Do as I say, or I will fire. Walk five steps towards me and halt.’ I would wait a few seconds to see if there were any more men behind him and then call to Manley and Harrison to join me at the edge of the clearing. While I still covered him and with my rifle, I would say:

“‘Manley, you go out and search the man. Take any arms that he may have. Keep out of my way, so I can fire if necessary. Now get his rifle.’

I now have the man a prisoner, and....”

The Director: “Wait a moment. That is as far as I want you to go at this time. I think you have covered the situation very well.

“Lieutenant Ralston, it develops that the man is one of the enemy. You have him a prisoner. What are you going to do now?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would post Manley and Harrison to guard against surprise. I would have Kline join me. Before the prisoner had a chance to get over his confusion and collect his thoughts I would try to get some information from him.”

The Director: “What questions would you ask him?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would ask him:

“‘What outfit do you belong to?

“‘What are you doing in our lines?

“‘Are there any other men of your outfit around here?

“‘What is your name and rank?’”

Explanation

The Director: “I hope you have all noted the dispositions that Lieutenant Ralston made. He posted two men to guard against surprise, for there may be more of the enemy in the vicinity. It is fair to assume that this man is not out alone at this time of the night. The remaining man of the patrol is right here with Corporal Canes while he is questioning the prisoner. He has him here for a purpose. Kline will take the prisoner back to the support and having been present at the examination, if he does give any information Kline will know all about it and can tell the support commander in case the man changes his statements after recovering his composure.

“It is one of the duties of a visiting patrol to pick up persons found in the lines. It is of importance that they be captured and every precaution towards that end should be taken. Make it a rule that persons wandering about in the outpost line have no business to be there and take no chances on them getting away.”

Visiting Patrol Card No. 4

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to a point between outguard No. 2 and No. 3.

2. Distribute Situation No. 4, read and explain.

3. Remind class that it is supposed to be night.

4. Enemy or friend. Size up the situation.

5. Action. Halt. Cover man with rifle. Call on him to Halt. Drop rifle. Hold up hands. Effect capture.

6. Disposition of Patrol of guard against surprise.

7. Question prisoner.

8. Explain dispositions. Kline to take prisoner back. Duty of visiting patrol to pick up strangers on outpost line.

The Problem

Situation No. 5:

You question the prisoner. He refuses to give any information. Stands mute. To your question “What are you doing in our lines?” he answers “Lost.”

Required:

What action do you, Corporal Canes, take?

Procedure

The Director distributes Situation No. 5 and makes such explanation so as may be necessary.

Solution

The Director: “Captain Harvey, what would you do?”

Captain Harvey: “I am going back to the support in a few minutes now, so I think I would take the prisoner along with me.”

The Director: “Captain Hodges, what do you think about that?”

Captain Hodges: “I would not want to be bothered with him. Besides we may run into some more enemy scouts any time and this man would be in the way and might make his escape. I would take no chances. I would send him back to the support commander at once.”

Captain James: “Why not send him over to outguard No. 2 for the time being?”

Captain Hodges: “That might be all right. But if I were a support commander and one of my visiting patrols picked up a prisoner, like we have, I should want to see him as soon as practicable. I think it would be much better to send him directly back to the support. The support commander can question him and make his plans for finding out where the other scouts of the patrol to which he probably belongs, are.”

The Director: “That is the point that I wish to bring out. In the first place, the Outguard Commander will have no time to question the man. He will have to busy himself immediately making arrangements to send out patrols in his immediate vicinity to see if he can find any other members of the enemy’s forces. It is not likely that the man is running around in our lines alone. There are others with him. Corporal Canes would send the prisoner back to the support commander immediately in order that the Lieutenant may question him before he gets over the confusion of being captured, and in order that patrols may be sent out to find any of his comrades that may also be within the lines.

“Now, having decided to send the prisoner back, Lieutenant Baker, how would you go about it?”

Lieutenant Baker: “There are several things to be considered in this procedure. The commander of outguard No. 2 must be informed of what has happened so that he may take the necessary action. The support commander must be informed by a verbal message of the circumstances attending the capture of the prisoner. He must also be informed of the immediate future action of the visiting patrol. I would cover all of this in orders and a verbal message. Private Kline has been with me when I was questioning the prisoner. He knows the circumstances attending the capture. I would send him back with the prisoner and a verbal message to the support commander. I would say to the prisoner:

“‘Step over here and face in that direction. I am going to send you back to our support commander by this soldier (indicating Kline). I want to warn you that any attempt to escape will be disastrous for you.’

“I will say to Private Kline:

“‘You conduct this prisoner back to the support commander as quickly as possible. Have him march in front of you. Place the point of your bayonet close to his back. Do not let him escape. As you pass outguard No. 2 notify Corporal W of the circumstances and tell him that we have gone on over to outguard No. 3. Tell the support commander where we captured the prisoner; that I could get nothing out of him except that he is lost; that you have notified Corporal W at outguard No. 2. That I am going to outguard No. 3 and will reconnoiter in that vicinity and over as far as outguard No. 1 of Support No. 3. You will remain at the support to be available as a guide in case the Lieutenant needs you. Do you understand all that you are to do?’

“On receiving an affirmative reply I would direct Kline and the prisoner ‘Move out.’”

The Director: “I should say that you have covered the situation most completely. It is most gratifying to see you officers go about the solution to these problems in this manner. It shows that you appreciate the necessity for going into the details of them.”

Explanation

The Director: “Having disposed of the prisoner, Corporal Canes with the remaining men of the visiting patrol will go to outguard No. 3 and make the approach to it in the same manner as heretofore indicated. The prisoner’s rifle will be hidden in the brush. It can be secured in the morning. Corporal Canes would not want to be bothered with it at this time.”

Visiting Patrol Card No. 5

Director’s Key

1. Distribute Situation No. 5 and explain.

2. Disposition of prisoners—send back to support commander.

3. Explain why send prisoner to support commander.

4. Instructions to prisoner.

5. Orders to Kline and message to support commander. Conduct prisoner back. Notify commander of Outguard No. 2. Contents of message to support commander.

6. Move on to Outguard No. 3. Identification.

Procedure

The class is now conducted to the sentinel post of outguard No. 3 where the following situation is distributed:

The Problem

Situation No. 6:

You have arrived at outguard No. 3. The outguard has just been alarmed by the sentinel. The outguard commander suggests that you, Corporal Canes, accompany him to the sentinel post. You agree. The Corporal and yourself and the two members of your visiting patrol proceed towards the sentinel. As you approach the sentinel identifies you and calls “Silence.” He tells you that he has heard a suspicious noise in front of his post and points in the direction from whence it came.

Required:

What do you do?

Solution

The Director: “Captain Hall, what would you do under the circumstances?”

Captain Hall: “It is the business of the visiting patrol to investigate suspicious incidents that may be reported by the sentinels. So I would go out and investigate this one. I would take the two men of my patrol with me.”

The Director: “We will assume that you are senior to the outguard commander. Would you give him any instructions?”

Captain Hall: “I think I would have him send out a small patrol to the interval between outguard No. 3 and No. 2.”

Lieutenant Barry: “That is a point I had been thinking about and I had just decided that I would not do that.”

The Director: “On what line of reasoning did you base the decision?”

Lieutenant Barry: “Well, sir, if I were Corporal Canes and going out with my visiting patrol I would not want any other patrol out working around in my immediate vicinity. There would be too much danger of an accident. I would have to put in about half of my time watching out for the other patrol to keep from shooting them or to keep them from shooting me. I am sure if I knew another patrol from the outguard were out here I could not devote my undivided attention to my reconnaissance of the enemy. I would have Corporal R bring two of his men up to the sentinel post and remain there until I get back or if anything happens to me to come to my assistance. I would have the remaining men of the outguard remain on the alert at their post.”

The Director: “I think you are right in all you have said and I feel sure that Captain Hall will agree with you on reconsideration. Is that not so, Captain Hall?”

Captain Hall: “Yes, sir.”

The Director: “We then decide that Corporal Canes is to make the reconnaissance with the two remaining men of his visiting patrol; that he is going to have Corporal R bring up two men of the outguard to the vicinity of the sentinel post and that the remainder of the outguard is to remain at the alert at its post. Now, Lieutenant Hunt, just how will you put this decision into the form of orders?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would issue my orders as follows:

“‘You have all the information of the enemy and our own troops.

“‘The visiting patrol will conduct a reconnaissance in that direction (indicating).

“‘Manley and Harrison will follow me at the usual distance.

“‘Corporal R, have two men of your outguard come up here. If anything happens to my patrol come to our assistance. Have the remainder of your men remain at the outguard on the alert.’

“When all is ready I will say:

“‘Manley and Harrison, follow me.’

“We will proceed in Indian file towards the suspicious noise reported by the sentinel.”

Visiting Patrol Card No. 6

Director’s Key

1. On arrival at Outguard No. 3 distribute Situation No. 6 and explain.

2. Duty of visiting patrol to investigate suspicious occurrences on outpost line.

3. Question of Patrol from outguard.

4. Visiting patrol makes reconnaissance. Two men brought up to sentinel post as a reserve. Outguard to remain in place at the alert.

5. Orders.

Procedure

The class is now conducted to a point about 100 yards to the front of the sentinel post of Outguard No. 3, where Situation No. 7 is distributed and such explanation as may be necessary is made.

The Problem

Situation No. 7:

You have arrived at this point. You discover a cavalryman’s horse, fully equipped, tied to that tree. You reconnoiter the vicinity but can find no other signs of the enemy.

Required:

What action do you take?

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, how do you size up the situation?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I have come to the conclusion that the enemy prisoner told the truth when he said he was lost. I do not believe there are any other men of the enemy in this immediate vicinity. Had there been other men with the prisoner he surely would not have dismounted and tied his horse to a tree. If there were more in the party one man would have been left out here to hold the horse while the prisoner went forward to reconnoiter on foot. I arrive at the conclusion that this is his horse and that he is a member of the enemy patrol that was operating over on the right of our line. He got lost and was trying to find some of the men of his own patrol when he ran into us. I do not think he realized that he was inside of our lines at the time he was captured.”

The Director: “Has any member of the class a different version of the affair than what Lieutenant Williams has just explained?”

Captain Hastings: “I do not think we would be justified in assuming that there are no more of the enemy in this vicinity. Two enemy scouts have been captured that we know of. These two men were not scouting around here alone. There must be more of them somewhere. It may be that others have come in contact with our outguards that we have not heard about.”

The Director: “Have you heard any firing tonight along our lines?”

Captain Hastings: “No, sir.”

The Director: “Don’t you think that if there had been very much enemy activity along our lines that there would have been firing somewhere? I think it is fair to assume that. I believe we would be pretty well justified in assuming that the enemy activity is limited to perhaps a patrol from which our prisoner became lost.

“The question now before us is what are we going to do? Lieutenant Wallace, what would you do?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would get this horse back as quickly as possible and then I would extend my reconnaissance farther to the front.”

The Director: “Where would you send the horse?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would send him back to the support commander.”

The Director: “Where would you send him, Lieutenant Ralston?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I am not so sure I would send him anywhere for the present. If we are to continue our reconnaissance to the front I do not figure that I would spare a man to send the horse back. In any event I would send him no farther than outguard No. 3. And I am not so sure that I would go any farther on the reconnaissance. I do not think a visiting patrol—so few men—should go very far in front of the line of observation at night.”

The Director: “Captain Harvey, what do you think about all of this?”

Captain Harvey: “I agree with Lieutenant Ralston. Another point that presents itself to me is this: When the support commander gets the prisoner we sent back he will probably send our section leader out with a patrol to reconnoiter the front and the sergeant will want to see me and get what information I have. The natural place for him to come first to find me will be outguard No. 3. I think I should get back there at least by the time the patrol from the support reaches there. I estimate that I could stay around here for a few minutes yet, but I would have to be getting back pretty soon.”

The Director: “What would be your decision based on your sizing up of the situation?”

Captain Harvey: “To send the horse back to outguard No. 3 right away.

“Manley and myself would stay out here in concealment for, say five minutes longer, and then go back to the outguard by way of the sentinel post.”

The Director: “Any member of the class that does not agree with that decision? (After waiting a moment.) There seems to be none, so we will agree to that solution of the problem.”

Visiting Patrol Card No. 7

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to a point 100 yards in front of sentinel post of Outguard No. 3. Distribute Situation No. 7.

2. Size up situation. Estimate of connection of enemy prisoner with the cavalry horse.

3. Disposition of horse.

4. Future action of patrol commander.

5. Decision; send horse to Outguard No. 3; Go to Outguard No. 3 to meet commander of patrol sent out from support.

Procedure

The class is now conducted to outguard No. 3, at which place Situation No. 8 is distributed and explained.

The Problem

Situation No. 8:

You have arrived at outguard No. 3. On your way back the outguard commander who was at the sentinel post joined you. He left the two additional men at the sentinel post. You explained to him what happened on your reconnaissance to the front.

At this moment Sergeant Hamilton, the section leader in command of a patrol of one squad from the support, arrives, and states that he has been ordered to make a reconnaissance to the front of our line of observation. Patrols are going out from the other supports to reconnoiter their fronts. Sergeant Hamilton says:

“Corporal Canes, give me all the information you have.”

Required:

State the information you, Corporal Canes, would give to Sergeant Hamilton.

Procedure

The Director: “Now, I assume that each of you have followed the details of the problem. You know just what has taken place. Now, I want each of you to write out on your pads just what you would say to Sergeant Hamilton in reply to his instructions,

“Give me all the information you have.”

“I want you to write down the exact words that you would use if you were Corporal Canes.”

When all the members of the class have completed their solutions they will be collected and again distributed, making sure that no man receives his own solution back again.

The Director calls upon one or more members of the class to read the solution in his possession and it is discussed.

At the conclusion of this the Director will submit the following solution for discussion (copies of this will be distributed to the class):

Solution

“When my patrol arrived about midway between outguard No. 2 and outguard No. 3 we captured a soldier of the enemy. I asked several questions. He refused to answer, except that he said he was lost. I sent him back to the support and came on over to outguard No. 3. On arriving there the sentinel told me that he had heard a suspicious noise out in front of his post. I took two men and went out about 100 yards where I found a cavalry horse, fully equipped. Sent him back to the outguard here. Made examination to see if I could find any evidence of other horses or men. Found none. Stayed a few minutes out there. Heard nothing.”

Procedure

The Director reads the solution aloud. The members of the class follow from the copy in their possession.

The Director: “This is merely one solution of the problem. There may be others equally good. This situation was devised to give you practice in imparting information that you may have. On occasions like this time may be limited and the information will have to be given hurriedly and without waste of words. The idea is that you should state the circumstances of the incidents in the fewest words possible and at the same time make clear just what has happened. You will find practice of this kind very valuable and will pay you large dividends on actual service.”

Explanation

The Director: “This is the conclusion of our Terrain Exercise on the subject of the visiting patrol. I feel sure that if any one of you ever have occasion to order out visiting patrols that you will have a better idea of how they go about their tasks than you previously had. I am sure that you know what a visiting patrol is and what it is supposed to do.

“I am sure you will appreciate how necessary it is for your non-commissioned officers to be trained in this work so they may know how to meet the situations and solve the problems that may confront them.

“In outlining the future action of Corporal Canes’ patrol I may say that Sergeant Hamilton now assumes responsibility for the further reconnaissance to the front of the line of observation. Corporal Canes will send Harrison back to the support commander with the horse with a verbal message. Cline has again joined him at outguard No. 3. The three men, Corporal Canes, Manley and Cline continue the operations of the visiting patrol, going on over to outguard No. 1 of support No. 3 and then back to their own support. On arrival there Corporal Canes finds that it is about time for him to start out on the rounds with his 2 o’clock patrol. This has been his busy night.”

Visiting Patrol Card No. 8

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to position of outguard No. 3. Distribute Situation No. 8 and explain.

2. Have members of class write out solutions on pad. Collect and distribute. Read and comment.

3. Distribute solution for discussion. Read it aloud.

4. Explain that this is merely a solution.

5. Situation designed to give practice in stating information.

6. Conclusion of Terrain Exercise. Knowledge of work of visiting patrol. Necessity for training of non-commissioned officers.

7. Future action of visiting patrol. Send back horse. Continue patrol to outguard No. 1 of support No. 3; thence to support. Time to go out with 2 o’clock patrol.

Terrain Exercise No. 9.
A Reconnoitering Patrol

The Problem

General Situation:

A Blue battalion has bivouacked at (a). An outpost with support along (b) has been established. Support number (c) under the command of Lieutenant A is at (d). It is now 2 o’clock p. m. The posting of the outguards has been completed. The support commander has made his inspection and sent in his report to the outpost commander. The covering troops have been withdrawn to the support. There has been no contact with the enemy.

Situation No. 1:

At 2:05 o’clock p. m., a Mr. ——, who lives at (e) comes to you, Lieutenant A, and gives you the following information:

I have just had a telephone conversation with a friend of mine, who lives about (f) miles (g) of here. He states that there is a Red force in the vicinity of (h). The telephone went out before I could get any further information.

Required:

What action do you, Lieutenant A, take?

Explanation of Symbols

(a) State the location of the bivouac of the main body of the battalion. This should be at a logical point with reference to the location of the outpost line.

(b) State the location of the general line of outpost supports.

(c) The number of the support commanded by Lieutenant A. This should be given a logical number with reference to the whole line of supports.

(d) The location of support (c). The point where the Terrain Exercise is to start.

(e) State where Mr. —— lives.

(f) The number of miles from the support to where Mr. ——’s friend lives. This should be several miles away.

(g) The direction stated by points of compass (North, South, East, West).

(h) The general location of the enemy. This should be in the direction which it is intended to send the reconnoitering patrol.

Procedure

The members of the class are assembled at (d), where the outpost support is located.

The Director will distribute copies of the problem to members of the class. A few minutes are allowed them to read it. The Director then reads the problem aloud and points out the places mentioned. One or more of the members of the class are called upon to state their understanding of the situation.

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the class to consider himself as being Lieutenant A, commanding the outguard located at this point. Mr. —— has just given you the information as stated in the situation. What are you going to do about it? Lieutenant Williams, just what would you do?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I would send out a patrol.”

The Director: “How do you arrive at this decision so quickly?”

Lieutenant Williams: “Well, sir, I think that would be the thing to do. I have gotten some important information about the enemy. Details are lacking. I would want to know more about how many troops he has, what kind of troops they are and what he is doing. I can see no better way to get this information than by sending out a patrol to secure it for me.”

The Director: “Captain Hastings, what do you think about that?”

Captain Hastings: “There is always a question in a case like this as to whether a pair of scouts should be employed or whether a patrol is to be sent out. I should size up the situation a few minutes. Examine my map, if I had one, and then decide what measures I would take. Another point that presents itself to me is the question as to whether I should send out the men from this support or whether it would be better to send the information back to the outpost commander and let him decide what is to be done.”

The Director: “Patrolling is usually conducted from the supports. I think you would be justified in taking the initiative in this case. At all events, let us assume that you would.”

Captain Hastings: “Can the Director give us some information on the question of the employment of scouts or patrols.”

The Director: “There are no hard and fast rules that may be invoked in arriving at such a decision, but there are certain principles that may be applied, and when reconnaissance enterprises are to be undertaken the condition should be examined closely. The scout or pair of scouts would, as a rule, be preferred when concealment is highly essential, and usually when concealment, though not essential, is possible throughout the reconnaissance, or when the enemy habitually conducts his reconnaissance with strong patrols and scouts have a better chance of eluding him.

“In the following cases a patrol should be employed: When information has to be sent in at intervals; when it is desired to capture prisoners; when concealment is deemed impossible; when the reconnaissance is to be extended over such a period of time that relief of scouts will be necessary; when an urgent mission has been assigned and it is necessary to push through the enemy’s covering troops.

“In some cases it may be advisable to employ a patrol for the first part of the reconnaissance and at a certain point break up into scouting parties of a single scout or pair of scouts.

“If possible, the individual preferences of the most efficient scouts should be considered. Some men lose self-confidence if attached to a patrol and are limited in their actions by the direction of the patrol leader; others dislike the responsibility of uncontrolled action.

“These are only general rules and cannot be followed blindly. The circumstances of each occasion must be taken into consideration in arriving at a decision.

“Now, considering the points I have stated, would you employ scouts or a patrol in the case under consideration, Captain Hastings?”

Captain Hastings: “I think a small patrol would be more suitable. There will probably be messages to send back and the patrol may have to remain out for a considerable length of time. I believe a patrol would be more suitable than individual scouts.”

The Director: “Let us then decide that we are to send out a reconnoitering patrol to secure the information we desire.

“Before going further with the problem, I want to say a few words about the patrol.”

Explanation

The Director: “The first duty of a patrol is to get information, and information is greatly increased in value if the enemy does not know that it has been obtained. The patrol is required, primarily, to discover whether or not the enemy is in a certain locality. This information is only useful to the officer who sent the patrol out. It is, therefore, the next duty of the patrol to get the information back as soon as possible, especially when the enemy is met.

“Next of importance in the duties of the patrol is to continue to observe the enemy when once discovered, to follow him up and ascertain the direction taken if he retires, or to fall back if he advances in strength, endeavoring to keep even with him on a flank. The enemy is certain to send out scouts to his front, but may neglect his flanks.

“Boldness must be tempered with caution. It is useless to obtain information if you cannot get it back where it will do some good. A little information sent in in time to be of use is clear gain to your side. A patrol that finds out all about the enemy and ends up by falling into the hands of the enemy is a dead loss not only in men but in time as other patrols will have to be sent out to get the same information on which important decisions may depend.”

Procedure

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, one of the first questions that will present itself to the support commander is the selection of a patrol leader. What factors would you consider in this matter?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “In the first place I would want a non-commissioned officer for patrol leader; further, I would want to send out the best qualified one in the platoon. To meet this requirement I would select the platoon sergeant to lead this patrol. The importance of the mission is such as to warrant sending him.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, do you agree with this solution?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “No, sir. I realize the importance of the mission of the patrol. I know we should have a qualified man to lead it, but I should hesitate to send my platoon sergeant out.”

The Director: “I think you are right and when Lieutenant Wallace reflects on the matter I think he will agree with you. The platoon sergeant has a multitude of duties to perform in connection with the interior administration of the platoon. In his administrative capacity he is to the platoon what the first sergeant is to the company. In addition, he has his tactical duties to perform. He is the second in command, and should anything happen to the platoon leader he automatically assumes charge. There is no other man in the platoon who is so familiar with all the details of the dispositions of the support and the orders under which it is operating. I do not believe it would be good policy to send the platoon sergeant out on a reconnoitering mission which may well extend into the night.

“Now, having rejected the idea of sending the platoon sergeant, what man would you send in charge of the patrol, Captain Harvey?”

Captain Harvey: “I would send a section leader. The one whose section is on the line of outguards. He seems to me to be the most available man for the duty.”

The Director: “I agree with you. Ordinarily in an outpost support of this kind we take the outguards from one of the sections of the platoon and hold the other section to form the main body of the support. This leaves the commander of the outguard section surplus in a way, and makes him available for important patrol duty, such as that we have under consideration.

“The next question that comes up is the strength of the patrol. This is a reconnoitering patrol. Its mission is to gain information of the enemy. It need not be made strong to give it fighting power, for it will not engage the enemy in combat except as the last resort. It must not have any more men than are absolutely necessary to carry out its mission, for every additional man is a drag on the patrol leader and subject the patrol to just that much more danger of detection by the enemy. There will be messages to be sent back, at least one and possibly two or three. The patrol must be sufficiently strong to provide these messengers without reducing it below two men.

“Having all of these points in mind, what would be the strength of the patrol, Captain Harvey?”

Captain Harvey: “I should say there would be at least two messages to be sent back, and it may be necessary to send one of them by two messengers. I would not want the patrol leader to be left out alone. These factors would indicate a strength of 5 men. The patrol leader and 4 men.”

The Director: “Has any member of the class a different idea than this?”

Captain Hodges: “In my own mind I had tentatively decided to send a complete squad. It seems to me that we should send enough men so that if they have to fight their way through to get the information desired they could do it. Four men would not be sufficient for the purpose. I should like some enlightenment on this phase of the subject.”

The Director: “Captain James, can you answer Captain Hodges?”

Captain James: “In the first place, a reconnoitering patrol does not fight except as a last resort to escape capture or to give warning of the approach of the enemy and to delay him by firing on him. In the next place, I do not see how this patrol will ever get close enough to the enemy to get any really important information if it starts to fight its way through the Red covering troops. Once a shot is fired the Red commander will send out sufficient patrols to keep your patrol at a distance, and it will get no information whatever. My idea is that any information this patrol gets will be by avoiding the Red covering troops and not by fighting.”

The Director: “I think you are correct. The smaller the patrol, within limitations, the better. I think a leader and four men is about right. Lieutenant Baker, tell us what you would include in your order to the patrol leader.”

Lieutenant Baker: “I would first tell the patrol leader all the information I have about the enemy and our troops. I would give him general direction as to where I want the patrol to go. I would tell him what information I want regarding the enemy. Tell him in general terms where to return and where to send messages.”

The Director: “The final question that comes up is that of the equipment of the men. How would you have them equipped, Captain Hall?”

Captain Hall: “I would want them to go lightly equipped. They should have a ration in their haversack; not over 40 rounds of ammunition and their rifle. I would have them leave the bayonets with their packs. They will not need them.”

Explanation

The Director: “You see the process we have gone through to determine that we are going to send out a patrol of five men from the support. You see how many things you have to consider in arriving at a decision as to what you are going to do. This is what we call making an ‘Estimate of the Situation.’ It is merely a process of sizing up the situation and deciding on what you are going to do to meet it. An officer who fails to do this will in the end make a failure of the soldier game. The one who does it habitually has far greater chances for the operations he is conducting to turn out a success. Just a few minutes’ systematic thought will save you a lot of military blunders.

“Based on this estimate of the situation we arrive at a decision to send out a patrol of five men to secure information of the enemy. Lieutenant Barry, assume that you are Lieutenant A, commanding the support. Can you give us the orders necessary to put the decision into operation?”

Solution

Lieutenant Barry: “I will try, sir. I will order:

“‘Sergeant C (platoon Sergeant) turn out a reconnoitering patrol of four privates, with Sergeant B (section leader) as patrol leader. Have the men carry a ration and 40 rounds of ammunition. Leave bayonets here. Have Sergeant B report to me as soon as he is ready to go out.’

“I will frame up my orders to the patrol leader, and as soon as he reports to me I will give them to him:

“‘I have just received information that there is a Red force in the vicinity of (h). Here is the point. Here is the road leading in that direction. (Indicating on the map.)[15]

“‘There are no other patrols out from this support. I will notify the other supports that you are going out.

“‘You will take this reconnoitering patrol of four men and proceed toward (h) and find out what you can about the enemy. Information as to his strength and composition and what he is doing is particularly desired.

“‘Return when you have accomplished your mission.

“‘Carlin will be second in command.

“‘Here is a map.

“‘Send messages here.’

“I will send a runner to the other support commanders to inform them of the fact that I am sending out a reconnoitering patrol and give them the information we have about the enemy.

“I will send the citizen who gave me the information to the outpost commander accompanied by a runner and a message:

“‘I am sending you a Mr. ——, who lives at ——. He informs me that he just had a telephone conversation with a friend of his who lives —— miles —— of here and who states that a Red force is in the vicinity of (h). The telephone went out before he could get any further information. I am sending out a reconnoitering patrol of four men under Sergeant B to find out what they can. I will notify other supports of the action I have taken.’

“I will explain to Mr. —— that the information he has given me is very important and tell him that it will be necessary for him to go back to the outpost commander with the runner.”

Procedure

The Director: “That is very good. Are there any questions? Please do not hesitate to ask questions. They are the very life of the Terrain Exercise.”

The Director endeavors to answer any question that may be asked.

Each member of the class is now required to write out the orders of the support commander to Sergeant B, the patrol leader, and the message that he would send back to the outpost commander by the runner who conducts Mr. —— to him.

The orders and messages are collected and distributed again. One or more members of the class are required to read those in his possession.

Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 1

Director’s Key

1. Prepare copies of the problem and situation, one for each member of the class.

2. Conduct the class to the point where the problem is to be started.

3. Distribute copies of problem. Read problem and have members of class explain tactical situation.

4. Work out solution in detail. Scouts or a patrol. Patrol, messages, capture prisoners, concealment, combat.

5. Duties of patrol. Combat with enemy. Continue observation. Get information back.

6. Selection of patrol leader. Platoon sergeant. Section leader. Explain duties of platoon sergeant. Availability of section leader.

7. Strength of patrol.

8. Order for patrol: Information of enemy and our own troops. Where to go. When to return. Where messages are to be sent.

9. Explain necessity for estimate of situation.

10. Solution. Orders to platoon sergeant. Order for patrol leader. Runner to adjoining supports. Send citizen to outpost commander.

Procedure

The Director: “Each member of the class will now consider himself to be Sergeant B. who has been designated as the patrol leader. Lieutenant Hunt, what equipment would you carry?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would not want to be encumbered with a rifle, so I would not carry one. I would want a pair of field glasses, a compass, a watch, a wire cutter, pencils and a book of field message blanks. If one were available I would want a map of the country over which the patrol is to operate. Each member of the patrol should be provided with a compass and a wire cutter. At least one man should carry a combination flag kit for wigwag and semaphore signaling——”

Lieutenant Williams: “I have understood that visual signaling is about to be discarded in the service. Can the Director give us some information on that point?”

The Director: “There is a tendency to throw it into the discard, but I am not so sure that it is right. There are times when visual signaling has its place and will save a lot of time and trouble. The codes are easily learned and any intelligent man can master the process within a comparatively short time. I think there should be a few men in every rifle platoon who are good signalers. Going back to the equipment of the patrol, I think Lieutenant Hunt has enumerated the essential items of equipment.

“Lieutenant Williams, suppose you were out on patrol duty and captured one of the enemy scouts, what is the first thing you would look for on him?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I would look for some marking that would give me an identification—that would give me information as to the outfit to which he belongs.”

The Director: “That is right. During the war both sides took exceptional measures to secure identification of units that were opposed to them. Of course, much of this work was done during the period of so-called trench warfare, but the same idea holds good in open warfare. Identification of the units to which prisoners belong is always sought after by the intelligence service. Now, Lieutenant Williams, what does all of this point to with respect to our own patrol?”

Lieutenant Williams: “That the members of the patrol should carry nothing with them that will serve to give the enemy an identification, should one of them be captured.”

The Director: “You are right. Should one of our soldiers be captured, the enemy should be able to secure from him only his name and rank. The prisoner should give no other information whatever.

“Before going out with a patrol the patrol leader makes an inspection of his men. What is included in this inspection, Captain Hastings?”

Captain Hastings: “If I were making the inspection I would satisfy myself that every man is physically fit for the duty to be performed. I would not want a man who has been on some strenuous duty and is all worn out. I would see that every man is properly armed and equipped, that each man has a ration, 40 pounds of ammunition and a canteen full of water. I would not allow a man to carry his roll. I would see that the equipment is arranged so that it will not rattle or glisten in the sunlight. I would see that no man carried anything that would give the enemy an identification or information that would be of value to him. I will verify my own equipment and make sure that I have everything that I will probably require.”

The Director will now hand out the slips bearing special situation No. 2:

The Problem

Situation No. 2:

You, Sergeant B, have been designated to command the reconnoitering patrol, consisting of Privates Anderson, Bailey, Carlin and Davis. Lieutenant A has given you your orders and turned the men over to you.

Your orders are:

“I have just received information that there is a Red force in the vicinity of (h). (The point (h) and the road leading toward it are pointed out on the map or on the ground.)

“There are no other patrols out from this support. I will notify the other supports that you are going out.

“You will take this reconnoitering patrol of four men and proceed towards (h), and find out what you can about the enemy. Information as to his strength and composition, and what he is doing is particularly desired.

“Return when you have accomplished your mission.

“Send messages here.”

Required:

The orders that you give.

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, we will assume that you are Sergeant B. You have made the inspection of your patrol and corrected all deficiencies. You are ready to give your orders and arrange for the patrol to move out. Just what would you say and what would you do?”

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would spread my map out on the ground where the men could see it. In the presence of the support commander I would give my orders:

“‘Information has been received that there is a Red force in the vicinity of (h). Here is the place on the map (indicating). We are here (indicating). This is the road that we will guide on (indicating). There are no other patrols out from our support.

“‘We are going out as a reconnoitering patrol. We will find out what we can about the enemy. Our special mission is to find out his strength, his composition and what he is doing.

“‘Anderson, you will be advance man; march on the left-hand side of the road.

“‘Bailey, you follow Anderson at a distance of 25 yards, on the right-hand side of the road.

“‘Carlin, you will march with me.

“‘Davis, you are get-away man. Follow me at a distance of 75 yards.

“‘I will indicate the route and assembly places as we go along. Drill regulation signals will be used.

“‘Messages will be brought to the support commander here.’

“I will then inquire: What time has the Lieutenant? I will set my watch to agree and direct:

“‘All men who have watches set them at —— (time).’

“I will then command:

“‘1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION, and follow with 1. With ball cartridges, 2. LOAD.’

“I will then direct:

“‘MOVE OUT.’”

Procedure

The Director: “That is very good. I think you have covered all the points that should be included in the patrol commander’s order. I wish each member of the class would compare this order with the kind that is usually mumbled out to members of a patrol by the average patrol leader at maneuvers. It is a fact that most patrols go out, either with orders that they do not understand or with no orders at all. Do not allow this to be done under any circumstances. You can well afford to hold up the departure of the patrol until the patrol commander can dope out his orders and give them properly. And you must insist on this being done. If you do not do so it will never be done properly.

“Now I want each member of the class to write our Sergeant B’s orders to his patrol. Try to get the order in the language that Lieutenant Wallace used in his solution.”

When this is completed the papers are collected and redistributed as indicated in previous exercises. The class is now ready to proceed with the next situation.

Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 2

Director’s Key

1. Each member of the class to consider himself as being Sergeant B.

2. Equipment of patrol leader: Field glass, compass, watch, wire cutter, pencil, message blanks. Members:—Compass, wire cutter, flag kit.

3. Visual signaling. Identification.

4. Inspection: Physically fit for duty; arms and equipment; equipment rattle or glisten; verify own equipment.

5. Hand out Special Situation No. 2. Explain.

6. Map. Information of enemy and own troops; mission of patrol; tactical dispositions; signals; second in command; messages; synchronize watches; load rifles; move out.

7. Explain necessity for training in giving these verbal orders.

8. Write out the orders of Sergeant B. Collect and redistribute them.

Procedure

The class is now conducted to the front to the point where one of the outguards of the support is supposed to be posted.

The slips bearing Situation No. 3 are handed out.

Situation No. 3:

At this point is posted Outguard No. ... of Support No. (c). The main body of the outguard is (Indicate). The outguard commander is here.

Required:

What do you, Sergeant B, do.

Explanation

The Director: “The commander of a patrol will see the commander of the outguard at the place where he crosses the line of observation and give him information as to where he is going and what he is going for. In addition to this he secures any information that the outguard commander may have of the country to the front and the enemy.

“This procedure is especially necessary in the present case. Sergeant B’s mission will probably keep him out late, so that it will be after dark when he comes back through the lines. In order to avoid chances of being mistaken for the enemy a recognition signal should be arranged for at this time.”

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, you are Sergeant B, the patrol leader. The outguard commander has come out to meet you. Just what would you do with respect to your patrol and what would you say to the outguard commander?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “In the first place I will signal the patrol to halt. I will then tell the outguard commander where we are going and all about the mission of the patrol. I will arrange a recognition signal with him. I will find out any information about the enemy that he may have.”

The Director: “All right. You have told us all about what you will do. Now let us do it. Assume that I am the outguard commander. Now just what will you say to me?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I will say:

“‘Information has been received that there is a Red force in the vicinity of (h). (Indicating on the map.) We are going out as a reconnoitering patrol, guiding on the ... road. (Indicating on the map.) We are to determine the enemy’s strength, and composition and what he is doing. I have four other men with me.

“‘We will probably be out until after dark and I want to arrange a recognition signal with you. If agreeable to you it will be the call 3—4 or the same tapped on the rifle stock.

“‘Have you any information about the enemy?’

“After doing all of this I will signal the patrol FORWARD MARCH and proceed on my way.”

The Director: “That is very good. I wish you would explain to the class just how you propose to employ the recognition signal.”

Lieutenant Ralston: “In this case we agreed on the signal 3—4. When any of us approach the sentinel post of the outguard after dark we will use the recognition signal. If there is no danger of enemy patrols lurking in the vicinity the man approaching the post calls out 3—4; the sentinel on post answers the call by calling 3—4 and they both know that everything is all right and it is safe for the scout to proceed. If there is danger of enemy patrols discovering the signal should it be called out, the man coming in would approach the sentinel post cautiously. He would tap 3—4 on the stock of his rifle until it is recognized by the sentinel and the signal returned by the latter tapping 3—4 on the stock of his rifle.” (The method should be illustrated.)

The Director: “Captain Harvey, why do we go to all this trouble?”

Captain Harvey: “A sentinel on post, after he has been harassed by enemy scouts for a while, takes no chances. He generally shoots first and then challenges. The recognition signal is simply an expedient to lessen the chances of accident.”

The Director: “Now all of these details may seem to be small affairs to you. But the man who knows them and requires them to be carried out in service is the man who will be successful in military operations. Almost any dub can blunder through, paying the price in the lives of his men. It is the man that knows all of the little details of tactics that will come through successfully with his command without the sacrifice of a man more than is necessary to accomplish his mission. The proposition of measuring accomplishment by the number of casualties is old stuff and will not go with the commander that is up to his job. It is the man who accomplishes his mission with the least number of casualties that is the successful military leader.”

Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 3

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to point where outguard is supposed to be posted. Hand out Situation No. 3.

2. Explain what is done by patrol leader. Tell outguard commander about patrol going out. Arrange for recognition signal. Get information of enemy.

3. Proceed to solution. Require member of class to state exact words used by patrol commander.

4. Explain the method of using the recognition signal.

5. Explain necessity for details. Measure success by number of casualties avoided.

Procedure

The class is now conducted along the route of the patrol for a distance of some 600 yards, where it is halted.

Explanation

The Director: “It is assumed that the patrol has advanced a distance of some two miles from the outpost and has arrived at this vicinity. This assumption is made in order to save time and energy. We can get just as much training out of our Terrain Exercise by coming this 600 yards as we could by walking the entire two miles. The idea is that we get into new terrain for each phase of the problem.”

Procedure

The Director now distributes the papers bearing Situation No. 4 to the members of the class.

The Problem

Situation No. 4:

You, Sergeant B, the patrol leader, have arrived at this point. There has been no contact with the enemy.

Required:

What is the formation of your patrol at this moment?

Explanation

The Director: “Before going into the details of this situation, I desire to say a few words about the conduct of the operations of a patrol. It is impossible to lay down any hard and fast rule for the conduct of a patrol. Each situation will have to be worked out by itself. Each solution will vary with the nature of the country over which you are operating and what the enemy does. A few general principles only may be enunciated.

“The patrol leader, as he advances toward his objective, will mentally make note of various intermediate objectives to serve as stepping stones for his further advance. He can never be certain that he will not encounter the enemy, and must be prepared at all times for such an event.

“If the patrol advances in one body, a hostile patrol will allow them to approach and then ambuscade and capture them. Further, all the members of the patrol would not be able to see much more than one man. If the patrol advances in an extended line of skirmishers, capture is rendered much more difficult, but each man will be acting more or less independently, and it will be most difficult for the patrol leader to control the operations.

“A patrol should assume the general formation of a column on the march, i. e., there is an advance guard, a main body, flankers, and a rear guard. These several elements may be represented by only one man, but the principle is exactly the same. The advance man is necessary to give warning of the approach of the enemy. The flankers are necessary to watch toward the flanks and prevent the enemy from ambuscading the patrol or working around its rear unobserved and cutting off its line of retreat. The main body is necessary to back up the advance man and protect him. The rear man is the “get-away man,” so that in case the patrol is surprised by the enemy, at least one man will have a good chance to escape and carry the news back to the support commander. You must always remember that a patrol that goes out and does not return, or is not heard from within a reasonable time, is the cause for a great deal of uneasiness and anxiety back at the outpost line.

“Some authorities advocate that the patrol commander march as the advance man of the patrol. This is not believed to be good tactics. He should be centrally located so that he will be able to control the operations of the patrol. The patrol leader has been selected for this particular line of work. The officer who sent him out is depending on him to carry out the mission upon which he has been sent and to get information back. He should not, therefore, needlessly make himself a target for the enemy marksman who may be lying in concealment at the turn of a road or trail. If he is the leading man he will be so busily occupied with the task of observation, that he will have little time available for conducting the operations of the other members of the patrol. Furthermore, if anything happens at the front that needs his attention, he can go there in a very short space of time.

“When a small patrol is advancing along a road which is more or less winding and has brush and trees along the side, it is believed that the Boni point formation will usually meet the requirements. In this formation the leading man walks along one side of the road, close up to the brush. The next man follows him at a distance of about 25 yards on the opposite side of the road. The remaining men follow at varying distances on alternate sides of the road. The rear or get-away man should march at least 75 yards in rear of his next preceding man. Flankers are sent out when necessary and where it is possible to do so.

“You will be surprised to see how admirably this formation will meet the situation under the conditions stated. The next time you are out on a winding road through the woods, step over to one side and observe to the front. Then go to the other side and repeat the operation. You will find that from one side your view will be very much restricted, while from the opposite side it will be much more extended. One trial will convince you of the suitability of this formation.”

Procedure

The Director: “Now, having in mind what I have just said, I want each member of the class to determine for himself just where each member of the patrol would be at the moment he, himself, arrived at this point. (The Director indicates the point on the ground where the patrol leader is.) Make a rough sketch of this vicinity to show the solution.

(Note.—The location selected for this situation should be one where there is something that will test the tactical knowledge of the student. To base it otherwise would be of little value.)

“We will allow a few minutes for the solution of this part of the problem, during which time you should look over the ground and decide upon the disposition of your patrol, just where each man will be at this particular moment.”

When the members of the class have completed this solution they will be collected and discussed.

(Note.—The discussion will depend upon the solution. The points included in the Director’s explanation should be brought out and fully discussed.)

Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 4

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class along route of patrol to a distance of 600 yards.

2. Explain distance assumption.

3. Hand out Situation No. 4 and explain.

4. Operation of patrol; no hard and fast rules; objectives; advancing in one body; skirmishers; column on march; patrol leader; Boni point system.

5. Solution: Make sketch showing disposition of patrol.

6. Discussion of solution.

Procedure

The members of the class are now conducted along the line of march of the patrol to a point where the road may be observed for a distance of some several hundred yards.

The Director distributes the papers containing the following situation:

The Problem

Situation No. 5:

The patrol has arrived at this point. You, Sergeant B, are here. The leading man halts, crouches down, points down the road, and holds his rifle horizontally above his head.

Required:

What action do you, Sergeant B, take?

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, just what would you do under the circumstances?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would interpret the actions of the leading man to indicate that he has observed the enemy and that they are in small numbers. I would signal the patrol to halt and then signal ‘DOWN,’ which would indicate to the men that they are to take cover. I would then join the leading man to see for myself what is happening out in front.”

The Director: “I think we may all agree that your solution up to this point is correct. Now, let us assume that the leading man is at —— (indicate exact location) and you are here. I want you to show the class exactly how you would join him.

(Note.—Lieutenant Ralston gives the practical demonstration and the class moves up to where the leading man is supposed to be.)

“Is there any member of the class that would do it differently?”

(Note.—If any member has any criticism of the solution, have him go back to the starting point and demonstrate how he would do it.)

Solution

The Director: “Captain Harvey, let us assume that you are Sergeant B. You have joined your leading man here and he points out to you what he has seen. You observe six enemy infantrymen marching down the road in a formation similar to the one your patrol is now in. The leading man is at ——. (The Director points out the exact location of the enemy’s leading man, which should be at least 500 yards distant.) Apparently they have not observed you. What is your reaction to this situation?”

Captain Harvey: “At this moment I would have no means of telling whether these men are an enemy patrol or the point of an advance guard. The formation would be about the same. Can the Director give us definite information on that point?”

The Director: “All right. Let us assume for the moment that it is an enemy patrol. What would you do?”

Captain Harvey: “Under those circumstances, I would have my patrol take cover and let the enemy patrol go on by.”

The Director: “That would be the logical thing to do. Now, let us assume that the enemy are the point of an advance guard. What would you do?”

Captain Harvey: “In that event I would open fire on them immediately.”

The Director: “What would be your object in doing that?”

Captain Harvey: “By opening fire I give warning to our outpost that the enemy is advancing and I delay him because he will have to stop and make more or less reconnaissance before proceeding.”

The Director: “Captain Hodges, do you agree with that solution?”

Captain Hodges: “No, sir. This is a reconnoitering patrol. Its mission is to get information of the enemy’s strength and composition. If we fire on the point of this advance guard, all hope of getting any information of what is behind it is gone. It will not take the advance party commander very long to discover that we are only a patrol and he will simply run over us. Sufficient patrols will be sent out to the flanks to keep us away and we will get no information of any value to our own commander. I most certainly would not fire on the enemy at this time.”

The Director: “What action would you take?”

Captain Hodges: “I would wait a few minutes to try and determine the strength of the enemy’s advance party. This would give me a general line on his strength. I would then send my leading man, who has seen the enemy himself, back to the support commander as fast as he could go with the information we have. This would be a verbal message. I would have no chance to write it out. I would then conduct the rest of my patrol off to the —— flank under cover with a view to working around abreast of the enemy’s main body to secure information of his strength and composition. I would keep in contact with him to try and discover the direction of his deployment and what his intentions are. I would make strenuous efforts to get all of this information back to my support commander.”

The Director: “Those are the points I wanted to bring out. I do not think our patrol would be justified in opening fire on the enemy under the circumstances. We will assume that the enemy troops are a patrol, and that we have decided to avoid them and let them go on by. Just how would you go about that task, Captain James?”

(Note.—Captain James’ solution will depend upon the Terrain and the cover available.)

Procedure

The Director will point out to the class and dwell upon the principle that, having decided to avoid the enemy’s patrol, the all-absorbing duty of the patrol leader is to conceal his patrol so that the enemy will have no information that it is anywhere in the vicinity. The measures to accomplish this will then be worked out in the minutest detail. It may be well to have members of the class take post to represent the members of the patrol and have other members of the class to go out and represent the enemy’s patrol and advance just as they would under service conditions. Then have Captain James solve the problem of getting his patrol under cover without being discovered by the enemy.

Explanation

The Director: “We must give the enemy’s patrol credit for being on the alert and for having such a knowledge of tactics that he will do the reasonably proper thing. If he sees one member of our patrol, the difficulty of avoiding him will be doubly increased. Our task, then, is to get to cover as quickly as possible. It is this seeming trivial action that sometimes calls for all the ingenuity that the patrol leader may possess. The road may be open for a considerable distance, so that if one of the members of our patrol crosses from one side to the other he will be seen and the position disclosed to the enemy. It may be necessary for the patrol to fall back a short distance in order to secure the necessary cover. It may be necessary, in order to avoid discovery, to direct all men on one side of the road to take cover on their side and the remainder to seek cover on the opposite side. This means a dispersion of the patrol and the consequent danger of getting lost and also the difficulties of assembling again. This points to the advisability of training the men to all take cover on the same side of the road when the enemy is encountered as in this case.”

Procedure

When members of the class are in place to represent the enemy and our own patrol, the Director will give a signal and the movement starts. The enemy patrol moves along as it would naturally and Captain James proceeds to get the members of his patrol under cover. His method should be discussed by the class and the defects of it pointed out. It may be necessary to enact the solution several times before a satisfactory one is found.

The demonstration completed and the class again assembled, the Director proceeds with the problem.

The Problem

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, would you send back any message to the support commander about the enemy patrol?”

Solution

Lieutenant Baker: “I think that is a point that the patrol commander should consider. I am not clear in my own mind just what should be done under the circumstances. I would be pleased to have the Director enlighten us on the subject.”

The Director: “We assume that this is a small enemy reconnoitering patrol. It would have the same mission as our own patrol. The point to be considered is whether or not anything in the message you send back would materially assist in the defense of the outpost line, or whether it could contain any information of special value to the outpost commander. Our covering patrols sent out from the supports will keep the enemy away from the outpost line. They will soon discover that it is only a small patrol and will drive it off. We have only a few men with the patrol. If one is sent back with a message at this time it may leave the patrol leader shorthanded when there is something really important that must be sent back. The mission of the patrol is to secure information of the enemy’s main body. That is the information that is of importance to the support and outpost commander. I do not believe the patrol commander would be justified in sending back a message at this time.”

Lieutenant Baker: “I see the point.”

(Note.—Should any members of the class insist that a message should be sent back, he may be called upon to compose the message, and it should be examined to see whether it contains information that is vital to the defense of the outpost.)

Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 5

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to point where a view of road to front for several hundred yards is available.

2. Distribute problem.

3. Enter on solution: Signal of leading man; method of joining leading man.

4. Enemy advance guard or patrol. Question of firing on enemy.

5. Method of evading enemy patrol. Practical demonstration. Discussion of methods; difficulties.

6. Write out message. Contents; information of enemy main.

Procedure

The class is now conducted to a point where they have a view of an open field some 1,200 yards distant. It may be assumed that the patrol has marched several miles in order to arrive at this place.

The Director now distributes the sheets containing Situation No. 6.

Situation No. 6:

The patrol successfully evaded the enemy’s patrol, continued the march, and without encountering any other enemy troops has arrived at this point. The enemy patrol proceeded on down the road toward the outpost line.

On arriving here you observe a force of the enemy marching into that field. They are apparently going into bivouac. You estimate the enemy to be one regiment of Infantry.

Required:

What action do you take?

Procedure

The Director should point out the location of the enemy and should indicate the exact location of each member of the patrol, so that all members of the class will make their solutions on the same basis.

The Director: “Captain Hall, what would you do under the circumstances?”

Captain Hall: “I would send a message to the support commander telling him what I have seen.”

The Director: “Is there anything that you would do before starting to compose your message?”

Captain Hall: “I do not think so. I have located the enemy and want to get the information back as quickly as possible.”

The Director: “That is true. But there are certain things that must be done in connection with it. You have discovered what you estimate to be the enemy’s main body. You know the strength and composition of it. You know what he is doing for the time being. The members of your patrol are still in patrol formation and must be told what to do. In other words, there are several things to be done. In the first place, you want to dispose your men for observation of the enemy and to prevent surprise. Enemy patrols may be operating in the vicinity. One of these may pick you up and prevent you from getting any information back. This is the thing you must guard against. You must consider the contents of your message and you must figure out how you are going to get it back considering the fact that there is an enemy patrol of six men operating between you and the outpost line.

“When the patrol has encountered the enemy the disposition must be such as to permit the leader to observe the hostile force for the purpose of forming an estimate of its strength and composition, dispositions, and probable intentions. With this end in view, the leader must go to a vantage point from which he may obtain a good view of the enemy. The remaining members of the patrol must be so disposed as to guard all the avenues of approach from the known direction of the enemy’s forces, in order to prevent surprise.

“Lieutenant Barry, what disposition would you make of the members of the patrol?”

Solution

Lieutenant Barry: “I would select a good observation point where I can see the enemy and what he is doing. I would select two of the men to carry the message back. I would post a man to watch for enemy patrols and post a get-away man somewhat to my rear.”

The Director: “All right. Select your observation post and give the orders necessary to carry out what you have just said.”

The solution will depend upon the lay of the ground. The points to be brought out are that patrol leaders must be able to observe the enemy in security and not have to bother about being surprised by enemy patrols. The lookouts will be posted so that they can watch the approaches. The men that are to carry the message should be with Sergeant B while he is composing it so that they will be able to tell the support commander all about the situation when they get back with the message. The get-away man will be posted in such position as will make sure that he will not be included in any disaster to the patrol.

Procedure

The dispositions having been completed, the next question is that of the contents of the message.

The Director: “I want each member of the class to write out the body of the message that he would send back to the support commander.”

When the message has been completed and turned in by all the class they are distributed and various members called upon to read and comment on the one in his possession. The points that should be included in the message are:

1. Information of the strength and composition of the enemy main body. What he is doing.

2. Information of the strength and composition of the enemy patrol that was passed.

3. The future action of the patrol in so far as it can be determined.

Solution

The Director should then compose a message covering the above requirements and submit it to the class for discussion.

“Have observed a force of the enemy, estimated one regiment of Infantry at —— (give location). They are now going into bivouac. A hostile patrol of six men passed my patrol at —— (give location) at —— (time) which proceeded in the direction of the outpost line. I will remain in observation until forced to retire or darkness prevents further reconnaissance.”

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, how would you get the message back to the support commander?”

Lieutenant Hunt: “I have had Anderson and Bailey here with me while making my observations and composing the message. I will send it back by them, each man taking a different route. I will read the message to them. I will indicate on the map the general route that each man is to take in going back to the support and caution each of them to look out for the enemy patrol that is between us and the outpost line. By sending the message by two men going over different routes I am almost sure to get it through. If one of them runs into the enemy, it is pretty safe to say that the other will not.”

The Director: “I think your sizing up of the situation is very good. You have taken all the precautions possible for getting the message back safely to the support commander.”

Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 6

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to point where they can see enemy. Distribute Situation No. 6. Point out location of the enemy.

2. Disposition of the patrol for observation—observers, men to carry message, get-away man.

3. Write out message. Contents; information of enemy main body, enemy patrol, future plans of the patrol leader. Prepare message for discussion.

4. Send back message by two messengers. Chances for getting through with it.

Procedure

The Director now distributes the sheets containing Situation No. 7 to the members of the class. A few minutes are allowed to read it over, and it is explained.

The Problem

Situation No. 7:

You are still observing the enemy. Nothing has happened to cause you to change your estimate of his strength and composition. His outposts are being established and they are pushing out patrols to the front and flanks. Your position is becoming untenable. You have heard distant firing in the direction of the Blue troops.

Required:

What action do you, Sergeant B, take?

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what would you do?”

Lieutenant Williams: “I estimate that it is about time for me to be getting out with what is left of my patrol. I have accomplished my mission in so far as the main body of the enemy is concerned. His bivouac for the night has been located. He has established his outposts, which indicates that he will probably not make any more moves today. The operations of the hostile patrols will soon make my position untenable. There is little to be gained by my staying here any longer and taking a chance on being picked up. I would get on my way back to my own troops.”

The Director: “Has any member of the class any criticism of that solution?”

Captain Hastings: “It seems to me that Sergeant B would now have another mission imposed upon him by the conditions. It is that of intercepting enemy scouts from getting back with information from the patrol that passed us. How about that?”

The Director: “That is true. It is the point that I was going to bring up next. The fact that you have heard firing from the direction of our own troops indicates that contact has been gained and the enemy patrol has gotten some information of our forces. This he will endeavor to get back to his own commander. In view of the fact that the patrol leader does not know that our patrol is between him and his own troops he may not think it necessary to take the precautions to send it by two messengers, and I think it is reasonable to assume that he will direct his messenger along the main road where he can make the better time than he can in going across country. You now have two men with you, Carlin and Davis. How would you manage the withdrawal and what would be your formation on the way back? What route would you take? How would you solve all of these points, Captain Hastings?”

Captain Hastings: “I would signal Carlin, who is observer, to join me. This accomplished, I would signal Davis to move out toward the main road. I would make my withdrawal as rapidly as possible and when we get away some little distance I would signal Davis to slow down until we caught up with him. I would get on or near the main road and march with Davis as the leading man, following him at a distance of about 25 yards and have Carlin follow me at the same distance. I would keep a sharp lookout for enemy scouts with a view to intercepting them.”

The Director: “I think your solution meets the situation very well. Are there any questions?”

Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 7

Director’s Key

1. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 7. Read and explain.

2. Withdrawal of patrol. Accomplished mission.

3. New mission to intercept messengers from enemy patrol.

4. Formation for withdrawal.

Procedure

The class is now conducted back along the main road to a point selected for Situation No. 8.

The Problem

Situation No. 8:

When you arrive at this point you observe an enemy scout coming down the road in your direction at a walk. You can see some distance beyond him and he appears to be alone. (The Director will point out the location of the enemy scout.)

Required:

What do you do?

Solution

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, how do you size up the situation?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I estimate that the man is carrying a message from his patrol leader to the commander of the Red forces. My mission is to capture him and prevent the message going back. If practicable the capture must be effected without resorting to firing. If we have to fire it will give warning to the enemy’s patrol operating toward our outpost and the patrol commander would assume that his messenger is in trouble and would send another message by another route. Furthermore, firing at this time would give the alarm to the patrols operating from the hostile outpost, and they would rush to the rescue of their comrades.”

The Director: “Tell us just how you would go about the capture of the messenger?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would form an ambuscade here with Davis and myself on one side of the road and Carlin on the other side about 25 yards in rear of us. When the messenger arrives at about 10 yards from us, Davis and myself will jump out into the road and order him to surrender. We will endeavor to surprise him and take him without firing a shot. If by any chance he should get by us, Carlin would be in position to intercept him.”

The Director: “Just what would you say when you order him to surrender?”

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would jump out on the side of the road, level my rifle at him and yell at him as loud as I could, ‘Drop your rifle—throw up your hands.’ If he did as ordered I would explain to him that he is now a prisoner of war and that resistance is useless. If he did not do as I told him on the instant or if he made any attempt to escape or move to fire on me I would open fire on him at once. I would take no chances with him.”

The Director: “That seems to be a reasonable solution. This is a very simple proposition and presents little difficulty. It is brought before you at this time merely to show you the procedure that makes for reasonable chances for success. The capture of several scouts or a patrol is a much more difficult undertaking.

“It is a general rule in the attempt to capture members of a patrol that the situation we desire to produce when we meet them is that they should be marching and that we should be halted. By adopting this method, we form an ambuscade.”

Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 8

Director’s Key

1. Conduct class to point where ambush may be arranged for.

2. Distribute Situation No. 8 and explain it.

3. Size up situation. Enemy messenger.

4. Details of ambush and method of capture.

Table 28-W.—RIFLE COMPANY, INFANTRY REGIMENT.
(War Strength)
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
1 |  | Units | Specialist Rating (Class) | Company Headquarters | One Platoon | Total Company (3 Platoons) and Company Headquarters
Platoon Headquarters | 1 Squad | 1 Section (3 Squads and Section Headquarters) [16] | Total Platoon (2 Sections and Platoon Headquarters
2 | Captain |  | 1 |  |  |  |  | 1
3 | First Lieutenants |  | 1[17] | {1} |  |  | {1} | 2(1[17])
4 | Second Lieutenants |  |  |  |  | 2
5 |  | Total Commissioned |  | 2(1[17]) | 1 |  |  | 1 | 5(1[17])
6 | First Sergeant |  | 1 |  |  |  |  | 1
7 | Sergeants, incl. |  | 3 | 1 |  | 1 | 3 | 12
8 |  | Mess |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |
9 |  | Platoon Sergeants |  |  | (1) |  |  |  |
10 |  | Section Leaders |  |  |  |  | (1) |  |
11 |  | Signal |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |
12 |  | Supply |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |
13 | Corporals, incl. |  | 2 |  | 1 | 4 | 8 | 26
14 |  | Company Clerk |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |
15 |  | Section Guides |  |  |  |  | (1) |  |
16 |  | Signal |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |
17 |  | Squad Leaders |  |  |  | (1) | (3) |  |
18 | Pvts. 1st Cl. & Pvts., incl. |  | 17 | 4 | 7 | 21 | 46 | 161[18][19]
19 |  | Barber |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |
20 |  | Buglers |  | (2) |  |  |  |  |
21 |  | Cobbler |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |
22 |  | Cooks (First) | 4th | (2) |  |  |  |  |
23 |  | Cooks (Asst.) | 5th | (2) |  |  |  |  |
24 |  | Mechanics | 6th | (2) |  |  |  |  |
25 |  | Riflemen |  |  |  | (5) |  |  |
26 |  | Riflemen, automatic | 6th |  |  | (1) | (1) | (2) | (6)
27 |  | Riflemen, automatic |  |  |  |  | (2) | (4) | (12)
28 |  | Riflemen, with grenade disch. |  |  |  | (1) |  |  |
29 |  | Runners and Agents |  | (6) | (4) |  |  |  |
30 |  | Tailor |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |
31 |  | Total Enlisted |  | 23 | 5 | 8 | 26 | 57 | 200[19]
32 | AGGREGATE |  | 25 | 6 | 8 | 26[16] | 58 | 205
33 | Pistols |  | 9 | 2 | 1 | 3 | 8 | 33
34 | Rifles |  | 16 | 4 | 6 | 20 | 44 | 148
35 | Rifles, automatic |  |  |  | 1 | 3 | 6 | 18
36 | Rifles, with grenade discharger |  |  |  | 1 | 3 | 6 | 18

16. Includes Section Headquarters (1 Sergeant and 1 Corporal).

17. Second in Command. Not authorized for War Strength Companies organized in time of peace.

18. Includes: 53 Privates 1st Class, 108 Privates. Summary of Specialist Ratings: Fourth Class, 2; Fifth Class, 2; Sixth Class, 8.

19. Includes 6 extra privates.

Table 29-W.—MACHINE GUN COMPANY, INFANTRY REGIMENT
(War Strength)
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9
1 |  | Units | Specialist Rating (Class) | Company Headquarters | Company Train | One Platoon | Total Company (2 Platoons, Company Hq. and Company Train)
Platoon Headquarters | 1 Squad (1 Machine Gun) | 1 Section (2 Squads and Section Headquarters) (b) | Total Platoon (2 Sections and Platoon Headquarters)
2 | Captain |  | 1h |  |  |  |  |  | 1
3 | First Lieutenants |  | 1hx |  | 1 |  |  | 1 | 3(1x)
4 | Second Lieutenants |  | 1hc |  |  |  |  |  | 1
5 |  | Total Commissioned |  | 3(1x) |  | 1 |  |  | 1 | 5(1x)
6 | First Sergeant |  | 1h |  |  |  |  |  | 1
7 | Sergeants, incl. |  | 4 | 1 | 1 |  | 1 | 3 | 11
8 |  | Mess |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |  |
9 |  | Platoon Sergeants |  |  |  | (1) |  |  |  |
10 |  | Reconnaissance |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |  |
11 |  | Section Leaders |  |  |  |  |  | (1) |  |
12 |  | Signal |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |  |
13 |  | Stable |  |  | (1m) |  |  |  |  |
14 |  | Supply |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |  |
15 | Corporals, incl. |  | 2 |  | 2 | 1 | 2 | 6 | 14
16 |  | Agents |  |  |  | (1) |  |  |  |
17 |  | Company Clerk |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |  |
18 |  | Signal |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |  |
19 |  | Squad Leaders |  |  |  |  | (1) |  |  |
20 |  | Transport |  |  |  | (1) |  |  |  |
21 | Privates, 1st Cl. and Priv. |  | 17 | 4 | 7 | 10 | 20 | 47 | 115a
22 |  | Barber |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |  |
23 |  | Buglers |  | (2h) |  |  |  |  |  |
24 |  | Cobbler |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |  |
25 |  | Cooks (First) | 4th | (1) |  |  |  |  |  |
26 |  | Cooks (Asst.) | 5th | (2) |  |  |  |  |  |
27 |  | Gunners | 6th |  |  |  | (1) | (2) | (4) | (3)
28 |  | Gunners |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | (5)
29 |  | Horseshoer | 4th |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |
30 |  | Mechanics | 6th | (2) |  |  |  |  |  |
31 |  | Motorcyclist | 6th |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |
32 |  | Saddler | 5th |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |
33 |  | Tailor |  | (1) |  |  |  |  |  |
34 |  | Miscellaneous |  | (7d) | (1e) | (7d) | (9f) |  |  |
35 |  | Total Enlisted |  | 24 | 5 | 10 | 11 | 23b | 56 | 141
36 | AGGREGATE |  | 27 | 5 | 11 | 11 | 23 | 57 | 146
37 | Horses, riding |  | 6 |  | 1 |  |  | 1 | 8
38 | Mules, draft |  |  |  |  | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16
39 | Mules, riding |  |  | 1 |  |  |  |  | 1
40 | Total Animals |  | 6 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 4 | 9 | 25
41 | Carts, ammunition, M. G. |  |  |  |  | 1 | 2 | 4 | 8
42 | Carts, M. G. gun |  |  |  |  | 1 | 2 | 4 | 8
43 | Bicycles |  | 1 |  | 1 |  |  | 1 | 3
44 | Motorcycles, with side cars |  |  | 1 |  |  |  |  | 1
45 | Miscellaneous |  |  |  |  | 1 | 2 | 4 | 8
46 | Pistols |  | 27 | 5 | 11 | 11 | 23 | 57 | 146

Remarks:

(h)

Mounted on horse.

(m)

Mounted on mule.

(a)

Includes: 35 Privates 1st Class, 80 Privates.

Summary of Specialist Ratings: 4th Class, 2; 5th Class, 3; 6th Class, 6.

(b)

Section Headquarters includes 1 sergeant.

(c)

Reconnaissance Officer.

(d)

Signalmen, runners, agents and orderlies, 1 bicyclist.

(e)

Stable orderly.

(f)

Includes 2 drivers for gun and ammunition carts.

(x)

Second in Command. Not authorized for War Strength Companies organized in time of peace.

1. See explanation of Letter Symbols.

2. Right or left as the case may be.

3. Right or left as the case may be.

4. See explanation of Letter Symbols.

5. Prepared by Major Walter C. Short, Infantry.

6. When the Terrain Exercise is being conducted for non-commissioned officers this explanation should be modified to suit the occasion.

7. In making a solution to this situation on the ground, the exact location of each man of the point, and especially the automatic rifleman, should be indicated and staked out.

8. The details of the advance against the enemy’s position should be discussed by the class and worked out on the ground. It is impossible to consider it in the abstract.

9. Captain James would include in his dispositions any flank patrols that would be out at this time.

10. The terrain may be such as to cause a reversal of this disposition. The idea is that the support on the flank should be posted so as to cover the most exposed flank.

11. See explanation of Symbols.

12. In the preparation of the Terrain Exercise and fitting the problem to the ground, the Director should decide upon the location of the line of observation and the line of resistance and bring out the points indicated above. He should decide upon the location of the outguards and their strength.

13. The Director should take advantage of every opportunity to get members of the class to ask questions. It is by this means that we are able to bring out the tactical points of the problems and make them clear. If no questions are asked, it is natural to assume that the members of the class understand everything that is under discussion, whereas many of them may not understand at all. The more questions a Director can get out of a class the more effective will the training be.

14. The members of the class are already familiar with the detailed dispositions of outguard No. 2.

15. If there is no map available the support commander should indicate as well as practicable the location of the enemy and the road.

Reserve
Officers’
Examiner
SUBJECTS
Administration
Military Law
Customs of the Service
Field Service Regulations
Military Hygiene

“Please RUSH a copy of Reserve Officers’ Examiner to my address”

This is the form of order that comes to us day after day. Sometimes in a letter, sometimes by wire, often accompanied by a request for special delivery service. Many times a passage is added:

“I am ordered up for examination and need the book right away.”

The point we make is this. The mere possession of a copy of Reserve Officers’ Examiner will not prepare you for examination for promotion or keep you in touch with the subjects it covers. You must know its contents. These may not be absorbed by the average man by a casual glance through the book. Its contents must be studied the same as you study anything else you want to learn.

You should not put off getting your copy of Reserve Officers’ Examiner until the last minute—when you are face to face with your examination. Get your copy now. Devote a little time to the study of its contents. Then when the opportunity comes for promotion—as it surely will—you will be prepared for it.

Price, $2.00

Steele’s

Prepared originally for students of the Army Service Schools in conjunction with their course in military history.

Much has been written on the individual campaigns and battles that make up our military history, but this is the only single work that contains a comprehensive narrative of the whole down to and including the Spanish-American War.

The present edition is a reprint from new type and plates of the work which originally appeared in 1909, and which has been unobtainable except in second-hand book shops for many years.

Two handsome volumes in box

Price, $10.00 per set

A postcard will secure a copy for you

EMPLOYMENT OF

MACHINE GUNS

By Major WALTER C. SHORT, Infantry

The first comprehensive study of American machine gun tactics as developed in the World War.

The only text on machine guns based on the present Tables of Organization.

The proper tactical employment of machine guns.

Tactical principles and orders illustrated by means of map problems.

Gives the complete organization and equipment of machine gun units.

Illustrates the effective cooperation of infantry and cavalry machine gun units.

Shows the company machine gun officer how to support the rifleman.

Duties of the personnel and characteristics of machine guns discussed.

PRICE $3.50

Thirty-Minute

Talks—

By

COLONEL M. B. STEWART

and

LT. COL. W. H. WALDRON

Cloth Bound—387 Pages

Explaining is half the work of instructing. Talk saves work—when it is the right kind of talk. For the instructor, explaining—talking is the hardest part because it means constant brushing up, reading, study, thought and planning—all of which takes time, and time counts heavily in the game of intensive training.

THIRTY-MINUTE TALKS are offered as time-savers for the instructor. They are in no sense treatises of the subjects considered—just plain, everyday talks, in language the man new to the service will be able to understand. They will save the instructor’s time by furnishing him with a guide which he may rearrange or elaborate as he chooses.

The subject matter of the Thirty-Minute Talks are as follows:

Organization.

Training.

Instructing.

Physical Development.

Close Order Drill.

Extended Order Drill.

Military Courtesy.

Military Discipline.

Care of Arms and Equipment.

Advance Guards.

Outposts.

Scouting and Patrolling.

Combat.

Approach March and Deployment.

Musketry.

Orders and Messages.

Field Fortifications.

Map Reading.

Military Sketching.

Contouring.

PRICE, $2.50, POSTPAID

U. S. Infantry Association

Washington, D. C.

TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES

Silently corrected typographical errors and variations in spelling.

Archaic, non-standard, and uncertain spellings retained as printed.

Footnotes have been re-indexed using numbers and collected together at the end of the last chapter.

*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TERRAIN EXERCISES ***

Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE

PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works provided that:

• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”

• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.

• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of receipt of the work.

• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™

Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws.

The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility: www.gutenberg.org.

This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.